Home

NT620S/620C - Operation Manual - Anglais - Support

1. J Numeric key wg J Numeric key D Nl Numeric key A Open window Confirm notify PC Display set data Move frame Display set data fi 00000178 00 03 1 00000178 01 03 00000178 01 50 2 7 8 9 T 2 7 8 oT 5 2 7 8 9lT 00 03 00 03 00 03 4 5l el 4 5l el 4ls5lel 4 00 04 1 2 3lcLR 00 04 1 2 30a 00 04 1 2 3A 00000005 0 F En 00000005 ol Tlen 00000005 0 Tlen A Numeric key a J Numeric key P l Numeric key Pe Move frame Display set data i 00000178 00 04 00000178 03 80 T 00000178 2 778 977 8 2 778 977 2 Tapert 00 03 00 03 00 03 4 5 6 4 5 6 Jv 4 6 4 00 04 Tiel aba 00 04 1 21 3R 00 04 aan 00000005 FST TEn 00000005 FST TEn 00000005 FST TEn
2. 108 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Press Exec PRINTER I F CHECK Printer Interface Please connect to printer and Check will be printed execute out at the connected i printer e On completion of the check the message Finish Check will be displayed e On confirming the result press the End touch switch The I O CHECK MENU will be redisplayed Checking and Setting the Calendar and Time Check the setting of the internal clock function by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Other setting screens can then be displayed to set the date and time Select Calendar amp Clock 1 O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch _ DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED CALENDAR amp CLOCK CHECK month day year Fri 05 19 95 hour min sec 13 26 4 amp 7 If you set Calendar amp Clock push Set please End Set e After checking the date and time settings press the End touch switch The O CHECK MENU will be redisplayed 109 System Maintenance Section 3 9 e To change the existing setting press the Set touch switch The CALENDAR amp CLOCK SET screen will be dis CALENDAR amp CLOCK SET month year played it will display the
3. Example e Command ESC s s 0 2 1 0 O M 1B 53 53 30 32 31 30 4F 4D i R O N 7 9 CR 52 4F 4E 37 39 oD Input character string memory table number No 210 Input character string data hexadecimal OMRON Check sum hexadecimal 79 Here it is ascertained that OMRON has been input to character string memory table No 210 PT status notify command Sent from PT to host Command ESC P M Cy Co C3 C4 l4 lo 1B 50 4D wk k k k k k k k k k Data of 1 word Data of 1 word d1 dim d34 d3m S4 s CR n PE k k 2C Te 2 Sal lt 9 kK k k k k k oD 262 Commands Responses Section 6 3 C4 tO C4 First word number of PT status notify area 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9997 l4 lo Number of words in PT status notify area 2 BCD dig its Fixed as 03 3 words d1 to dim d34 to d3y Contents of the 3 words of the PT status notify area 1 to 4 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFF Since initial zeroes are omitted there may be less than 8 digits Individual words of data are delimited by commas S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added Response None e Notifies to the host the fact that there has been a change in the status of the PT and the contents of the PT status notify area have changed However in the following cases a dedicated command is issued and therefore the PT status notify command is not issued Wh
4. Numeral character string Numeral character string setting input field setting input field 123456 123456 41 8 ne ABCDE ais Top touch switch pressed Specified window opens If the cursor moving keys are created automatically during creation of a numeral character string input field with the support tool the window opening function is not set In this case the window to be opened can be specified by modifying the touch switch 4 10 3 Temporary Input Fields Only one numeral or character string setting input field can be registered for a window This input field can be used in combination with a number of numeral and character string input fields on base screens for provisional input before any data is input into the actual input field on the base screen This kind of numer al or character string input field in a window is called a temporary input field Its advantage is that entries can be input into the temporary input field while check ing the current setting on the base screen However if the temporary input field in the window and the input field on the base screen are not of the same type the temporary input field will not be displayed Note also that temporary input fields cannot be used for thumb wheel type input fields The temporary input field will also be unusable and not displayed if it has fewer digits than the actual input field on the base screen
5. 105 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Screen Memory 106 Note Note DIP SWITCH CHECK Forced initialization of screen data Ineffective System Reserved always ON System Menu display Displayed Automatic return at comm error Performed Not used Not used Not used Erase System Program ineffective ONOAPWN 2 3 4 5 6 cea WAG bl ol e After checking the DIP switch statuses press the End touch switch Always switch off the power to the NT620S NT620C before changing DIP switch settings Check the screen memory by using the menu operation from the System Menu shown below When a screen memory check is performed the screen memory is initialized and all the screen data is cleared Check that the data has been backed up by using the support tool Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode System Maintenance Section 3 9 MAINTENANCE MENU Lc Quit j Display History _ W O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Select Screen Memory I O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED SCREEN MEMORY CHECK Press
6. AaBb gt 0039 lt gt of of 31 9 0039 A Character string memory table 39 AaBb Character string memory table 40 Moji This method is convenient when switching the display at the same location for example when monitoring a series of words or when using unique codes to specify individual character strings etc 1 Set the PC area for the numeral memory table to be used for indirect specifi cation of numeral character display using the support tool Set the number i e the number of words of the numeral memory table to 1 2 When creating the screen data with the support tool register for the screen the numeral memory table referenced in indirect specification Set Indrct for Ref way For a character string specify the numeral memory table by using the char acter display function of the support tool For numerical values specify the numeral memory table by using the nu meral display function of the support tool 3 Using the table edit function of the support tool write the data to be dis played to the memory table which is used for display Use a numeral memory table to display numerals and use a character string memory table to display character strings 4 Create a PC program to change the contents of the word allocated to the nu meral memory table which is used in indirect specification e Important points when writing memory tabl
7. dim i dn dnm S4 S2 CR k k 2C wN k k k k k k k oD C4 tO C4 First word number read 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 l4 lo Number of read words 2 BCD digits 01 to 50 1 to 50 words d1 to dim dny to dnm Contents of the read words 1 to 4 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFF Since initial zeroes are omitted there may be less than 4 digits Individual words of data are delimited by commas S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added Reads the contents of the specified number of words from the specified word of the PT memory Used to read the statuses of the PT status notify area lamps touch switches and bit memory tables allocated to the PT memory and the contents of numer al and character string memory tables A maximum of 100 words can be read at one time In the response a maximum of 50 words can be returned at one time If read ing of more than 50 words is specified the response is split into two parts In this case the first part always contains 50 words of data Note also that the first word number read in the second part of the response will be the word number of the first word in the response data Reading the PT status in the PT status notify area allocated words 0010 to 0012 Command ESC R M 8 0 0 1 2 CR 1B 52 4D 38 30 30 31 32 oD No check sum 1 word read first word read 0012 Commands Resp
8. Personal computer Connector for peripheral devices on PT body Shielded wire The table below indicates the recommended parts for making the connection cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2D 0901 9 pin Socket manufactured by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Plug manufactured by OMRON Connector cover XM2S 0911 9 pin millimeter pitch screws manufactured by OMRON See note XM2S 0913 9 pin inch pitch screws manufactured by OMRON Cable AWG28X5P Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd IFVV SB CO MA VV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd 5PX28AWG Note Use the connector cover appropriate for the size of the connector screws for the computer used 313 Appendix Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit By using an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT ALO01 RS 232C can be converted to RS 422A allowing long distance communication of up to 500 m Connection Method OMRON PC a RS 232C cable max 2 m FiIL _RS 232C RS 422 converter unit type RS 422A cable NT AL001 Rs 2a2cins 422 Me cable converter unit type max 2 m NT ALO01 NT620S NT620C Wiring e Wiring of RS 232C cable PT or PC NT ALOO1 Abbrev Pin No Pin No Abbrev Ti n iaso SD 2 3 RD RS 2320 RS 232C RD 3 4 RS interface interface RS 4
9. NT620S 620C Allocated word Numeral memory numeral memory table 18 table 18 DMo0100 PT ee pees gt 0062 ___ 0 0 6 2 A Indirect specification Allocated word Character string character string memory table 62 memory table 62 DM0100 7777 e 7 7 7 7 This specification method is a little complex but it allows the display to be changed more easily according to the circumstances In the example above if 1 were added to the contents of memory table 18 to give 52 the contents of memory table 63 would be displayed instead The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC so that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be displayed i e the contents of character string memory table 62 in the exam ple above However in comparison with direct specification indirect specification re quires more time for processing Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 Setting the Words of the Numeral Memory Table When creating the screen data by using the support tool make the following set tings for each numbered numeral e Initialization setting Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the numeral memory table initial value registered to the screen data memory when the main power supply is turned ON or reset e Number of registration words Set the number of words within 2 words required
10. Each time the or key is touched an in put value is written into the numeral memory Each time the key is touched as table and simultaneously notified to the PC a numeral value increases by 1 4 8 3 Ten Key Creation In order to use the ten key type numeral setting it is necessary to create not only the numeral setting input column in a screen but also a ten key for performing an input operation Screen Attribute Setting A ten key type can be selected by setting a screen attribute The Numeral Setting of the screen attribute is specified to System or User e Screen when System is specified When a numeral setting input field is created numeric keys are automatically displayed Ten key display position and arrangement are fixed In this screen only the type of ten key system key in the following page can be used Tank A Tank B 0000 0000 t TankC TankD 0000 0000 a Tank E Tank F 0000 0000 1J2JsJ4 s e 7 Jee o FF e Screen when User is specified Display position and arrangement of the ten key can be set freely by assigning to the touch switch Refer to page 162 Tank A Tank B 5000 3000 Tank C Tank D 2662 1204 Tank E Tank F 0800 0990 When the numeral setting Keypad attribute is user the numeric keys are created by using the control keys of the touch switch input key function It is also poss
11. Select an operation mode by pressing the corresponding touch switch in the Sys tem Menu The operation modes with respect to the System Menu are related to each other as shown below For the operations with the System Menu refer to the Operations with the Sys tem Menu page 61 le To change system settings or screen data contents Screen data and other data are transmitted between the NT620S 620C and a support tool SYSTEM MENU Maintenance Mode The NT620S 620C maintenance operations such as memory initialize setting check and I O check are executed 59 Operation Modes and the System Menu 3 3 2 Menu Tree Section 3 3 The System Menu allows to effect various NT620S 620C functions by using the touch switches The NT620S 620C s functions with respect to the System Menu are related as shown below For the operations with the System Menu refer to the Operations with the Sys tem Menu page 61 SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode gt MAINTENANCE MENU DISPLAY HISTORY MENU Quit m Quit Time Order page 92 I Display History Frequent Order page 93 page 67 0 Check page 96 VO CHECK MENU L PT Setting Status page 111 L quit Memory Init page 63 7 Memory Switches 4 page 69 Touch Switch page 97 LCD EL Display page 100
12. Peripheral tools SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual C series PCs W248 E1 SYSMAC Support Software Operation Manual CVM1 PCs W249 E1 Host link Unit SYSMAC C Series Host Link Unit System Manual W143 E1 SYSMAC CVM1 CV Series Host Link Operation Manual W205 E1 19 SECTION 2 Hardware Settings and Connections This section describes the settings of the NT620S 620C connections to a PC and other hardware settings 2 1 Description of Parts and Settings 2 2 eee eee 22 2 161 lt Descriptiomor Parts aien reada gS anata a Soe eRe EA E wh Ate age wha cs 22 2 122 DIP Switch Set gs vives gh nds eee Be Re See RRS eae PEs eens 24 222 Installation eisy tines cease ith tee eae tite lat dela A a ae et ae 25 2 2 1 Installation to the Operation Panel 00 cee eee eee ee 25 2 2 2 Power Supply Connection 0 0 eee eee ee 27 2 2 3 0 Grounding mesa ea Mii Sanit E ean ea ey deen ee gael ee ae 28 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool 2 2 eee eens 29 2 4 Installing the System Program 0 0 ee eee eee 30 2 5 Connection to a PC by the Host Link 2 0 0 0 ee eee 32 2 5 1 Compatible PCS swank eranu eee bast anne beans beads Denes BoE waa 32 2 5 2 Connecting the NT620S 620C 1 2 ce ee 33 2 5 3 PC Switch Seti gs hs eee e a eh ie EEE sd ha whee ae he ee eee Ees Ue ees 35 2 6 Connection to aPC by the
13. 0 to 7 Month 01 to 12 8to 15 Year 00 to 99 Last 2 digits of year 16 to 23 Day of week 00 to 06 See below 24 to 31 Vacant Always 00 The numerical values that correspond to the days of the week are as follows Setting example April 27 1995 14 53 30 254 27 14 53 30 255 00 04 95 04 5 6 2 Date and Time Display In order to display the date or time an area in which the contents of numeral memory tables 247 through 253 can be displayed must be set during screen cre ation with the support tool Numeral memory tables 247 through 253 store clock data which is updated by the internal clock of the NT620S 620C This data cannot be rewritten by the PC 229 Clock Function Section 5 6 5 6 3 Date and Time Setting 230 Reference NT620S 620C When the date and time are set from the PC the contents of the numeral memory tables numbered 254 and 255 are rewritten It is possible to use the method of copying between memory tables to set the time as shown below Itis also possible to set the date and time by using function key F3 Time on the Tool Settings screen of the support tool For details see the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 01 It is also possible to set the date and time by using the Calender amp Clock op tion of the I O Check Menu in the maintenance mode It is also possible to set the date and time by rewriting the conten
14. 53 Communication with the Host Using Memory Link Section 2 8 2 7 3 PC Switch Settings When the PC and NT620S NT620C units have been connected set the switches at the CPU module at the PC side in order to enable communication using the NT link method e C series C200HX HG HE Write the communication conditions directly to the PC system area data memory using a peripheral tool e g SYSMAC support software For details on the operation for setting the PC system area refer to the SYSMAC C200HX HG HE OPERATION MANUAL W303 E1 L PC system setting area setting With C200HX HG HE the setting area differs according to which port among the standard port of the CPU module and the ports of the expansion communication board is used for the connection Port Channel Writing Value Settings C200HX HG HE RS 232C port C200HX HG HE DM6555 highest unit No in the port A maximum number of con nectable PTs 1 to 7 Se A DM6550 When using C200HE the PT unit No range is 1 to 3 DM6645 Use NT link 1 N 2 8 Communication with the Host Using Memory Link 54 Connect the NT620S NT620C and host personal computer computer for FA applications etc using the memory link method In order to do this the memory link system must be installed using the system installer In addition the communication conditions must be s
15. CPU unit DIP switch settings 2 RS 232C port communication condition settings Ce Set DIP switch 5 to OFF right side to enable ay the PC system settings wo e e g a e a e ON OFF Switch settings CPM1 Set the mode setting switch to the HOST upper position 41 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 PC system setting area settings Write settings to the PC system setting area data memory according to the port used to connect to the NT620S 620C 42 e When using the RS 232C port of a C200HX HG HE Channel Writing Value Settings DM6645 0001 Host link mode and conditions are set DM6646 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9600 bps 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6648 0000 Unit 0 e When using port A of C200HX HG HE Channel Writing Value Settings DM6555 0001 Host link mode Set the conditions with the contents of DM DM6556 0303 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 9600 bps DM6558 0000 Unit No 0 e When using port B of C200HX HG HE Channel Writing Value Settings DM6550 0001 Host link mode Set the conditions with the contents of DM DM6551 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 1
16. J Numeric key e l Numeric key e A Numeric key zA Move frame Move frame Display set data Number of input digits exceeded Delete temporary input field 177 Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 4 11 Alarm List amp History Display Functions The NT620S 620C can monitor the state of PC contacts of the host and display the corresponding message using the character string memory table or image library alarm list display when particular contact becomes 1 ON The NT620S 620C can record that those contacts become 1 ON and also dis play them in the order of frequency or occurrence alarm history display 4 11 1 Alarm List Display Alarm list display has the following functions Displaying the Message Character String Memory Table and Image Library 178 The NT610C monitors multiple contacts according to the setting of the bit memory table and displays the character string memory table message set to the corresponding bit memory table when there is any contact that becomes 1 ON Since the display column of a message is also a touch switch correspond ing image library can be displayed by pressing the message being displayed If the description of alarms is provided in the character string memory table and the corrective actions against those alarms are described in the image library it is possible to take appropriate measures rapidly e To display multiple messages W
17. PT memor Numeral y memory table Lamp lt Direct connection RS 232C communication or RS 422A communication Seen from the perspective of the NT620S NT620C when using the memory link method it makes no difference whether the object communicated with in direct connection is external or internal and therefore screen data for direct commu nication can be used without alteration by merely changing the object of commu nication 1 5 2 Differences with Respect to Direct Connection There are the following two major differences between the memory link method and normal direct connection a With the memory link method commands must be used for the final stage of communications with the host Because of this in comparison with the direct connection method which can be used with almost no requirement for a program the burden on the host is much greater However because the memory link method gives unrestricted access to the extensive functions of direct connection from a variety of equipment capable of RS 232C RS 422A communications such as personal computers and FA computers it ex pands the range of use of the PT b Since the PT memory is a single area there is no division into different types of area as there is in the actual areas in a PC there is only one type of area In the memory link method the PT memory is made a vir
18. SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC 9 pin connector Host I F connector 25 pin connector z RS 232C 9 pin type RS 232C connector cable Use the following recommended cables OMRON Applicable Type Cable Length Host Link Unit C500 LK203 mee EONS C500 LK201 V1 25 pin to 9 pin C120 LK201 V1 XW2Z 500S C200H LK201 V1 CV500 LK201 Connector Specification 33 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Connecting to a PC with a 9 pin Connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends to connect the NT620S 620C to a PC with a 9 pin connector The connector cable wiring for the C series CPU unit COOH is different from that for the other PCs For details refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 NT620S 620C Host link unit CPU unit SYSMAC C series PC CVM1 CV series PC 9 pin connector 5 Host I F connector B 9 pin connector Ti RS 232C 9 pin type J RS 232C connector cable Connecting the NT620S 620C to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit Two types of connectors are provided to CV500 LK201 host link unit Both of these connector types can connect to the NT620S 620C with an RS 232C con nector cable Select the connector cable which matches the connector type e To connect to communication port 1 OO OO Communications ort 1 RS 232C
19. 0 0 00 eee cece eee 81 3 8 2 Using the B ZET sot oy a eae oho te ee i Sa Be eae 83 3 8 3 Screen Saver Function NT620S Backlight OFF Function NT620C 85 3 8 4 Resume Function 0 0 eee ce eee eens 87 3 8 5 Screen Printing Function se sss sosi sc as ee b ee debe eee eee ne 89 3 9 System Maintenance s ereti rech Sees pee Ge Ee pe ee Fane See Ge Ge 92 3 9 1 Using the Display History Recording Function 0 0 92 32922 VO Check naines iets t Wale Sen phe aduhw ed eteay Seber e eg ee he eed 96 3 9 3 Checking the PT Setting Status 0 0 00 0 eee eee eee 111 57 Starting the NT620S 620C Section 3 2 3 1 Operation Flow by the System Menu Follow the procedure below when using the NT620S 620C for the first time or when changing the system Reference A dedicated system program is required in order to use the memory link Refer to 2 4 Installing the System Program page 30 Be sure to install the system program in advance Create the Screen Data Create the screen data to be displayed on the NT620S 620C by using a support tool For the screen data creation refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 01 Start Up the NT620S 620C Display the System Menu page 58 Turn ON the power to the NT620S 620C When no screen data has been registered the SYSTEM MENU will be dis played If the NT620S 620C enters the RUN mode press approp
20. day Fri 06 00 06 time at the instant the Set hour min De A6 4 7 touch switch was pressed Push touch switch and set time after that push Save Exit please If you will cancel push Cancel please Each of the digits of the date day and time settings is a touch switch and the value it displays can be changed incrementally 0 1 2 by pressing the touch switch note there is no carry over to the next higher digit if a full cycle is completed Specify the date day of the week and time Note that no strict input check is performed make sure that the settings are correct e On completing setting press the Save Exit touch switch The calendar and time specifications will be set and the CALENDAR amp CLOCK CHECK screen will be redisplayed e To cancel the settings press the Cancel touch switch This will redisplay the CALENDAR amp CLOCK CHECK screen without setting the specified date and time e Calendar and clock setting can also be executed by operation from the Tool Settings screen of the support tool or by using numeral memory table opera tions For details on the setting procedure when using the support tool refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L and for details on the setting procedure using numeral memory tables refer to 5 6 Clock Func tion page 229 Checking the backlight NT62
21. 010009 7 Alarm list Character string memory table 120 Material low Bit memory table 23 Bit 010009 lt _ Character string memory table 120 When the PC bit comes ON 1 the contents of the character string memory table registered for the bit memory table are displayed in the alarm list When the bit returns to the OFF 0 status the character string memory table display is automatically cleared Functions of the PT Status Control Area PC to NT620S 620C The PT status control area is used to control the NT620S 620C status When data is written to this area in the PC the NT620S 620C reads the contents and operates according to the contents Example of the PT status control area application When data is written to the PT status control area the NT620S 620C will operate as given below dwg DA 4 Ja DEZE Continuous buzzer sound PT status control area Screen switch setting 0050 Memory table LO T Copy setting PT status control bits Numeral memory table 50 Craney Copy q Numeral memory table 7 Enee 15 Communication Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 Functions of the PT Status Notify Area NT620S 620C to PC 16 The PT status notify area is used to notify the changes of the NT620S 620C status When achange is made in the NT620S 620C status the change is written to this area in the PC By reading the data from the area the NT
22. Procedure 1 0 OFF Deleted 1 ON Displayed Select TBL EDIT from the support tool editing menu set the allocated bit of the bit memory table in the PC area then set the corresponding alarm mes sage When creating screen data with the support tool register the alarm list speci fied by the bit memory table in 1 above for the screen Create the PC program to switch the allocated bit of the bit memory table ON and OFF Image library data corresponding to alarm messages Apart from alarm messages image library data can also be set for bit memory tables The alarm list is composed of touch switches and touching pressing an alarm message will display the corresponding image library data for your guidance Alarm Lists Section 5 5 Example of Alarm List Display In this example if the temperature in a water tank rises above the upper limit a bit is turned ON and the alarm message corresponding to it is displayed e Support tool settings The following settings are made using the support tool Bit memory table No 20 CH 001512 Bit memory table No 21 CH 000407 Bit memory table No 22 AR 000000 Bit memory table No 23 LR 001003 Bit memory table No 24 LR 001004 Data registered for the screen Alarm list Alarm list Image library data display area Starting bit table number 20 Number of reference tables 5 e PC program A ladder program to control the NT620S 620C is n
23. This is a 25 pin RS 232C connector Use a connector cable with a 25 pin con nector on one end and a 9 pin connector on the other end NT620S 620C side Communications port 2 RS 232C RS 422A VO port e To connect to communication port 2 selector itch RS 232C This is a 9 pin RS 232C RS 422 connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends D T RS 422 mmm Set the I O port selector switch to the RS 232C side upper side to use this port Connecting the NT620S 620C to a C Series CQM1 Unit CQM1 can connect to the NT620S 620C by the RS 232C method Use an RS 232C 9 pin type connector cable e To connect to the RS 232C port This is a 9 pin RS 232C connector Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connec tor on both ends Connecting to C Series C200HX HG HE When using C series C200HX HG HE models the NT620S NT620C can be con nected to the standard port of the CPU unit or to ports A and B of the expansion communication board Procure an RS 232C 9 pin type connection cable for the connection For details on the specifications installation method etc of the communication board used for the connection refer to the SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Installation Guide W302 E1 L 34 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Connecting to C Series CPM1 The CPM1 is connected via an RS 232C adapter type CPM1 CIF01 Procure an RS 232C 9 pin type connection c
24. page 151 and 5 7 NT620C 620C Status Control page 234 2 9 1 How to Connect Reference Connect the printer to the NT620S 620C with a Centronics cable The length of the cable should not exceed 3 meters If the connection cable is connected or disconnected while the power of the printer is on the NT620S 620C may malfunction Make sure to turn off the pow er of the printer before connecting or disconnecting the connection cable EPSON ESC P g Color Printer 24 pin Monochrome Printer 24 pin 55 Connecting a Printer Section 2 9 e Recommended connection cable The following connection cable is recommended NT CNT121 connection cable 1 5 m 20 pin to 36 pin e Recommended printer EPSON ESC P Printer 24 pin Color or Monochrome HP Printer Monochrome If using other printer such printer should conform to ESC P 24 J81 which is the printer control standard of Epson If using an HP printer make sure that it conforms to the PCL5 standard When using a monochrome printer with an NT620S 620C set ESC P TONE with the NT620S 620C memory switches see page 89 56 SECTION 3 System Menu Operation This section describes the operation of the System Menu focusing on the procedure to start up the NT620S 620C Functions which will be convenient to use the NT620S 620C and those which are useful f
25. 46 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 6 e CVM1 CV series EVL When connecting to a CVM1 CV series EVL CPU set the switches as given below I O port selector switch RS 232C I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C NT link 1 1 cannot be used with RS 422A RS 422 DIP switch setting SW3 NT link setting Set SW3 to ON position right side to set use NT link OFFS ON Correct use When using CVM1 CV series always set CPU execution processing execu tion control 2 in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 6 e RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT ALO01 When an NT620S NT620C is connected in an RS 422A type 1 1 connection set the DIP switches of the RS 232C RS 422A converter unit NT ALO01 used as a relay as follows ON Factory settings 1 ye ee ae SHO RA I 000 Q Setting for built in terminal resistor DIP switch SW1 2 Set SW1 2 to ON Setting for set built in terminal resistor Selection of 2 wire type 4 wire type DIP switches SW1 3 SW1 4 Set both SW1 3 and SW1 4 to OFF Setting for 4 wire type Selection of RS 422A transmission mode DIP switches SW1 05 SW1 6 Set both SW1 5 and S
26. 8 colors red green blue yellow magenta cyan white black Color specification NT620C only Display color background color boundary color line color Maximum Amount of Various Data Item Specifications Character string data 40 characters normal size x 1000 744 data are only for reading operation Numeral data 8 digit x 1000 Bit data One contact x 256 Mark data 224 in terms of 16 x 16 dots Image data 224 Library data 896 Touch switches Lamps Special Features Each 1024 Specifications Three kinds of sound continuous sound intermittent short sound intermittent long sound ON Reception of a command from the PC buzzer setting screen display error screen display such as abnormal reception OFF Reception of a command from the PC Bl key input screen display without buzzer setting Sound pressure Min 80 dB Average 87 dB measured at 10 cm in front Setting Set the Buzzer Sound to ON in the MEMORY SWITCH MENU ERR ON for only when an error occurs Maintenance function e Self test function such as memory switch e Setting condition confirmation function such as communication condition e Communication check function Battery retention e Retention of display history data alarm history data e Retains the numeral character string memory table data that existed immediately before operation w
27. Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 Since these scrolling keys are automatically shown in reverse video when there are any messages in front or behind those keys it is found whether or not there are any messages that are not displayed Switching the Image Library to be Displayed The message display column also serves as a touch switch By selecting the message touch switch displayed corresponding image library can be dis played Switching over to the Corresponding Screen When the second message is pressed To the bit memory table used for the alarm list display function corresponding screen number can be set as well as corresponding character string memory table message and image library When the screen number has been set by pressing the message once again that is being selected in the section above Switching the image library to be dis played it is possible to switch over to and display that screen Example Message Character String Table No 50 tag Character String Table No 32 Screen 32 Image Library FE68 Return When the same mes sage is pressed again Image library corresponding Screen corresponding to to the second message the second message Setting the Alarm List Display Function Setting the Bit Memory Table 180 When the alarm list display function is used it is necessary to set the
28. DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED e f the buzzer function is normal the continuous buzzer sound will be made e To stop the buzzer sounding press the Buzzer touch switch again Reference Though memory switch setting for the buzzer has been made for OFF the buzz er will sound when the buzzer check is executed 102 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the LED Check the LED by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU pe UO One N Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch LED I O CHECK MENU ale Quit Battery Touch Switch _ DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED The RUN LED on the front face of the NT620S 620C will flash alternately green and red The POWER LED will remain lit e To quit the LED check press the LED touch switch again Checking the Battery Voltage Check the battery voltage by using the menu operation from the System Menu shown below 103 Syst
29. Hexane Lubricating oils Benzene Butane Carbonic acid Chlorinated solvents Napthalene Soya oil Toluene For information on protection against chemical agents not included in the table above please ask OMRON If it is a chemical agent to which silicone rubber is recognized to be resistant the cover can be used with confidence even if that chemical agent is not listed in the Protects Against column above Reference This cover does not afford protection against all chemical agents Since the cover is milky white it reduces the clarity of the display a little This cover is intended to be affixed to the display in order to provide protection against chemical agents It will not provide protection against chemical agents that enter through the installation panel or through the gap between the cover and the display 324 Option List Appendix K Battery 3G2A9 BAT08 This is a lithium battery used for memory backup 325 Appendix L OMRON C Series Memory Map Area IR Area HR Area AR Area PC Memory Map Link Relay Area er Area Timer Count DM Area C20H C28H C40H C60H Ladder type 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 0000 to 1999 C120 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0031 0000 to 0127 0000 to 0051 C200H 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 0000 to 1999 C200HS
30. od oe BT Cae OO SALT Gate a c m OOQ ot aT For process A Pressing the F8 In Scr key on the File Selection screen allows you to set the NT620S NT620C memory switches the settings are actually made when the screen data is transmitted Transmitting Screen Data to the NT620S 620C Transmit the screen data created by using the support tool to the NT620S 620C screen data memory Connect the NT620S 620C to the support tool and set the NT620S 620C to Transmit Mode Then press the F6 Transmit key in the File List screen to transmit the created screen data to the NT620S 620C For the connection procedure to the support tool refer to Section 2 3 Connect ing to the Support Tool page 29 For the transmission of the screen data refer to Section 3 6 Registering the Screen Data page 77 119 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 4 2 Outline of Functions 4 2 1 NT620S 620C Screen Composition of the Screen This section gives the outline of the screen which is the basis of all NT620S 620C functions For specific operation procedure such as screen switching refer to Section 4 3 Screen Display page 129 The screen data displayed on the screen is created using the support tool which is installed in a personal computer Created screen data is registered in the screen data memory of the NT620S NT620C For details on screen data regis tration see 3 6 Registe
31. page 204 205 211 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 e Available allocation words The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs CV Series PCs Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK A 1wordonly x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 5 3 Lamps and Touch Switches 5 3 1 Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps Lamps are controlled by allocating them to the PC bits Set the area and bit num ber e Available allocation bits The lamps can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map
32. 3 5 2 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed Host Link Only When the host link is used the baud rate of the communications with the PC can be set Note that the baud rate setting is made only with the host link communica tion method Select 9600 bps or 19200 bps Select the baud rate of the communication with the PC by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Memory Switches MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History LI O Check LPT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Each time the Host Link MEMORY SWITCH MENU Speed touch switch is Quit Comm Method Host Link pressed the setting option 9600 bps alternates with 19200 bps Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps Buzzer Sound ON Screen Saver None J Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU 73 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 3 Setting Unit Numbers NT Link 1 N Only 74 When using the NT620S NT620C with the NT link 1 N communication method se
33. 9000 Display the screen sound intermittent buzzer 103 Word for PT status control 238 ANDW 34 3 103 Word for PT status control CFFF Only continuous and short intermittent 103 buzzers are 0 Word for PT status control Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 8 e Program operation 1 The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09002 turns OFF This command block is not executed when bit 09003 is ON Screen display bit 15 1 Performed Continuous buzzer bit 13 1 Sounded The NT620S 620C continuous buzzer sounds 2 The PT status control bits are set as shown below when bit 09003 turns OFF Screen display bit 15 1 Performed Short intermittent buzzer bit 12 1 Sounded The NT620S 620C intermittent buzzer sounds 3 The PT status control bits are set as shown below when both bits 09002 and 09003 turn ON Continuous buzzer bit 13 0 Not sounded Short intermittent buzzer bit 12 0 Not sounded The NT620S 620C buzzer stops 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC NT620S 620C Operating Status The status operating statuses etc of the NT620S 620C can be determined from the PC by reading the PT status word in the PT status notify area allocated in the PC memory By reading the PT status in the PT status notify area allocated to the PC it is possible to ascertain the operating status of the NT620S NT620C
34. NT620S 620C Programmable Terminals OPERATION MANUAL OMRON omron S Authorized Distributor NE D Cat No V033 E1 5 Note Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in Japan 0401 0 7M 0597 NT620S 620C Programmable Terminals Operation Manual Revised April 2001 OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else The abbreviation Host means PC that controls NT620S 620C Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying
35. Sign display setting Decimal hexadecimal display setting Zero suppress setting The character display color and character background color can only be speci fied when using an NT620C When displaying the same numeral memory table simultaneously on more than one screen make sure the display attributes are the same on all screens If the display attributes are changed correct display may not be possible Reference Zero suppress setting The numeral data are displayed in designated display areas as right aligned If the number of digits of a numeral data is smaller than that of the display area number 0 s will be displayed at the vacant digits These 0 s will not be dis played if the zero suppress setting is made for Yes 4 4 3 Bit Memory Table The Bit Memory Table is an internal memory for contact data The NT620S 620C can use a maximum of 256 Bit Memory Tables One contact status on the PC can be stored in a single Bit Memory Table Functions of Bit Memory Table There are two functions of Bit Memory Table e Screen changeover function When any contact on the PC to which the Bit Memory Table is assigned is changed from 0 OFF to 1 ON the screen is changed over to show a screen being set to that contact Contact PC Screen number 10k Ngy a Screen number je Screen number 11 0 lt 10N 11 displayed Screen numbe
36. This section describes the screen information required for the operation with the NT620S 620C For the actual method used to change the displayed screen see Switching the Screen Display page 191 For the actual method used determine the screen number of a displayed screen see Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To display the Number of Currently Displayed Screen page 195 4 3 1 Classification of Screens Normal Screen Overlapping Screen The NT620S 620C is provided with the following types of screens which are clas sified by the display method Normal screen Overlapping screen Continuous screen The screen type is set with each screen in the Screen Selection screen of the support tool Select a screen type according to the purpose and create charac ters and figures on the screen The details of each screen type are given below A normal screen is the basic screen of the NT620S 620C It is not necessary to select a screen type overlapping or continuous when to create the screen data on anormal screen When a normal screen is selected existing screens will be erased and a normal screen will be displayed Several normal screens can be overlapped and displayed as one screen A group of overlapped screens is called an overlapping screen Several normal screens are displayed in the order of screen numbers which have been designated to each screen and form an overlapping screen Up to ei
37. host link Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 1 0 port RS 422A RS 232C Synchronization Internal External Termination resistance ON ov External 5V supply OFF 1 0 port RS 422A RS 232C Synchronization Internal External Termination resistance ON Brtemal _ Setting the rear switches I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C Unit DIP SW1 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal Baud rate DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON e C500 C1000H C2000H rack mounting type C500 LK203 Setting the rear switches I O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 7 Set SW1 1 to SW1 7 to OFF 0 Synchronization selector switch Set this to Internal Baud rate DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 O
38. i i Oo Oo Oo n 2 PT ZANE notify bits l 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 Bit E ees S olol PT status es Character string setting strobe flag Character string memory table No 000 to 999 Data is written to the content upgrade memory table as three digits of BCD binary coded decimal data When the character string setting strobe flag bit has been notified to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on the method for storing a number in the word allocated for the char acter string table see Allocation Words and Display of the Memory Tables page 201 e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status notify area can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory O Data memory O Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appen dix L PC Memory Map page 327 223 Numeral and Character string Setting Section 5 4 Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status
39. 1 2 3 Principal Functions of NT620S 620C 0 ee ce ee 6 1 2 4 Displays 22 a ye var coe eae ee tive a A eR ie ee ES we 7 E3 System Configuration sse c 0 6 95 65 ee oe hae b POM Dawe ERO ye VERDE OR TR PERO 5 Reo 8 1 4 Communication Using the Direct Connection Function 0 00 11 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function usses eseese eee eee ee eee 11 1422s ONT LAD Kee enh a ses Bee eaea Pen chee DES PRAT ESE hans eats 12 1 4 3 Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words 00 00 0000 0000 13 1 5 Communication Using the Memory Link 000 0 eee eee eee 17 S E Memory Link neierens weit Ab eh ode peated oda ee 17 1 5 2 Differences with Respect to Direct Connection 0 0 00 eee eee 17 1 6 Before Operating merear cee eee be ee IAA OR ASAE ANE RRS ER 18 Role and Operation of NT620S 620C Section 1 1 1 1 Role and Operation of NT620S 620C NT620S 620C is a programmable terminal used to display and transmit the in formation in an FA site The following gives a general description of the role and operation of the NT620S 620C for those who use a programmable terminal PT for the first time 1 1 1 Operation of an NT620S 620C at an FA Production Site Production Line Status Monitoring Messages The NT620S 620C displays real time information about the system and equipment operating status etc Production Control Cha
40. 3 Enter the Transmit Mode by operating the menu of the NT620S 620C as mentioned below Select Transmit Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode TRANSMIT MODE 4 Select a screen data to be transmitted to the NT620S 620C in the File Selec tion screen of the support tool and press the Send key 5 The NT620S 620C will display the following screen when the screen data is being transmitted 4 TRANSMIT MODE Tool PT Screen Data 78 Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6 Note 6 When the screen data transmission is completed the support tool will display the following screen 4 Data successfully transmitted Hit any key to continue 7 Press any key on the support tool to return to the File Selection screen 8 Pressing the Abort touch switch in the Transmit Mode screen of the NT620S 620C will exit the Transmit Mode and enter the RUN Mode Press the Abort touch switch on the NT620S 620C when the screen data transmission is completed Unless this touch switch is pressed the screen data will not be correctly registered If the Abort touch switch is pressed during transmission the screen data will not be correctly registered If screen data cannot be transmitted from the support tool properly check wheth er communication between the NT620S 620C and support tool personal co
41. 42 lt displayed lt 1 ON Reference The screens numbered 1997 to 1999 are earmarked for special functions as shown below The display history can be checked by calling them during opera tion 1997 Display history order of occurrence screen 1998 Display history order of frequency screen 1999 Screen when connected to the host e Available allocation bits Bit memory tables can be allocated to the following areas of the PC C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for purposes other than system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 Procedure 1 Use the support tool to set the following for the following for a bit memory table a screen switching function the screen number of the screen to be dis played and the area of the PC to which the bit is to be allocated 2 At the PC write the program that will switch the allocated bit from OFF to ON and switch the screen display In cases such as that where a warning screen is to be displayed when a par ticular bit is
42. 5 9 Send data O 9 Receive data S 9 Request to send S o Clear to send Q Signal ground La Optical connector 5V see note 2 13 25 Send signal element timing 2 see note 1 Receive signal element timing see note 1 Data terminal ready Data signal element timing see note 1 Note 1 No element timing signals on C200H LK201 V1 2 C500 LK201 and C200H LK201 V1 only 302 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G e Wiring connections The NT620S 620C does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only NT620S 620C PC host link unit Abbreviation RAHE P er Abbreviation FG 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS ineriaco interface cs 5 5 cs 5V 6 6 7 7 SG 8 8 SG 9 Shielding _ _ wire Pasa Pn le See el 20 ER 25 pin connector Connecting an NT620S 620C to a C Series CPU C H e C series CPU unit C H 9 pin connector specifications Applicable CPU C20H C28H C40H C60H Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signa
43. RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit page 315 System Configuration Section 1 3 NT Link 1 N Systems When NT600S units are connected to a PC in a 1 N connection use an RS 232C cable and RS 422A 485 cables C200HX HG HE Controls the NT620S NT620C as required Can also be connected to a communication board See page 55 RS 232C cable when using RS 232C port max length 2 m or RS 422A cable when using RS 422A port RS 422A 485 cable Printer Can print out screens being displayed at the NT620S NT620C 1 Total cable length 500 m RS 232C RS 422 converter unit type NT ALO01 When the RS 232C port is used for connection at the PC connected to convert between RS 232C and RS 422A When the RS 422A port is used for connection at the PC the RS 422A 485 cable can be connected directly RS 232C cable max length 2 m NT620S NT620C Connect the RS 232C cable via an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit Computer IBM PC AT or compatible NT620S NT620C In addition to applications such as monitoring production lines and displaying messages such as instructions transmitted to the workplace also notifies the ON OFF status of switches and numerical input to the PC 10 i during machine control line monitoring etc In an NT link 1 N up to eight NT620S NT620C units can be connected to a single PC port Bar code readers pr
44. apex indicates a single Memory Table value Since a minimum of one dot width is required to display one Memory Table val ue as a polygonal line maximum number of Memory Table capable of referring in accordance with a graph frame width is determined by the following equa tion Graph frame width number of dots 2 Number of referring Memory Table e Data value This attribute specifies the data value at every polygonal line For the speci fying method the same is also true as the bar graph Refer to page 139 146 Graphs Section 4 5 representation cannot be performed for the polygon e Graph line type This attribute specifies a graph line type among those as shown below A graph width is fixed at one dot Line color can be selected out of eight colors Solid line Broken line 1 dot chain line 2 dot chain line e Differences when a broken line graph is displayed using percentage values When value is in the following range the graph displaying method is re stricted as follows 1 In case of negative value A graph is displayed differently depending on the sign representation Without sign representation Displayed in the same manner as 0 With sign representation A graph is displayed in the negative direction 2 When an absolute value of is from 100 to 999 A graph is not displayed in this range of Only a part of value within the graph frame is displayed The v
45. eb 2 Q wo S eb lt S N m ge wo O N ne O Oo Special Characters Hex Digits ist 2nd no m DM to m AJN w m ol T a N N o m O TI a m N m j m o m gt m m n e N m gi m w Appendix M 7 wo We Ne 7 T TI TI TI Ww TI O nm N oO TT Tl N om AK _ x 1 Used as the prefix for library data codes 2 bytes x 2 Used as the prefix for image data codes 2 bytes x 3 Used as the prefix for mark data codes 2 bytes Note In order to input these characters using the support tool enter the relevant character code with the numer al keys while holding down the ALT key 330 Index A Alarm list display 178 225 Alarm list function 136 Alarm lists 15 225 Alarm messages 225 Allocatable bits and words 186 Allocated bit 13 Allocated word 13 Allocation of ten key 162 Alternate Touch switch 215 Apex interval broken line graph 148 Arc 126 Automatic reset 271 B Back col 132 Background color 117 Bar graph 138 Battery 240 325 Baud rate 54 Bit memory table 15 136 193 225 Broken line graph 145 Buzzer attribute 131 237 C C200HX HG HE 10 Cable 301 313 Cable preparation 310 Cables with connectors 313 Cautions on replacing the NT620S NT620C 279 CFL case lid 23 273 Ch
46. movement For example lamp No 0 lights when the robot arm moves up and goes out when it stops moving up 5 3 3 Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches Method for PC Notification and NT620S 620C Control 214 Two types of bit can be allocated to touch switches notify bits which serve to notify statuses to the PC and control bits which control the lighting flashing of the touch switches for other functions only lamp bits can be allocated Whena touch switch is pressed the notify bit status changes and when the control bit is ON the touch switch lights or flashes Press MOISES Lights In order to notify the status of a touch switch to the PC the touch switch must be allocated to a specified PC bit so that it can be managed Designate the area and bit number To use touch switches for notification to the PC the following settings must be made using the support tool touch switch bit setting notify bit e Types of notification operation When using Ver 2 or a later version of the direct connection function it is pos sible to select one of four types of notification operation that occur when the touch switch is pressed with Ver 1 of the direct connection function the setting is fixed as momentary Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 Momentary When the touch switch is pressed the bit comes ON and when it is released the bit goes OFF Alternate When the touch sw
47. page 327 To set the data memory DM specify the word number and then the bit number 00 to 15 5 3 2 Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the Lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits The following describes the procedure to change the lamp display status on the NT620S 620C by changing the contents of the allocated bits 212 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 To change the lamp display status on the NT620S 620C turn ON and OFF the lamp control bit allocated in the PC NT620S 620C Lamp No 1 Lamp No 2 Allocated bit Lamp No 1 y Y Ge 1 lt 1 ON Unlit Allocated bit Lamp No 2 2 lt 0 OFF The lamp control bit indicates the lamp status as follows 0 OFF Unlit 1 ON Lit reverse display or flashing Procedure 1 Use the support tool to set the PC memory area where the lamp control bit is to be allocated to 2 Register the lamps to the screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool 3 Create a PC program to turn ON OFF the lamp bit Use the support tool to set the lamp display attributes whether the lamp is lit or flashing when the lamp control bit is turned ON e Image and library lamp data With the NT620S 620C it is possible to set lamps that display any required image or library data in their lit status and in their unlit status For details see Image Library LAMP Setting page 151 Application
48. recording or otherwise without the prior written permis sion of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the informa tion contained in this publication TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS 6 4645 tc sowed sorn tana eueeaars xi 1 Intended Audiences o rreran sobs BARREN bee oh EEG eS oR aks REBAR Be E bend xii 2 General INO E E E E E E E N be ek core 8 Bb E levee E EE E xii 3 Safety Precautions 0 24 04 6404 8 ieta e Gee E E bea ta EO EE aE be aed ee xii SECTION 1 Functions of the NT620S 620C 200 pom 1 1 Role and Operation of NT620S 620C 0 ee eee 2 1 2 Functions of NT620S 620C 0 cee eee nee 4 1 3 System Configuration ici Soc a aes ni Rake eee wh Ree eke Bee wa AES 8 1 4 Communication Using the Direct Connection Function 0 0 11 1 5 Communication Using the Memory Link 0 0 00 eee ee eee ee 17 1 6 Before Operating cscs u cece pone enkes back werd Ge AR he eo eed 18 SECTION 2 Hardware Settings and Connections 21
49. rminal Signal Name 1 FG FG 1 Ground for safety 2 SD SG 2 Signal ground RS 422A 3 RD SDB 3 Receive data interface RS 422A 4 RS RS 2320 interface SDA 4 Receive data 5 CS RDB 5 Send data 6 5V RDA 6 Send data 7 DSR CSB 7 8 ER CSA 8 9 SG Terminal block 9 pin 309 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G Making the Cable The procedure to make up the cable is described below Cable Preparation The preparation of the cable differs according to whether or not the shielding wire is to be connected to the FG e Cable with shielding wire connected to FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length 2 Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath 3 Cut back the shielding wire with scissors 4 Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire 5 Fold back the shielding wire 6 Wrap aluminum foil tape around the folded back shielding wire 1 2 3 4 Units mm in Aluminum foil tape e Cable with shielding wire not connected to FG 1 Cut the cable to the required length 2 Remove the external vinyl insulation from the cable with a razor blade Take care not to damage the shielding underneath Cut back the shielding wire with scissors 4 Use wire strippers to strip the insulation from each wire 310 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appe
50. screen 3 When the numeral value entered is confirmed it is written into the numeral memory table and simultaneously sent to the PC Numeral setting input field 4 p NT620S 620C Displa ni sans Writing Notifying 1294 gt 1234 o Enter Host Numeral Memory Table Touch Switch Reference It is possible to disable input to a numeral setting input field by using a system control PT status control area operation see page 235 Numerical Values that can be Input and Attributes that can be Set Numeral values up to 8 digit up to 7 digit for negative numbers can be entered in decimal and hexadecimal notation e Entry of decimal number When the display attribute is set to decimal number display a numeral value can be entered in decimal Range of numeral values Range of numeral values that can be entered differs depending on a sign With a sign not displayed 0 to 99999999 8 digit With a sign displayed 9999999 to 99999999 7 digit negative num ber 8 digit positive number For a thumb wheel type numeric values are up to 7 digit for both positive and negative numbers with signs displayed Decimal point To the right of the decimal point a maximum of 7 digit can be entered up to 6 digit for negative numbers e Entry of hexadecimal number When the display attribute is set to hexadecimal number display a numeral val ue
51. value is more than 100 one and 100 value be more than 0 one without fail Memory table referring method Numeral Memory Table number to be referred is specified instead of a nu meric value With this method specified each data value can be changed from the Host during operation e Display Value can be displayed Value can be calculated according to the following equation Referred Numeral Memory Table value 0 Value 100 Value 0 Value or 0 Value 100 Value Attribute of numeric value displayed is the same as that for character display Refer to the Numerals which can be Displayed page 135 Value x 100 e Sign display and display method Select whether or not the bar graph which indicates a value below 0 is dis played 139 Graphs Section 4 5 To display a value below 0 Sign display Yes The bar graph is displayed in the range of 100 to 100 The middle of the bar graph indicates 0 pe display 60 A A A 100 0 100 Not to display a value below 0 Sign display No The bar graph is displayed in the range of 0 to 100 The end of the bar graph indicates 0 Values below 0 are indicated as 0 display 60 A A 0 100 e Differences in the bar graph display method according to the values The bar graph display method varies according to the value range 1 When the value is in the minus range The di
52. 1 and when it is released the bit turns OFF 0 Numeral memory table Allocation destination Word Numeral memory table 1 TIM003 iikka kaa 1612 TIMOO3 1 6 1 2 ooo5cH A 2 3 C Numeral memory table 150 0005CH Allocate numeral memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC If word contents change when corresponding numeral memory table is displayed on the screen the value on the screen will also change Monitoring of words can also be made easily Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words are always the same as those of the numeral memory tables Character string memory table Allocation destination Word NT620S 620C ou a b 10100 a b vwoio1 e 34 614 C d SKI ia moio EEEE e f Character string memory table 1 Allocated word number 3ch First word DM0100 Allocate character string memory tables to arbitrary words in the PC If word contents change when corresponding character string memory table is dis played on the screen the value on the screen will also change Messages can be displayed easily Reading and writing are executed so that the contents of allocated words are always the same as those of the character string memory tables Communication Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 e Alarm list bit memory table Allocation destination Bit NT620S 620C Material low Sa
53. 2 1 Description of Parts and Settings 00 cee eee 22 2 2 Installation se c ctsnri Aiea panic do niente Gtk eniad deci aa E iad debe dd 25 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool 0 2 eee 29 2 4 Installing the System Program 0 eee cece eee ee 30 2 5 Connection to a PC by the Host Link 0 0 0 0 eee ee eee 32 2 6 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 2 eee 43 2 7 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N 0 eee eens 48 2 8 Communication with the Host Using Memory Link 0 0 0 54 2 9 Co nnec ng a Printer 0 00 eis Sa es ANS a a She A E ee eee 55 SECTION 3 System Menu Operation ccc cece ccc cceees 57 3 1 Operation Flow by the System Menu 0 00 0 58 3 2 Starting the NT620S 620C sesers sanea niaaa a a a ee eee 58 3 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 00 cece ee eee 59 3 4 Initializing Memory i053 fos ee de ea ea ad ee ee oa ee oe 63 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches 69 3 6 Registering the Screen Data 0 ce cee ee eee 77 3 7 Starting the Operation eree tosto meiga ip eb beech ee Ge ae oe aed ee 80 3 8 Various System Settings osia ced ce ee see Sooo we Ae ee Bee Ee A 81 3 9 System Maintenance cee ee eee eee e teen eens 92 SECTION 4 NT620S 620C Functions eeeeeeeeeeee 113 4 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data 0 0
54. 217 Difference between image data and library data 125 Dimensions 287 Dimensions NT AL001 291 Dimensions for installation 289 332 DIP switch 24 41 DIP switch settings 24 DIP switch statuses 105 Direct connection data setting 117 Direct connection function 11 115 Direct information 270 Direct specification 198 200 204 Disable the input of numerical values and character strings 237 Disable the opening of windows 237 Disabling character string input 224 Disabling numeral input 221 Display 22 Display capacity 282 Display colors 126 Display element specifications 283 Display elements 120 Display frame Touch switch 153 Display history initialization 237 Display specifications 281 Displaying the alarm history 181 Displaying the numeral memory table 202 E Edit screen 115 EL display 100 End plate 167 Enlargement 125 Entering the character strings 169 Entering the numeral values 164 ERR ON 84 Error response sent from PT to host 264 Expansion I O connector 23 F FA site 2 Factory setting 24 Fan 126 File List screen 116 File units 115 Flashing display 125 127 Flow control 54 For your guidance 226 Forced initialization 63 Index G General specifications 281 GR terminal 23 28 Grounding 28 Guide display 149 H Handling the RS 232C RS 422 converter unit 291 Hardware faults 268 History attribute 132 Holes for mountin
55. 249 Communication board 12 40 Communication conditions for memory link 75 Communication errors 271 Communications specifications 285 Comparison between NT620S and NT620C 5 Compatibility 5 Compatible PCs 32 43 Confirming the communications between the NT620S 620C and the PC 80 331 Index Connecting a printer 55 Connecting the NT620S 620C 44 Connecting to the support tool 29 Connector 301 313 321 Connector cover 301 313 321 Connector cover assembly 311 Connector specifications 302 Content upgrade memory table 220 Continuous buzzer 236 Continuous screens 130 192 197 Continuous sound 83 Contrast control 23 Control bits 214 216 Control keys 155 Control timing 238 Controlling the display elements 187 Copy key function Touch switch 156 Copy memory table setting 208 Copy type 208 210 Copying the memory table 208 CPM1 CIFO1 41 CPU 40 318 319 Creating screen data 114 Crimp terminals 50 Currently displayed screen 196 197 Cursor moving key function Touch keys 157 Cursor moving keys 174 D Data bit length 54 Data read commands responses 245 Data write commands responses 245 Date and time display 229 Date and time setting 109 230 Decimal fraction 164 Deletion of the system program 30 Description of parts 22 Determines the character string memory table number 222 Determines the numeral memory table number 220 Determining touch switch status
56. 5 CS CS 5 6 5V 5V 6 9 SG SG 9 rie This connection is not possible Shielding with NT620S NT620C wire DIP Switch Settings e DIP switch settings at RS 232C RS 422 converter unit ON 123456 Set the NT620S NT620C memory switches in accordance with the communication method used 315 Appendix J Model List Model Specification NT620S ST211 E NT620S Beige Black Beige Black NT620S ST211B E NT620C ST141 E NT620C NT620C ST141B E Host Link Unit Model Specification Applicable PC C120 LK201 V1 CPU mounted type with RS 232C connector C series C120 C200H C500 F C1000H C2000 H C200H LK201 V1 Rack mounting Unit with RS 232C connector for C200H C series C200H C200HS C500H LK201 V1 Features a selectable RS 232C RS 422 connector C series C500 F C500 LK203 Rack mounting Unit for C500 C2000 H C1000H CV500 LK201 e Features an RS 232C connector and a selectable CVM1 CV series RS 232C RS 422 connector CVv500 e Rack mounting Unit for CVM1 CV CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 317 Model List Appendix J CPUs For Connection Via a Host Link Model Specification C20H C28H C40H C60H Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series C20H C28H C40H C60H CPM1 10CDR RS 232C adapter RS 422A adapter connected to the C series CPM1 20CDR peripheral port CQM1 CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU21 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 CPU41 E CQM
57. 8 colors NT620C only 141 Graphs Section 4 5 Separate background color can be specified for positive and negative value display area e Displaying method A graph displaying method can be selected out of two types normal type and pen recorder type Normal type As time goes by the latest data display position moves toward the direction of increase When the displacement increases to the right a graph varies as shown below When a polygonal line reaches the end of a screen it is cleared once and the NT610C starts drawing a polygonal line again from the first Direction of increase gt Latest data O Latest data O Latest data O Latest data Latest data At first the At the second time and NT620S 620C draws thereafter the NT620S a graph from 0 to the 620C draws a graph from latest data the last data to the latest data Pen recorder type The latest data is always displayed at the end of the screen As time goes by the graph already displayed moves in the direction of increase When a graph increases to the right it varies as shown in the figure below Direction of increase gt Latest data Latest data Latest data O Latest data O Latest data At first the NT610C Data is cleared draws a graph from from old one 0 to the latest data e Direction of movement The normal type can selec
58. Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area PC PT to the PC memory 2 Create a PC program to write control data to the PT status control bits of the PT status control area Control timing of PT status control bits The PT status control area PC PT is not read when the NT620S 620C starts up It is only read and control is only executed when the contents of the PT status control area are changed after the NT620S 620C has been started up Since control of the NT620S 620C statuses is executed after the bits corre sponding to the PT status control bits have changed to execute control again the corresponding bits must be specified again This example is of the NT620S 620C being used as a warning lamp by using PT status control bits e Support tool settings Make the following setting using the support tool Allocated word for the PT status control area CH0100 e PC program Create the following PC ladder program 09003 MOV 21 1 A000 Display the screen sound continuous buzzer 103 Word for PT status control MOV 21 2 09002 09003
59. C200HE C200HG C200HX 0000 to 0511 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0511 0000 to 6655 7000 to 9999 C500 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0031 0000 to 0031 0000 to 0127 0000 to 0511 C1000H C2000 H CQM1 0000 to 0255 0000 to 0099 0000 to 0027 0000 to 0063 0000 to 0051 0000 to 4095 0000 to 6655 CPM1 OMRON CV Series Memory Map IR Area Area 0000 to 0019 0200 to 0255 HR Area 1 0000 to 0019 AR Area 0000 to 0015 0000 to 0015 Link Relay Area Timer Counte r Area 0000 to 0127 0000 to 1023 6144 to 6655 DM Area CV500 CVM1 CPU01 EVO 0000 to 2555 0000 to 0511 0000 to 0511 0000 to 8191 CV1000 CVM1 CPU11 EV CV2000 CVM1 CPU21 EVO 1 2 0000 to 2555 0000 to 0511 Included in the IR area in the case of CVM1 CV series PCs This is the area that can be used with an NT620S 620C The DM area itself occupies the range 00000 to 24575 0000 to 1023 0000 to 9999 2 327 IX Special Characters Append English Character Codes Pin 2 of SW2 must be ON to enable English language messages to use the following codes Example Hex code is represented by 30 decimal code by 48 and character by 0 Q z Hex Digits ai D gt Ke ne o 2 wo ge p 40 O oO Q 7p wo 2 2 7p o Q
60. Communication Speed page 73 2 The 1 to N setting enables BCC Block Check Character The 1 to N con nection cannot be used to connect the NT620S 620C to one host link unit Correct use When using CVM1 CV series always set CPU execution processing execu tion control 2 in the PC system settings to simultaneous processing 35 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Connecting to a Host Link Unit Two types of host link units are available a rack mounting type and a CPU mounted type The switch settings differ according to the type of host link unit Set the switches according to the unit type e C200H rack mounting type C200H LK201 V1 Setting the front switches Set each switch with a flat blade screwdriver so that the values or symbols in the setting value window agree with the following e Unit SW1 SW2 Set these switches to 0 e Instruction level parity and transfer code SW4 Set this switch to 2 e Baud rate SW3 Set this switch to 5 to select 9600 bps Set this switch to 6 to select 19200 bps Setting the rear switches e 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP switch CTs Set 3 to ON selector switch External i OV ON CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON e C500F C1000HF C2000 H rack mounting type C500 LK201 V1 Setting the front switches e Mode control key switch Set this to
61. Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin manufactured by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Plug manufactured by OMRON XM2D 0901 9 pin Socket manufactured by OMRON DB 25P 25 pin manufactured by JAE Connector cover XM2S 2511 25 pin manufactured by OMRON XM2S 0911 9 pin manufactured by OMRON DB C2 J9 25 pin manufactured by JAE 321 Appendix K Option List Replaceable Backlight NT620C CFLO1 This is a backlight for replacement purposes Z Caution The disposal of the NT20S and used backlights may be regulated by national or local autho rities Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority Reflection Suppressing Protective Sheet NT600M KBA04 For NT620S NT620C KBA04 For NT620C Stuck to the display to prevent it from being soiled The entire sheet is colorless and transparent a4 323 Appendix K Option List Chemical resistant Cover Type NT600S KBA01 For NT620S Type NT620C KBA01 For NT620C Covers the front panel and protects it from chemical agents The entire sheet is milky white and made of silicone rubber The protection the cover affords is summarized below Protects Against o a Does Not Protect Against Boric acid Sulfuric acid Nitric acid Ammonia gas Carbon dioxide Phenol Glycerin Ammonia water Calcium chloride Developing fluid hypo Acetaldehyde Lard
62. Create the screens Transfer the screen data page 77 refer to Section 4 and the manuals for the support tools Start operation Reference Use support tool NT Series Support Tool Ver 2 type NT ZA3AT EV2 Use the NT620S NT620C system installer 18 Before Operating Section 1 6 Equipment or Software Refer to the following manuals for equipment and software Manual Title Manual Number System installer NT620S NT620C system installer instruction manual Instruction manual supplied with the product Support tools NT series support tool Ver 2 Operation Manual V028 E1 PCs SYSMAC CPM1 Operation Manual W262 E1 SYSMAC C20H C28H C40H C60H Operation Manual Programming RS 232C Interface W176 E1 SYSMAC C200H Operation Manual Programming W130 E1 SYSMAC C200HS Installation Guide W236 E1 SYSMAC C200HS Operation Manual W235 E1 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Installation Guide W302 E1 SYSMAC C200HX HG HE Operation Manual W303 E1 SYSMAC C1000H C2000H Operation Manual Programming W140 E1 SYSMAC CQM1 Programming Manual W228 E1 SYSMAC CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Operation Manual Ladder Diagrams If using a CVM1 series PC refer to the SYSMAC CV500 CV1000 CV2000 Operation Manual W202 E1
63. D A e When switches A B and C are switched on at the same time switch D is also E C assumed to have been switched on due to the configuration of the touch switches When switches A B and D are switched m B on at the same time switch C is also assumed to have been switched on due to D the configuration of the touch switches Smallest touch switch frame 4 7 1 Functions of Touch Switches Touch switches are created using rectangular elements A touch switch can comprise more than one touch switch element Up to 256 touch switches can be registered on one screen NT6208S 32 horizontally x 16 vertically NT620C 32 horizontally x 24 vertically Ww NT620S NT620C w 20 dots 20 dots 6 0 mm 6 0 mm STOP 4 25dots 20 dots 7 5 mm 6 0 mm per A touch switch can comprise more than one touch switch PC element When the touch switch is pressed its information is sent to the PC e Functions of touch switches Touch switches can have the following functions PC notification function page 217 Screen switchover function page 154 Input key function page 155 Copy key function page 156 Cursor moving key function page 157 Screen print key function page 157 152 Touch Switches Section 4 7 Touch Switch Att
64. Displayed page 123 e Alarm Specify the type of alarm bit memory table number and display method Section 4 11 Alarm List amp History Display Functions page 178 4 Exiting the Edit screen Return to the Scr list NEW_FILE Ser list NT610G 3 0 1024KB screen Selection No Status Comment Pabn Paue Help Message B F t Backup screen C t Pproduction Qty Dsip IProduction Rat Disp tab Specified Page C Production Oty Disp E tiNo 1 Press Monitor Seace Mark Unmark E tNo 2 Press Monitor Conveyor Line 1 HomelUnmark All l st nelMark Unmark AlI Es Select File Hist il Copy WeletesPrint Mattei Migs Read Bronmntgerrs HCo 0v IMR Mark Wd Next If you want to create or modify another screen select the screen number To the File Selection Enter filename to newly created screen data 118 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 Return to the File List File List NT6LOG 3 0 1024KB File Selection FileName Title 2 11 Pabn raup FILE Creation of New File Process control Line ry For Line Input Process control backup Production Qty Check For Line Input Process control backup Production Qty Check 1995 07 14 10 39 46 NTB1OG Ver 3 0 Direct 0 Num Mem Tabl s Str Mem Tabls 1 DAC func M 62 49KB il Copy BeletasPrint BloolS H ist a Tm i Rev Bln Sosi tle g Next Help Message Esc Exit to Main Menu
65. Example of normal type that increases rightward with a sign displayed gt For a trend graph a single graph frame can be shown in a screen and a maxi mum of 50 graphs can be registered in the graph frame e Reference table This is the same as for bar graphs See page 138 Although it is possible to select either direct or indirect as the reference method with the support tool only the direct setting is meaningful when using an NT620S NT620C It is not possible to use hexadecimal values for trend graphs If hexadecimal values are specified in numeral memory tables referenced to obtain graph val ues the graph will not be displayed The letter F may be used to indicate neg ative values but make sure that no hexadecimal values are written Trend Graph Attributes When using an NT620S NT620C the following attributes can be used when dis playing trend graphs e Graph frame This attribute specifies a rectangular area used to display a graph This area can occupy the following range NT620S Max 640 dots horizontally x 400 dots vertically NT620C Max 640 dots horizontally x 480 dots vertically The following setting can be performed for a graph frame Frame display With the Frame Display specified 1 dot width frame line is displayed out side of the frame area When using an NT620C color of a frame line can be selected out of eight colors Background color in a frame
66. Initial value 0000 000 0152 000 1524 130 1 1 0001 000 1524 000 0000 000 0015 000 1524 000 0000 900 0152 000 1524 100 0000 950 2 5 3 2 4 B 0152 000 1524 130 0000 950 Reference Using touch switches set as copy keys see page 156 allows you to input the value or code constant in a numeral memory table into a numeral setting input field in a one touch operation NT620S 620C Numeral setting input Numeral Memory position gt 9999 gt j 59999 Table or code con stant 1 12 3 a aP 0000 4 5 6 9999 7 8 9 0 a 4 I When a copy key is touched the corresponding value is input into the numeral setting input Copy keys field 165 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 8 5 How to Use a Thumb Wheel Type For numeral setting of thumb wheel type a numeric value is entered by directly touching the increment decrement keys Keys such as ten key are not re quired Entering the Numeric Values The numeric values are entered using the increment decrement keys pro vided at each digit e Specifying the numeric values When the increment decrement key is touched the numeric value at that digit will incr
67. Life expectancy 1 million operations minimum Specification Display elements 1 Character display Fixed character data character strings registered for each screen Character string displays 50 positions per screen 40 bytes per string Numeral displays 50 positions per screen 8 digit display Bar graph displays 50 positions per screen display capable of displaying signs Trend graph One frame per screen 50 pcs per frame Broken line graph One frame per screen 256 pcs per frame 512 points per pc 512 points per screen Graphic displays Can be displayed wherever required Lamps Max 1024 lamps per file 256 positions per screen Touch switches Max 1024 lamps per file 256 positions per screen Numeral settings Display of setting numeral values ten key type thumb wheel type 50 per screen Character string settings Display of setting character strings 50 per screen Alarm list 4 groups per screen The alarm history is displayed in the order of Alarm history occurrence and frequency group by group 282 Clock display Time display of built in clock by numeral display function Specifications Screen types Normal screen Appendix A Displays screens registered as normal Overlapping screen A maximum of 8 registered screens can be displayed overlapped with each other Continuous screen A max
68. Maintenance Section 3 9 Confirm the display history by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Select Display History Quit Display History 1 0 Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Dp Sad XS Select Occurrence or DISPLAY HISTORY MENU Frequency Quit The registered data will Occurrence be displayed in accor dance with the selected Frequency method Press the Quit touch switch on the touch panel The screen will return to the DISPLAY HISTORY MENU 94 System Maintenance Section 3 9 e Confirming recorded screen data during operation Screens No 1997 and No 1998 are for displaying recorded screen data Either screen will be displayed according to the data display order selected Screen No 1997 In order of occurrence Screen No 1998 In order of frequency Note Screens No 1997 and No 1998 are reserved for recorded screen data dis play They are unavailable for any other purpose When recorded screen data is displayed during operation the touch switches that can scroll up or down the screen do not appear Create J and touch switches as illustrated below in the right end 40 dot wide column for two to
69. Numerals and character strings can be changed also by changing the contents of the allocated words Refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character strings page 204 205 explained before To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT620S 620C copy the data between the numeral or character string memory tables by using the copy memory table setting of the PT status control area PT status control area Memory table 1 Screen switch setting A Copy source t __ Copy memory table __ Copy source number a Copy destination setting Copy destination number for display PT status control setting Write a memory table number etc to the copy memory table setting area in the PT status control area in the PC memory Data will be copied between the memory tables in the NT620S 620C and the displayed value will change accord ingly This procedure is convenient to switch predetermined values or character strings according to the situation By preparing several units of contents various contents can be displayed by switching them to suit the situation Copy memory table setting of the PT status control area 1514131211109 8 765 4 3 2 1 OBit Word E 0 ie table No 3 digit BCD nei Opy source memory able No A igi Copy memory 7 i 7 table setting n 2 Copy type Copy destination memory table No 3 digit BCD Copy type 0 Copy between
70. One connector and one connector cover is supplied with most PCs Name Model Delivered with Remarks Connector XM2A 0901 C series CQM1 9 pin manufactured by OMRON CVM1 CV series CPU unit CV500 LK201 XM2A 2501 C500 LK203 25 pin manufactured by OMRON C500 LK201 C200H LK201 DB 25P C500 LK201 V1 25 pin manufactured by JAE C120 LK201 V1 Connector XM2S 0911 C series CQM1 C200HS 9 pin manufactured by OMRON Cover C200HX HG HE CVM1 CV series CPU unit CV500 LK201 XM2S 2511 C500 LK203 25 pin manufactured by OMRON C500 LK201 C200H LK201 V1 DB C2 J9 C500 LK201 V1 25 pin manufactured by JAE C120 LK201 V1 When connecting the NT620S 620C to an OMRON PLC COCOH the connector and the connector must be pre pared separately since they are not supplied with the C H The connector provided in the CPU unit of the C H is a 9 pin connector For the connection the following con nector and connector cover should be prepared Connector XM2A 0901 9 pin type OMRON Connector cover XM2S 0911 9 pin type OMRON Prepare the cable recommended by OMRON The recommended cables are indicated in the following table Type Remark AWG28X5P IFVV SB CO MA VV SB 5PX28AWG Multiconductor shielded cable FUJIKURA Ltd Multiconductor shielded cable HITACHI Cable Ltd 301 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appen
71. Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area PC to PT to the PC memory 2 Create a PC program to write the number of the displayed screen to the screen switch setting word in the PT status control area Use a 4 digit BCD binary coded decimal value to set a screen number If a screen has been switched by operating the PT status control area PC to PT the contents of the currently displayed screen word in the PT status notify area PT to PC also change e Startup screen When the NT620S 620C starts up it displays the screen whose screen num ber is written in the screen switch setting The startup screen set with the sup port tool is invalid Screen switching timing The NT620S 620C screen switches when the contents of the screen switch setting have changed To re specify the number of the currently specified screen first write the value 0000 to clear the screen before writing the appropri ate screen number Use of the screen switching strobe Create a program to read the number of the currently displayed screen and to write the number to the screen switch setting word at the leading edge of the screen switching strobe of the PT status notify area This program enables screen switching by using the touch switches on the NT620S 620C and elimi nates repeated setting of the same screen number If the screen switching is not executed on the NT620S 620C the screen swi
72. Processing prior ity registration Registered Canceled See Note aoe guzaz Sounded Not sounded intermittent Duza Sounded Not sounded er short Display history Performed Not performed initialization Intermittent buzz er long Sounded Not sounded Screen printing Performed Not performed Window opening Disabled Enabled Kumera cnarac Disabled Enabled ter string input Note Priority registration is only effective when NT link 1 N is set The PC status control bits remain unchanged if the NT620S 620C status is changed with the screen attributes or memory switches which means that the statuses of the PT status control bits do not match the actual status of the NT620S 620C For example the buzzer may sound even though the setting for continuous buzzer bit 13 is OFF In this kind of case control the NT620S 620C by using the PT status control bits e Screen display bit 15 The screen display bit is used to display and clear the screen to prevent burn in on the CRT Set bit 15 to 0 OFF to clear the screen In the case of the NT620C the backlight also goes off at the same time When the screen has been cleared the last displayed screen can be redis played either by turning Bit 15 ON or by pressing a touch switch The backlight also comes back on Instead of turning Bit 15 ON a screen can be displayed by specifying its screen number For detai
73. Programmable Terminal The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the Programmable Ter minal You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a Programmable Terminal 1 Intended Audiences 33 3 antes asc iia ene ac ee el ie ies xii 2 General Precautions seruan ien gee ere eg OR ER a a A aaa bee be WER PETIA EA R A xii 3 Safety Precautions serii ee Geek e a r bee db det hg a a a es i xii xi Safety Precautions 1 2 3 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel who must also have knowl edge of electrical systems an electrical engineer or the equivalent e Personnel in charge of installing FA systems e Personnel in charge of designing FA systems e Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities General Precautions WARNING WARNING The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion systems medical equipment amusement ma chines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure tha
74. Responses Section 6 3 m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present b to b4 First cleared numeral memory table number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 e4 to e4 Final cleared numeral memory table number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits If m is 0 omit this setting Response Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC N 0 0 S4 so CR 1B 43 4E 30 30 30 43 oD S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as 0C e Initializes all the numeral memory tables within the range specified by the first cleared numeral memory table number and final cleared numeral memory table number to the value set with the support tool e f settings are omitted for both the first cleared numeral memory table number and the final cleared numeral memory table number all the numeral memory tables are cleared It is not possible to omit just one of these settings Character string memory table clear command Sent from host to PT Command ESC S m b4 bz b3 Ba 1B 43 53 k k k k k k k k e1 e2 e3 e4 S1 s2 CR IET a ae zE A Ta 0D m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present b to b4 First cleared character st
75. SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Unit Memory Memory Switch J MAINTENANCE MENU MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Comm Method Host Link Key Press Sound ON J Host Link Speed 9600bps Buzzer Sound ON Screen Saver None Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switch Each time the Resume Function touch switch is pressed the setting option ON alternates with OFF To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The setting made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU e OFF The resume function will be disabled and the memory table will be initialized when the power to the NT620S 620C is turned on or reset or when the mode is switched to the RUN mode e ON The resume function will be enabled and the memory table will not be ini tialized When the NT620S NT620C starts operation the contents of the memory tables are written to the allocated words in the PC Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 5 Screen Printing Function The NT620S 620C can print a hard copy of the displayed screens onto a printer connected to the NT620S 620C This function is called th
76. When the upper limit value is 1200 and the lower limit value is 201 if the initial value has three digits the value can be changed within the range 201 to 999 and if the initial value has four digits it can only be changed within the range 1000 to 1200 This is because if an attempt is made to change the leftmost digit from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0 an upper lower limit value check is always performed In order to avoid this either set the values so that n n m m or create anoth er touch switch and write values to it when digits are carried up or down 166 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4 8 6 Setting Items for Numeral Setting For the numeral setting the following items are set when being created with the support tool However for numeral setting of thumb wheel type there are some restrictions on the setting of several items Items to be Set e Numeral Memory Table to be referred The number of the numeral memory table is specified to register the numeric values entered for the numeral setting e Number of digits of numeric value entered The number of digits of numeric value entered is specified Up to 8 digit can be specified by figuring out a sum of the number of digits of both integer part and decimal fraction However when displaying a sign the number of negative numbers is limited to a maximum of 7 digit e Upper lower limit Upper limit and lower limit are set separately A maximum of 8 digit numeric value up to 7 digit
77. a GR terminal The GR terminal is the earth grounding terminal connect the special grounding wire 2 mm or larger to this terminal to prevent electric shock Carry out class 3 grounding grounding resistance must be less than 100 Q Grounding wire length should be less than 20 m Note that if grounding wire is used in common with other equipment or if it is con nected to abeam of a building for example the NT620S 620C might be adverse ly affected by this grounding NT620S Other 620C equipment Class 3 grounding grounding resistance is 100 Q or less Grounding for individual equipment Correct Grounding common to several pieces of equipment Incorrect Z Caution Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent incorrect operation due to noise Note Carry out class 3 grounding connecting the grounding wire to the GR terminal If grounding is not carried out there will be a danger of electric shock 28 Connecting to the Support Tool Section 2 3 2 3 Connecting to the Support Tool Connect the NT620S 620C to a computer with an RS 232C cable to transfer the screen data created by using a support tool to the NT620S 620C It is impossible to connect a computer and a PC at the same time to the NT620S 620C Connect a computer only to transfer the screen data L ON t F 5 C J Communication con
78. a graph the graph can be displayed in accordance with the numeric value in the numeral memory table During operation automatic updating is performed to ensure that the currently displayed NT620S 620C numeral memory table contents and PC word contents always match each other 199 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 200 There are two methods for referencing numeral memory tables used for numeral display as follows Direct specification Indirect specification Only direct specification can be used as the reference method for graphs and numeral settings e Direct specification Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of dis played memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated words NT620S 620C Allocated word Character string character string memory table 18 memory table 18 DM0100 0062 Kea face cre gt 0062 j _ y 00 6 2 Direct specification e Indirect specification Indirect specification is a method whereby the contents numeric value of the specified numeral memory table are taken as the number of a numeral memory table and the contents of the numeral memory table with that number are dis played A combined total 50 of numeral displays and character string displays can be specified on one screen by using indirect specification
79. absence of check sum write attribute 1 BCD digit 0 Absent SET attribute 253 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Present SET attribute Absent AND attribute Present AND attribute Absent OR attribute Present OR attribute Absent XOR attribute Present XOR attribute Absent SET attribute writing 1 word Present SET attribute writing 1 word OMAN OA RWND C4 tO C4 First word No written 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 l4 lo Number of words written 2 BCD digits 01 to 50 1 to 50 words If m is 8 or 9 omit this setting d14 to dim dny to dnn Data of written words 1 to 4 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFF It is possible to omit initial zeroes so that there are less than 4 digits Individual words of data are delimited by commas S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits If m is an even number omit this setting Response Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC w M 0 0 s4 so CR 1B 57 4D 30 30 31 46 oD S4 So Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as 1F e Writes the data of the specified number of words starting from the specified word in the PT memory The result after executing the specified operation write attribute on the present contents of the PT the PT memory and the written data is written A m
80. as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Each time the Buzzer MEMORY SWITCH MENU Sound touch switch is z z pressed the setting option Quit Comm Method Host Link ON alternates with ERR Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps ON OFF N Buzzer Sound ON a N Screen Saver None Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The setting made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU e OFF The buzzer will not sound at all during the operation e ON The buzzer will sound when a command from the PC is given the screen attribute has been set or an error has occurred e ERRON The buzzer will sound only when an error has occurred Reference The buzzer will sound when Buzzer check is selected in the Maintenance Mode regardless of the buzzer setting 84 Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 3 Screen Saver Function NT620S Backlight OFF Function NT620C The NT620S NT620C has a function that turns off the screen display if no opera tion
81. as user screens it will not be possible to use extension functions 4 2 2 Color Display NT620C Only Available Colors The NT620C can display the entire screen and screen elements such as charac ters and graphics in eight different colors Specify a color as an attribute for each display element when creating a screen on the support tool The NT620S is not capable of color display The following eight colors can be selected Red green blue yellow magenta cyan white black The four color combinations below are exclusive ORed The combination of two exclusive ORed colors means that if the color of a display element is the same as that of the background it will be displayed in a different color Yellow for example is exclusive ORed with blue Red lt gt Cyan Green Magenta Blue gt Yellow White Black The following display elements are displayed in the above combinations of col ors Input area display frame and background colors of numeral and character string setting screen Refer to pages 157 and 168 Lamp colors when they are on and lamp guide display character colors Refer to page 148 Touch switch colors when they are on and guide display character colors Refer to page 151 Display color of eight dots beyond the top of a bar graph and screen back ground color Refer to page 138 121 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Transparent Display Color Display of the Screen Colo
82. back ground color can be specified Background color Character color The outline of a graphic can be drawn in a specified color and the graphic can be filled in a pattern in specified colors As filling pattern colors the display color of the pattern itself the pattern back ground color and the filled area boundary line color can be set Outline color Filling Pattern display color Pattern background color a Line color Outline of Functions Section 4 2 When a lamp a touch switch and a graphic are to be displayed in specific colors part of the frames of the display elements may be invisible because of the com bination of the background outline and filling colors This is a phenomenon pe culiar to a color LCD not a failure with the system In such a case change the color combination 4 2 3 Characters and Figures which can be Displayed The NT620S 620C screen can display characters figures and other various ele ments This section describes the types and attributes of the characters and figures which can be displayed and do not need to be changed at all For the settings display and use of the characters numeric values and graphs which change according to the system operation status and other conditions re fer to Section 4 4 Memory Table page 133 and Section 5 2 Memory Tables and Graph page 198 The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attri
83. by displaying the screen by the display history recording function during op eration Recorded data can be displayed in order of occurrence or frequency e In order of occurrence Recorded data is displayed in order of occurrence 92 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Example For NT620S Screen Year Month Dau Hour Mi X Message 1 1 1 94 5 30 23 30 Coolant Error 2 94 05 31 02 17 Motor Error 8 94 05 31 11 05 Compressor Error End 2000 94 05 31 21 48 Emergency Stop e In order of frequency Recorded data is displayed in order of display frequency with the accumulated number of times each screen has been displayed Example For NT620S Screen Year Month Day Hour Mi X_ Message 1 1 8 otf 255 Compressor Error 2 E z 20 Motor Error 1 OE 3 Coolant Error End 2000 1 Emergency Error For both order of occurrence and order of frequency the number of entries that can be displayed on one screen is 23 in the case of the NT620S and 27 in the case of the NT620C To take a look at data that is not on the display press the or key on the touch panel When no screen data is recorded the message History Record Not Found appears and the screen returns to the History Record after about two se conds e Confirming recorded screen data by the maintenance mode 93 System
84. due to external noise Disconnect the communication cable from the source of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line The touch panel is broken Test the touch panel using I O CHECK in the maintenance mode Hardware Faults NT620S 620C Symptoms Cause Section 7 1 Remedy The PC mode changes to the monitor mode In host link communications the NT620S NT620C changes mode This is a specification of the NT620S NT620C If using a PC that can also be connected via the NT link connect it in an NT link connection with NT link the mode is not changed Graph displays are not updated One of the values specified for percentage displays 100 0 or 100 is incorrect Set the percentage values again so that they conform with the following relationship 100 value lt 0 value lt 100 value Numeral display or character string display is not displayed properly Nothing is displayed for character string display The display contents of the memory table are not the same as the initial values set with the support tool The memory table is allocated to the host s memory and so the display is updated with the contents of the host s memory Do not allocate the contents of memory tables to the host s memory when using as fixed values Memory table data was lost because the voltage of the battery dropped Replace the battery and execute memo
85. eee eee 114 4 2 Qutline of Functions ee eeestis a ee he SE Se Se Ee a ee ees 120 423 Screen Display kepasa e eS he A aes pea es Ae hy eas a 129 4 4 Memory Tables sepesi e hind tae baited tent Mo e hinted 133 4 3 Graphs sige esi 5 Bs AR eR AAR A O88 eh ESS Ra BSE A Ses E Mea sek hes 138 4 67 LAMP scot choke Gen SPs Ch oot AS oie Moment Catchy oS tae 148 4 7 Touch Switches essees kik ba SA a eee ee he AAG Re eee Bk 151 4 8 Numeral Setting lt 354 sce eed Siebel dt dene pee dd Shed Geib aed a er era 157 4 9 Character String Setting sais sss cg be ase ASS Ee RoE oes oh ee 168 4 10 Pop up Window Function 0 0 ee eee nee 171 4 11 Alarm List amp History Display Functions 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee eee 178 vii Viii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 5 Using Host Link NT Link 185 5 1 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation 0 0 02 eee eee eee 186 5 2 Memory Tables and Graphs cs rens ruri ue eioan a ccc eee eee 198 5 3 Lamps and Touch Switches 0 0 0 eee ccc eens 212 5 4 Numeral and Character string Setting 0 0 ee eee 220 529 Alarmi Lists asset beth thes peta tifa Boe eee ees So IA eo OR hee ahs 225 5 6 Clock Function ssie e ea HA et Bh ea hea oh eas 229 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control 2 0 0 eee eee 234 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC NT620S 620C Operating Status 0 ee ee eee eee 239 SECTION 6 Using Me
86. except the minus sign F to the reference numeral table The following attributes can be set with the NT620S 620C for the bar graph dis play Use the support tool to make settings for the bar graph display when creating the screen data Graphs Section 4 5 e Graph frame This attribute specifies a rectangular area used to display a graph e Orientation and incremental direction The orientation and incremental direction of the bar graph can be selected from those mentioned below T up The bar graph increments upward in the vertical orientation 4 down The bar graph increments downward in the vertical orientation lt left The bar graph increments to the left in the horizontal orientation gt right The bar graph increments to the right in the horizontal orientation Direction T Direction gt e With without a graph frame Select whether or not the graph frame boundary line of a graph display area which indicates the effective display range is displayed lt This frame is not displayed if Graph frame No has been set e Data value Data value corresponding to 0 100 100 can be specified Data val ue can be specified by two methods by directly specifying a numeric value and or by referring to the Numeral Memory Table Directly specifying method Numeric value from 0 to 99999999 max 8 digit is specified It is necessary to set that 0
87. for registering the numeral data One word can store up to 4 digits Two words can store up to 8 digits e Setting the words for the numeral memory tables The numeral memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words Set the word type and the first word C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special relay Internal Special relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK A 1wordonly x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 5 2 1 Allocation Words and Display of the Memory Tables This section explains the relationship between the contents of the allocated words of numeral character string memory tables and their display e Contents of numeral memory tables Stored as a single word 15 t012 11 to 87 to 43 to O Bit Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1 Example 1234 15 to12 11 to 8 7 to 43 to O Bit 1 2 3 4 Stored as a double words Word 15 to12 11 to8 7 to 4 3 to0O Bit Start Digit4 Digit3 Digit2 Digit 1 Start 1 Digit8 Digit7 Digit6 Digit5 201 Memory Tables and Graphs Sec
88. gt SCRN LIST GRAPH ON SET OEXID I 00 28 OTBL EDIT t IREDISP OALSRM OSTNDALONO EDIT OSET ENY Home My WIND GUIDE Able to input string and graphics No 0001 Fr 985242By te Create screen data in the Edit screen of the support tool Data of one screen can be created by registering laying out the following display elements and attrib utes on the screen e Fixed display Input characters and graphics ees Section 4 2 3 Characters and Figures which can be Displayed page 123 e Numeral display Specify the numeral memory table number and display method sons Numeral Memory Table page 135 e Character string display Specify the character string memory table number and display method Seth Character String Memory Table page 133 117 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 e Lamp Specify allocated bits Section 4 6 Lamps page 148 e Touch switch Specify allocated bits for control and notification ep Section 4 7 Touch Switches page 151 e Graph Specify the type of graph numeral memory table number and display method ie Section 4 5 Graphs page 138 e Input Setting Specify the numeral character string memory table number TR Section 4 8 Numeral Setting page 157 ats Section 4 9 Character String Setting page 168 e Image amp Library Specify the image library code number BE Section 4 2 3 Characters and Figures Which can be
89. have a buzzer attribute e Press the touch switch to which the buzzer stop attribute has been set If a buzzer stop attribute has been set to a touch switch created on the screen in which the buzzer attribute has been set such touch switch can be used to stop the buzzer sound To set a buzzer stop attribute for a touch switch set the control key function for the touch switch by using the input key function For the touch switch setting refer to Section 4 7 Touch Switches page 151 The following buzzer sounds can be set e Continuous sound The buzzer continues to sound e Short intermittent sound The buzzer sounds intermittently at 0 5 second intervals e Long intermittent sound The buzzer sounds intermittently at 1 second intervals If two or more buzzer sound specifications are made from the host at the same time the order of priority that determines which buzzer sound will be used is as follows 1 continuous sound 2 short intermittent sound 3 long intermit tent sound If the continuous sound and short intermittent sound are specified at the same time the continuous sound takes priority Use the memory switches to set whether or not the buzzer sounds when the buzzer sound has been instructed by the PC or with a screen attribute or when an error has occurred The factory setting is not fixed 83 Various System Settings Section 3 8 Set the buzzer sound by the menu operation from the System Menu
90. in numeral memory tables These values can also be represented as percentage values displayed together with the graphs System Configuration Section 1 3 1 3 System Configuration Reference This section gives the basic configuration of a system which uses an NT620S 620C Use an RS 232C cable to connect toa PC Refer to the manual for individual device for information on the equipment other than the NT620S 620C in the system For details on setting the method and conditions for communication between the NT620S NT620C and the host refer to Section 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches page 69 It is not possible to connect the personal computer used to run the support software and the host at the same time when using an RS 232C cable Representative optional devices available for use with NT620S NT620C are listed below Replacement backlight NT620C CFLO1 for NT620C Anti glare sheet NT600M KBA04 for NT620S NT620C KBA04 for NT620C Chemical resistant cover NT600S KBA01 for NT620S NT620C KBAO1 for NT620C Replacement battery C500 BAT08 System Configuration Section 1 3 Host Link NT Link 1 1 and Memory Link Systems OMRON s PC Controls NT620S 620C as required while controlling machines and monitoring the production line Host link C series CVM1 CV series PC Can be connected to CPU units and host link units However there are some CPU units t
91. is for the screen saver function in the case of the NT620S I O Check memory switches and for PT Settings the backlight OFF function Init Memory in the case of the NT620C memory switches Display History Memory Switch Each time the Screen MEMORY SWITCH MENU Saver touch switch is pressed the setting op Quit Comm Metod hosi Link tion will switch among 10 minutes 1 hour and None Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bpsj Buzzer Sound ON Screen Saver None Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The setting made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU e None The Screen Saver function is not used As long as no operation is performed the same screen remains to be displayed e 10 minutes The screen will be turned off when no operation has been performed for 10 minutes e 1 hour The screen will be turned off when no operation has been performed for 1 hour 86 Various System Settings Section 3 8 Caution Note Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while noth ing is displayed on the screen Otherwise the system may operate unpredict ably Only press touch switches after confirming system safety After images may remain if the same pat
92. is performed for a certain period of time to maximize the service life of the backlight and prevent the formation of an afterimage on the screen in the case of the NT620C the backlight is also switched off at the same time Continuous display of the same pattern for an extended time as a guide about 1 hour will lead to the formation of an afterimage In order to prevent this either use the screen saver function or periodically switch screens Redisplaying a Screen that has been Turned Off After the screen has been turned off by the screen OFF backlight OFF function it will be redisplayed if a touch switch is pressed or if an instruction to switch the screen or redisplay the same screen is received from the PC in the case of the NT620C the backlight will also be turned back on at the same time Changes in numerals or character strings displayed on the screen will not cause the screen to be redisplayed Setting the Screen OFF Backlight OFF Function Use the memory switches to set whether or not the screen OFF backlight OFF function is used and the length of time that the screen is turned off if it is used 85 Various System Settings Section 3 8 The factory setting is not fixed Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU The screen OFF backlight Quit OFF switch
93. is written to the currently displayed screen word For the continuous and overlapping screens refer to the Classification of screens page 129 Example of Reading the Number of Currently Display Screen This example gives a PC program that reads the screen number each time the screen is switched In this example the number of the previous screen is also stored e Support tool settings Make the following settings with the support tool PT status notify area CH 0110 e PC ladder program Screen switch strobe flag MOV 21 1 DM0100 DM0101 Word for storing the number of the previous screen MOV 21 2 110 Word for notifying the number of the currently DM0100 displayed screen Word for storing a new screen number e Program operation 1 When the NT620S 620C screen display switches and the screen switch strobe flag bit 11212 turns ON the contents of DM0100 are transferred to DM0101 The number of the previously displayed screen is stored in word 0101 2 The new screen number notified by the NT620S 620C is read and trans ferred to DM0100 The number of the currently displayed screen is stored in DMO0100 197 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 Memory Tables and Graphs Displaying and Referencing Character String Memory Table Contents Since character string memory tables can be allocated to words in the PC the PC can write data to the character str
94. lamp bits of touch switches in windows cannot be controlled While a window is open display processing may be slightly delayed 173 Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 4 10 2 Opening and Closing Windows Windows are opened and closed by using input keys either the window keys or cursor moving keys Opening and Closing Windows with the Window Keys Window keys can be used in the following way to open and close windows note that window keys can be created either on the base screen or in a window Open When the touch switch is pressed the specified window opens If another window is open when the touch switch is pressed it is closed first before the specified window is opened If the specified window is already open nothing happens Close When the touch switch is pressed the open window is closed Open Close The specified window opened if it is not open and closed if it is open If another window is open it is closed first and then the specified window is opened No change if CLOSE is pressed No change if Screen 1 is pressed Screen 1 pressed Base screen Base lt Screen 1 Window 1 open gt Screen 1 T Screen 1 Window 2 open close gt Screen 2 CLOSE pressed Screen 2 Window 1 close P CLOSE A 1 Screen 1 Screen 2 pressed y pressed N E A EN Oe Sie Base Screen 2 pressed 5 1 Screen 2 CLOSE pressed creen Scr
95. link method after adding an expansion commu nication board Check the model and series of the PC against the type of host link unit before making the connections The PCs that can be connected to NT620S NT620C with the RS 232C type host link are indicated below CPU Units Connect Units with Built in Host Link Function A able with Expansion Connectable Communication to Host Link Unit CPU Unit Board C series C20H C28H C40H C60H C C120 C200H C500 F C1000H C2000 H C120 LK201 V1 C200H LK201 V1 C200H C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200H LK201 V1 C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HS C200H LK201 V1 C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HE CPU32 C200HE CPU42 C200HE C200H LK201 V1 C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU63 C200HG C200H LK201 V1 C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPU54 C200HX CPU64 C200HX C series C500 LK201 V1 C500 LK203 C500 F C1000H F C2000 H CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 30CDR CPM1 CQM1 CPU21 E CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Units with Built in Host Link Function CPU Units Connectable PC Series with Expansion Host Link Unit CPU Unit Communication Board Connectable to
96. model press fl ENEE ee oo To create the NT620S 620C screen data make settings in the Tool Settings screen as follows NT620S NT Model 610G There is no 620S setting Memory Size 512 KB Direct Access Ver 4 114 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 NT620C NT Model 610C There is no 620C setting Memory Size 1024 KB Direct Access Ver 4 Note Since the NT620S and NT620C are from the standpoint of functions almost identical to the NT612G and NT610C they do not have their own NT Model setting Make the following settings for these two models NT620S 610G NT620C 6100 4 1 2 Creating Screen Data Screen Data Creation Method The screen data is created by using the support tool The support tool registers the screen data used with one NT620S 620C to one file Screen data can be created by one of the following three methods e creating a new file e editing an existing file e reading and editing selected screens from an existing file Screen Data Creation Procedure The following gives the basic screen data creation procedure Required settings and reference pages are given for each step of the procedure NT series Steport Tool Version 2 0 Edit Screen Tool Settings Exit C OMRON Corporation 1995 All Rights Reserved Select Tool Settings in the Main Menu to display the Tool Settings screen Settin
97. notify area PT PC to the PC memory Using the support tool create a character string setting screen and allocate the character string memory table to the PC memory Create a PC program for reading the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area when the character string setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area comes ON 1 Read the allocated word for the character string memory table number read in step 3 Disabling character string input Character string input can be disabled by a PT status control area opera tion For details see 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 Application Example This example shows the reading of the character string memory table number af ter a value has been changed by inputting character string data at the NT620S 620C Support tool settings Make the following settings using the support tool Allocated word for the PT status notify area CH0110 Character string memory table entry No 2 DM0120 registration word 10 Character string memory table entry No 3 DM0130 registration word 10 Data registered for the screens Character string setting 1 Reference table character string memory table No 2 Character string setting 2 Reference table character string memory table No 3 Character string memory table No 2 Character string memory table No 3 Touch switches PC program Create the following PC ladder prog
98. number of integer digits number of decimal fraction digits digit for decimal point digit for sign If it is not possible to use a temporary input field the data has to be input directly onto the base screen Numeral setting input Temporary input field displays data being input y 123456 0555 44 4 1 8 Current setting Window 175 Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 How to Input Data Into Temporary Input Fields Temporary input fields are used in the following way 1 Specify the numeral character string input field used for actual input with a numeric key system key or touch switch cursor moving key The actual method used for specification is the same as that for numeral set ting See Specifying the Numeral Setting Input Column to be Entered page 162 It is possible to display a window simultaneously with a cursor movement For details see Opening Windows with the Cursor Moving Keys page 174 2 If the window in which the temporary input field is registered is not displayed open it this could also be done prior to step 1 For the method for opening the window see Opening and Closing Windows page 174 The temporary input field displays the contents of the actual input field at that point in time The display of the temporary input field is governed by the fol lowing attributes Attributes determined
99. of printing the bit is set back to 0 OFF Note that if the NT620S 620C system menu or an error screen is displayed the bit will be set to O OFF even if the printer is printing For details see NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 5 8 2 Reading the NT620S 620C Operating Statuses This section explains how to determine the status of the NT620S 620C and as certain its operating status e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status notify area PT PC can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appen dix L PC Memory Map page 327 Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT PC to the PC memory 2 Write aPC program to read the PT status word of the PT status notify area and check each bit status e Report timing of PT status notify bit The information in the PC status notify area PT PC is written to the PC when the NT620S 620C s
100. on which of these number groups they fall into is explained below e Memory Table from 0 to 255 During PT operation the character string data in the Character String Memory Table written from the PC is displayed in the screen An initial value can also be set when screen data is created Character string displaying area that is assigned to the Character String Memory Table No 2 OMRON Character String Memory Table Capable of being overwritten by the Host FA NO 1 hoe a OMRON NO 2 Host PT NO 3 NT620C NO 4 eS PS 133 Memory Tables e Memory Table from 256 to 999 read only Data cannot be written by the PC Character string data is set when screen data is created This Memory Table can be set not to be used by the System Memory setting of the support tool Character string displaying area that is assigned to the Character String Memory Table No 257 Character String Memory Table FA OMRON ae OMRON PT NT620C be TE a Characters and Figures which can be Displayed The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attrib utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters of the character string memory table The character attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen This is set when a screen is created by the
101. panel observe the following points Do not install the unit in locations directly exposed to chemicals or steam or locations where there is excessive dust Do not install the unit at location where the ambient temperature goes out side the range 0 to 45 C in the case of the NT620S and 0 to 40 C in the case of the NT620C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to 85 RH If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above install a fan or an air conditioner Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat heaters transformers large capacity resistors etc Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise 1 Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high voltage equipment is also installed 2 Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines 3 If the unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric or magnetic field solenoids etc provide a gap of at least 40 mm Provide sufficient space for ventilation Do not install the unit in locations where it will be subject to strong vibration or severe shock To ensure that the unit can be operated and maintained without difficulty install it at a distance from high voltage equipment and power equipment After changing the switch settings always press the reset switch or turn the power off and back on Otherwise the system will not operate as exp
102. played when creating the screen data by using the support tool To display a character string use character display and specify the charac ter string memory table by using the support tool To display numerals use numeral display and specify the numeral memory table by using the support tool Set the copy source data to the memory table when creating the screen data by using the support tool Use table edit Create a PC program to write the copy type copy destination memory table number and copy source memory table number to the copy memory table setting word in the PT status control area Order for writing to the PT status control area PC to PT First write the copy destination memory table number and then write the copy source memory table number to the PT status control area PC to PT The NT620S 620C reads the area sometimes when the PC is writing the set tings If the copy source memory table number has been written first and is changed unexpected memory table may possibly be changed Allocated words that the NT620S 620C reads The NT620S 620C reads the allocated words in the PC for the memory tables which need to be displayed Even if the copy source memory table is allocated 209 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 to a PC word if it has not been displayed even once it may be used at initializa tion only Use of the copy type Copy will not be executed
103. switches Display instructions confirmation of display status etc System control Buzzer ON OFF ON OFF of backlight or EL display and other NT620S 620C status Notifying from the NT620S 620C to a PC Data in the NT620S 620C is sent to a PC when a touch switch is pressed The following types of data are sent to a PC NT620S 620C status Touch switch status Numeric values and character strings input with numeral character string settings by using touch switches Changes in a memory table after copying between memory tables Functions of Display Elements e Lamps Allocation destination Bit NT620S 620C Lamp 1 Bit 000100 Ee 1 Switch 1 ON Bit 000100 Switch 2 OFF Bit 000101 Lamp 2 Bit 000101 PC s bit status is displayed by the Lamp on the NT620S 620C The lamp comes on flashes when the PC s bit status is ON 1 and goes off when it is OFF 0 For image and library data the displayed image or library item can be switched in accordance with the ON 1 or OFF 0 status of a PC bit lamp bit e Touch switches 13 Communication Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 14 Allocation destination Bit Touch switch 1 2 Bit 009012 NT620S 620C oo9012 0 Bit 009012 ON The lamp comes on flashes when the PC s control bit is ON 1 and goes off when it is OFF 0 While the touch switch is pressed the PC s notification bit turns ON
104. switches do not agree with the factory settings for the PC system settings RS 422A e The factory settings for the DIP switches are 2400 bps 1 stop bit even parity 7 bit data length e The factory settings for the PC system settings are 9600 bps 2 stop bits even parity 7 bit data length For CPU units manufactured from July 1995 lot No 75 onward the factory settings for the DIP switches are also 9600 bps and 2 stop bits 40 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Making the PC system settings The possible settings and existing settings which can be set by the PC system setting are as given below Item Possible Setting Existing Setting Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps 9600 19200 bps Stop bit 1 or 2 stop bits 2 stop bits Parity Even odd non parity Even parity Data length ASCII 7 bits ASCII 7 bits Unit 00 to 31 Unit 00 e C series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 When connecting an NT620S NT620C and a C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 or CQM1 CPU unit set the communication conditions in the PC system setting area Write the settings directly from the peripheral tool e g SYSMAC support tool to the PC system setting area data memory The switch settings made to enable PC system setting are described here For details on PC system setting area operations refer to the manual for the PC you are using page 19 Switch settings C200HX HG HE CQM1
105. table or 20 words in the case of character string memory table 186 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 5 1 3 NT620S 620C Status Control and Notification to PC This section describes the fundamentals of the display elements NT620S 620C status control and notification which are the basics of the NT620S 620C func tions For the detail method of use of the PT status control area and the PT status notify area refer to Sections 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 and 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC page 239 Controlling the Display Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words The NT620S 620C will operate as follows in the display element control opera tion NT620S 620C operation 1 The NT620S 620C checks the allocation bits and words of the display ele ments and makes an inquiry to the PC 2 The PC answers the NT620S 620C about the bit and word data 3 The NT620S 620C changes the display status according to the bits and words obtained from the PC NT620S 620C operation example Lamp 0 Bit 010012 NT620S 620C Bit 010012 o10012 1 TIM003 1 woos 2 37 DM0100 to DM0102 OS DM0100 a b DMO101 Ce d DMO102 te P Character string memory table 2 Numeral memory table 0 First word DM0100 First word TIM003 Number of saved words 3 Number of saved words 1 Controlling the NT620S 620C Status by Using Allocated Bits
106. the display is changed This processing is continued until the statuses of all the remaining elements has been read If the number of elements that could not be registered is large the PT status control area is read after every two element readings base a oe 297 NT620S NT620C Internal Processing Appendix F Number of words for screen element registration The number of words used for screen element registration is as follows Allocated words Number of words Allocated bits Number of words calculated by summing the number of bits in each area and taking 1 word to be 16 bits Example Character string memory tables 3 of 12 allocated words each Numeral memory tables 4 of 2 allocated words each Allocated bits for control 19 I O relays 7 link relays contiguous bits The number of words assigned to character string memory tables and numeral memory tables is as follows 12 words x 3 2 words x 4 44 words The assignment for bits is as follows 19 I O relays 16 1 word with a remainder of 3 bits 2 words 7 link relays 16 0 words with a remainder of 7 bits gt 1 word The total is therefore 44 words 2 words 1 word 47 words Elements occupying up to approximately 120 words calculated in this way can be registered If the number of elements is larger than this internal processing is increased in proportion to the excess number and this gener ates a delay in processing If the point where the quantity that can be
107. the system and cannot be used for other application When the Data Memory DM is specified a bit number 00 to 15 is also speci fied in conjunction with a channel number The contents of the numeral memory tables of the NT620S 620C can be dis played as graphs as well as numeral data Three types of graph can be displayed bar graphs trend graphs and broken line graphs The display data of graphs is changed by changing the contents of numeral memory tables For the actual method used to update the data of a currently displayed graph see Upgrading Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words page 211 Graph settings are made when creating screen data using the support tool 4 5 1 Bar Graph Functions Bar Graph Attributes 138 The bar graph function displays a value in a bar graph form as a percentage to the specified value according to the contents of a numeral memory table Up to 50 bar graphs can be registered in one screen e Reference table The numeral memory table used as the reference for the bar graph display can be set The support tool has the direct and indirect options for the reference method of the numeral memory table However the NT620S 620C recognizes the di rect method only The bar graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers If hexadecimal num bers are set in the reference numeral table the bar graph cannot be displayed Use caution not to write hexadecimal numbers
108. touch switch operation The screen data designated by instructions from PC or touch switch operation is displayed Receives Data from a PC NT620S 620C can be connected to a PC by a host link NT link or memory link and receive necessary data from the PC Host link NT link or memory link Sends Data to a PC Data input through a touch panel can be sent to a PC ON OFF information numeric data etc Screen Data The screen data to be displayed on the NT620S 620C can be created by a com puter by using support tools Connect the NT620S 620C to a PC AT with an RS 232C cable so that the screen data are transferred to the NT620S 620C Create screen data PC AT support tools RS 232C e This connection is made only to transmit the screen data by using NT620S 620C and tools Functions of NT620S 620C Section 1 2 1 2 Functions of NT620S 620C The features and main functions of the NT620S NT620C are described below 1 2 1 Features e Construction best suited to the FA environment The NT620S features an amber EL display panel and the NT620C has an STN color LCD panel Its backlight unit and battery can be replaced at the FA site Waterproofed to a standard equivalent to IP65 NEMA4 lt 640 dots gt 400 dots NT620S 480 dots NT620C e Easy to use system configuration A variety of communication methods including the 1 N connection NT link e
109. when the copy type is other than 0 or 1 The memory table copy is executed only when the contents of the area are changed To repeat copying of the same copy source and same copy destina tion write a value other than 0 or 1 for the copy type and then write a cor rect value again Copying a numeral memory table If the display method or the number of registered words include discrepancies a numeral memory table may not be copied and displayed correctly Application Example of Copying of a Character String Memory Table This example gives a PC program to switch the character string display on the screen by using the memory table copy operation as the allocated bit is turned ON and OFF e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool PT status control area allocation CH 0100 Contents registered to the screen Character string memory table No 4 Line 1 Character string memory table No 4 Character string memory table settings Number of Character Digits Normal 6 digits Error 6 digits Normal 6 digits Contents 210 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 09000 e PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows Error flag 09000 Hf Error flag MOV 21 1 0004 Copy type copy destination memory table No 102 Copy destination word MOV 21 0010 Copy source m
110. when using the NT link with the DM area the notification operation is different for the momentary type and the other types and they should not both be specified in the same word In the case of 3 and 4 notification has no effect on the other bits in the word Application This example uses the touch switches as normal switches bits in order to use the NT620S 620C as an operating panel e Support tool settings Make the following settings using the support tool Touch switch No 10 Function Notify Bit Display attribute Light Lamp bit CH05000 Run flag Guide message RUN Notify bit CH 06000 Touch switch No 11 218 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 Function Notify Bit Display attribute Light Lamp bit CH 05001 Stop flag Guide message STOP Notify bit CH 06001 Data registered for the screen touch switch No 10 touch switch No 11 Touch switch No 10 Line 1 RUN STOP Touch switch No 11 e PC program Create the following ladder program 1 scan ON Touch switch No 10 notify bit 11212 06000 eat 05001 op ag touch switch No 11 lamp bit 06001 rr 4 lt Touch switch No 11 notify bit 05001 ih switch No 10 notify bit 06000 06001 Run flag z z 05000 touch switch No 10 lamp bit T Touch switch No 11 notify bit e Program operation The operation when the program is executed is presented be
111. 0 the latest data 50 0 the latest data 300 100 3 When an absolute value of is equal to or greater than 1000 A value is displayed in a graph in the same way as 2 at the display posi tion depending on the presence of a sign as follows Sign display No xxx Sign display Yes xxx e When the graph width is not an integral multiple of the drawing width In the normal type when a graph is over the graph frame next time the NT610C draws a graph of the latest data at the end of the frame lt Example In case the graph width 100 dot and the drawing width 30 dot gt 100 dot Drawn at the end y B TR B 10 60 90 30 60 90 30 60 90 Reference If a graph is duplicated by drawing multiple graph lines of the same value it is overwritten and displayed in the order of setting Similarly when 0 value continues in a graph with a sign displayed a graph line is overwritten and displayed with respect to the graph frame indicating 0 144 Graphs Section 4 5 4 5 3 Broken Line Graph Setting A broken line graph displays multiple present value of Numeral Memory Table by a single polygonal line This allows variation of continuous values of the Numeral Memory Table to be seen at a time 100 0 Example displaying 11 Numeral Memory Table values with signs 100 For a broken line graph a single graph frame can be shown in a screen
112. 0 registration word 2 Numeral memory table entry No 2 DM0002 registration word 1 204 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 Screen numbers to be created No 1 and No 2 H Numeral Line 1 memory table entry No 1 8 digit input Qty Defects Numeral memory table entry No 2 4 digit input e PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows 25502 1 second clock DIFU 13 00100 00100 INC 38 1 DM0000 Word for least significant 4 digits of No 1 25506 INC 38 2 DM0001 Word for most significant 4 digits of No 1 00001 INC 38 3 DM0002 Word for No 2 e Program operation 1 The contents of word DMO0000 are incremented by 1 each second The val ue displayed on the NT620S 620C in numeral table entry No 1 increases by 1 each second 2 When the counter in 1 above causes an increase in the most significant digits the contents of word DMO0001 are incremented by 1 each second The value displayed on the NT620S 620C in numeral memory table entry No 1 most significant digits increases by 1 3 When bit 00001 turns ON the contents of DM0002 are incremented by 1 The value displayed on the NT620S 620C in numeral memory table entry No 2 increases by 1 5 2 3 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specification The following describes the p
113. 0C 110 Check the NT620C backlight by following the menu operation from the System Menu described below Note that the NT620S which has an EL display has no backlight check function Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select Backlight e f the backlight is functioning normally it flashes on and off e On completion of the check press the Quit touch switch The display returns to the I O CHECK MENU System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 3 Checking the PT Setting Status Display the NT620S 620C settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Select PT Settings Quit Display History I O Check J PT Settings J Unit Memory k Memory Switch PT SETTINGS End PT Control Area DM 0000 PT Notify Area DM 0010 Comm Method Host Link Host Link Speed 9600bps Automatic Reset Performed Resume Function Effective e The current NT620S 620C setting status will be displayed e Pressing the End touch switch will exit the PT SETTINGS display and cause the NT620S 620C to return to the MAINTENANCE MENU 111 SECTION 4 NT620S 620C Functions This section describes the functions of the NT620S 620C 4 1 Creating and Trans
114. 0C 6 digits Character string memory table number 102 NT620S 6 digits Character string memory table number 103 NT620C 6 digits Contents to be registered for the screen Numeral memory table number 51 Line 1 Display of character string specification of numeral memory table number 51 in indirect specification PC program Create the following PC ladder program 00100 INC 38 1 DMo0000 Numeral memory table number used for indirect specification 00101 DEC 39 2 DM0000 Numeral memory table number used for indirect specification 207 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 e Program operation 1 Each time contact 00100 comes ON the display on the NT620S 620C changes to the next item in the following sequence NT612G NT610C NT620S NT620C 2 Each time contact 00101 comes ON the display on the PT changes to the next item in the following sequence NT620C NT620S NT610C NT612G In this example the contents of numeral memory table 51 which is referenced using indirect specification are not checked When actually using the pro gram make sure that the contents of numeral table No 51 are not outside the range 0100 to 0103 5 2 4 Copying the Memory Table 208 NT620S 620C Ap The following describes the procedure to change displayed numerals or charac ter strings by copying the contents of the memory table
115. 0C is low Change the battery See Replacing the Battery page 275 When installing the system program if a system program which does not display English is erased English will not be displayed DIP switch SW2 2 on the NT620S 620C is OFF Switch off the power to the NT620S 620C set DIP switch SW2 2 to ON and switch the power back on Erase System Program Are you Sure DIP switch 8 of the NT620S NT620C is set to ON After selecting No switch the power to the NT620S NT620C off set DIP switch 8 to OFF then switch the power back on Do not select Yes except when installing the system program System Program Corrupted The system program cannot be started up because there is an error in it Install the system program by using the NT series system installer NT ZS3AT System Program is Not Downloaded 270 The system program cannot be started up because it has been deleted Install the system program by using the NT series system installer NT ZS3AT Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 2 Errors Occurring During Operation The table below shows the errors that can occur during operation of the NT620S 620C and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Setting Error Allocated bits words set with the After checking the PC area being used set The word type and word address support tool not found at PC correct bits words are disp
116. 0S 620C during operation by set ting an area and displaying method when creating a screen data with the support tool There are two displaying methods in the order of occurrence and frequency e In the order of occurrence The alarm history is displayed in the order that a contact becomes 1 ON As more detailed information date and time of occurrence can be displayed si multaneously Abnormal remote I O 94 06 06 16 02 W Occurrence of 4 transmission abnormality Abnormal high function unit 94 06 07 09 21 Cycle time over 94 06 17 15 44 Check the remote I O transmission line 182 Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 e In order of frequency The alarm history is displayed in the order of frequency that a contact becomes 1 ON Number of occurrence is displayed simultaneously Cycle time over 114 A Cycle time Abnormal high function unit 53 4 exceeds 100 msec Abnormal remote I O 39 The following countermeasure should be taken Program is checked again A 4 Setting of cycle time over not detected v DM6655 X1XX For both order of occurrence and order of frequency the maximum number of entries that can be displayed is 16 in the case of the NT620S and 24 in the case of the NT620C When the alarm history is set the scrolling keys are created auto matically Creating and using the scrolling keys are the same as the alarm list di
117. 1 CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E C200HS CPU21 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C200HS C200HS CPU23 E selectable 9 pin C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E C200HE CPU32 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HE CPU42 E selectable 9 pin C200HE C200HG CPU33 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HG CPU43 E selectable 9 pin C200HG C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections C series C200HX CPU44 E selectable 9 pin type C200HX C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E CV500 CPU01 EV1 Features a connector for RS 232C connections CVM1 CV series CV1000 CPU01 EV1 selectable 9 pin CV500 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 aes CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV Note A communication board is required with the CPU units marked with an asterisk 318 Model List Appendix J CPUs For Connection Via an NT Link Name Model PC Type CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 30CDR RS 232C adapter RS 422A adapter connected to the peripheral port C series CQM1 CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C series CQM1 C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections C200HS C200
118. 187 NT620S 620C status notification 239 Number of character string memory tables 133 Number of colors 125 Number of numeral memory tables 135 Number of registration words 199 201 Number of words for screen element registration 298 Numeral 135 Numeral memory table 135 Numeral memory table clear command sent from host to PT 257 Numeral memory table read command sent from host to PT 251 255 Numeral memory tables 247 through 253 229 Numeral memory tables 254 and 255 230 334 Numeral memory table write command sent from host to PT Index Numeral setting 157 167 Numeral setting attribute 132 Numeral setting strobe flag 190 240 Numeral character string input 237 Numerical input notify command sent from PT to host 260 O Occurrence Alarm history 178 Occurrence Display history recording function 92 OMRON s PC 9 1 1 NT link 12 Open 174 Opening and closing 174 Opening and closing windows 174 Operating panel 2 Operating status 2 239 Operation flow by the system menu 58 Operation modes 59 Operations with the system menu 61 Option list 323 Order for writing Memory table copy 209 Order of priority for registration 298 Order of priority of input communication commands 249 ORed 121 Outline colors 126 Overlapping screen 129 192 197 P Page number display 130 Panel fittings 25 Panel specifications 282 Parent screen 129 130 Parity 5
119. 2 Lamp control bit 212 213 LCD display 100 Library data 134 Life of the backlight 273 Line types 126 Long intermittent sound 58 62 63 70 76 79 80 82 83 84 86 88 89 92 93 95 98 100 101 102 103 105 106 107 109 110 111 117 Long distance transmission 35 LSS 39 40 Maintenance 273 Maintenance mode 59 62 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C 273 Making the cable for connection 301 Making the cable for connection to the support tool 313 Mark data 270 284 Marks 134 Maximum amount of various data 284 Maximum number of NT620S NT620Cs connectable to one port 49 Memory link 9 54 244 Memory size 114 Memory switch menu 69 Memory switches 69 333 Memory table from 0 to 255 133 Memory table from 256 to 999 133 Menu tree 60 Message Alarm list 178 Message Bit memory table 136 Method for specifying commands 247 Model list 317 Momentary Touch switches 215 Monitoring 2 N 9 pin 29 Normal display 125 127 Normal lamp 148 Normal screen 129 Normal type Trend graph 141 Notification of numbers to the PC 220 Notification of the operating status to the PC 239 Notify bits 190 214 Notify command 246 Notifying the display elements 189 Notifying the display screen to the PC 195 Notifying the PC 217 NT link 9 10 43 71 NT link 1 1 9 43 NT link 1 N 10 48 NT model 114 NT ALO001 9 308 NT620S 620C status control
120. 20C the character string setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area is used In order to determine the upgraded character string memory table number the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area is used When character string data is input at the NT620S 620C this is automatically notified to the PT status notify area PT PC allocated in the PC memory as follows Notification of upgrade PT status character string setting strobe flag turned ON 1 Upgraded character string table number Stored in the content upgrade memory table When the PC reads the content upgrade memory table at the leading edge of the character string setting strobe flag it determines the character string Numeral and Character string Setting Section 5 4 memory table number in which the character string data that was changed at the NT620S 620C is stored NT620S 620C Character string memory table 3 NT620S ST211B NT620S ST211B PT status notify area Currently displayed screen eee lt Table No memory table lt Character string setting strobe flag Allocated word character string table 3 NT620S ST211B 4 E 5 4 Start 3 6 3 2 Start 1 Content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area and PT status 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 765 4 3 2 1 0 Bit Word net 0 Character string memory table No 3 digit BCD Content upgrade memory table o o PT status
121. 216 th e statuses of the touch switches displayed by the NT620S 620C The statuses of touch switches displayed by the NT620S 620C are changed by switching the lamp bits allocated in the PC memory ON and OFF NT620S 620C Allocated bit touch switch No 1 1 lt 1 ON A Touch switch 1 The status of the lamp bit reflects the touch switch status as follows Procedure 1 2 0 OFF Unlit 1 ON Lit inverse display or flashing Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch lamp bits to the PC memory When creating the screen data using the support tool register the touch switch for a screen Create the PC program to switch the lamp bit of the touch switch ON and OFF Set whether a touch switch will be continuously lit or blink when its bit has been turned ON by setting the support tool touch switch display attributes Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 5 3 5 Notifying the PC that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status This section describes how the status of a touch switch whether it has been pressed or not is ascertained With the NT620S 620C when a touch switch is pressed the notify bit allocated to that touch switch in the PC memory is automatically notified Touch switch 1 ENNI SNo Allocated notify bit touch switch No 1 The status of the notify bit reflects the touch switch status as follows Momentary 0
122. 3 Z E C200HG CPU43 series C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU44 C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU54 C200HX CPU64 Z Z Z C200HG C200HX Z Z Z Z 2 7 2 Connecting the NT620S NT620C Units Referring to the illustrations below and using a cable appropriate for the CPU unit s connector connect the NT620S NT620C units and the PC using RS 232C RS 422 converter units type NT ALO11 A host link connection cable can be used as the RS 232C cable For details on making a connection cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 of the appendix Z Caution After connecting the communication cable be sure to lock the connectors with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail Reference Read the instruction manual provided with the NT ALO01 carefully 48 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 Connection Diagram As shown in the figure below connect multiple NT620S NT620C units to one PC via RS 232C RS 422 converter units In an NT link 1 N up to eight NT620S NT620C units can be connected to one PC port C200HX HG HE OMRON PC While controlling machinery and monitoring lines controls t
123. 4 PC 32 PC memory map 327 PC switch settings 35 45 54 PC system setting 40 41 42 PC system setting area 41 42 54 Pen recorder type Trend graph 142 Performance specifications 281 Peripheral tool 39 40 45 54 Polygon 126 Pop up window function 171 Power input terminals 23 27 Index Power LED 22 Power supply connection 27 Power supply specifications 27 precautions xi Precautions to be observed during the screen data transmission 79 Printer cable 289 Printer connector 23 Printer operating status 190 Priority registration for processing 188 Procedure before operating 18 Processing differences according to command length 248 Programmable terminal 2 PT 317 PT memory 244 PT memory batch write FILL command sent from host to PT 257 PT memory read command sent from host to PT 249 PT memory write command sent from host to PT 253 PT operating status 240 PT status 235 PT status control area 15 187 PT status control bits 235 PT status notify area 16 189 PT status notify command sent from PT to host 262 R Re send command 246 Re send request command 264 Receive error 271 Recommended cables 33 301 Recommended printer 56 Reflection suppressing protective sheet 323 Registering the screen data 77 Replaceable backlight 323 Replacing the backlight 273 Replacing the battery 275 Report timing 241 Reset Touch switches 215 Reset swit
124. 5 cable to these terminals Always use an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit NT AL001 to make a con nection between an NT620S NT620C and an RS 485 cable 52 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 The actual wiring and settings depend on the system configuration as shown below When the PC connection is RS 232C PC RS 232C Same settings for same equipment RS 232C cable RS 485 Terminal NT RS 485 cable RS 485 cable cable resistor gat AL001 PSS eee lt Ses oe No terminal NT Terminal NT resistor ALO01 resistor set ALOO1 RS 232C RS 232C cable cable ov bP NT620S NT620S Rape Ree NT620C NT620C When the PC connection is RS 485 Terminal resistance set PC RS 485 Same settings for same equipment RS 485 RS 485 cable RS 485 cable cable ooo eee D No terminal NT Terminal NT resistor AL001 resistance set AL001 RS 232C RS 232C Communication port cable cable ov BEREE NT620S NT620S PERAE NT620C NT620C RS 232C Cable Wiring Same as described in RS 422A Cables on page 51 RS 485 Cable Wiring PC or NT ALOO1 PC or NT AL001 Abbrev Abbrev Functional oe ee ee ee Functional ground A ground Rs 422A SPA SDA RS 422A SDB H L SDB RDA RDA RDB RDB
125. 620C start up the system installer and transfer the system program to the NT620S NT620C to install it Installing the System Program Section 2 4 For details on the operation involved refer to the manual provided with the system installer e Tool settings of the system installer In the tool settings of the system installer specify the type of PT in which the system program is being installed Set NT620S or NT620C for NT type Set the other settings in accordance with the environment in which the system installer is to be used e Selecting the system program to be transferred Select the required system program name from the various communication methods displayed in the system program list of the system installer For details refer to the instruction manual provided with the system installer 31 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 2 5 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Connect the NT620S 620C to an OMRON PC by the host link method To con nect the NT620S 620C to a PC by the host link method the NT620S 620C memory switch for Comm Method must be set for the host link For the Comm Method setting refer to Selecting the Host Communication Method page 70 2 5 1 Compatible PCs 32 PC Series Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the host link function built in and some do not In the C200HX HG HE series there are some CPU models which can be connected by the host
126. 620S 620C Installation Environment Z Caution When installing the PT in the operation panel observe the following points e Do not install the unit in locations directly exposed to chemicals or steam or locations where there is excessive dust e Do not install the unit at locations where the ambient temperature goes outside the range 0 to 45 C in the case of the NT620S and 0 to 40 C in the case of the NT620C or where the relative humidity goes outside the range 35 to 85 RH If the ambient temperature exceeds the range indicated above install a fan or an air condi tioner e Do not install the unit directly above equipment that generates a lot of heat heaters trans formers large capacity resistors etc Z Caution e Take the following points into account in order to prevent noise 1 Avoid installing the unit in panels in which high voltage equipment is also installed 2 Install the unit at a distance of at least 200 mm from power lines 3 If the unit is installed next to equipment that generates a strong electric or magnetic field solenoids etc provide a gap of at least 40 mm e Provide sufficient space for ventilation e Do not install the unit in locations where it will be subject to strong vibration or severe shock e To ensure that the unit can be operated and maintained without difficulty install it at a dis tance from high voltage equipment and power equipment Note The view angle of the LCD of NT620C scr
127. 620S 620C status can be checked Example of the PT status notify area application When achange is made in the NT620S 620C status such change will be notified to the PT status notify area as mentioned below NT620S 620C Numeral memory table 13 PT status notify area Currently display screen Content update memory table PT status Allocated word numeral table 13 12345678 Start Start 1 Communication Using the Memory Link Section 1 5 1 5 Communication Using the Memory Link This section describes the memory link communication method which is dis tinct from memory link in direct connection Reference Use of the memory link can be enabled by rewriting the system program of the NT620S NT620C using the system installer 1 5 1 Memory Link In amemory link communication with an NT620S NT620C is executed from a personal computer or FA computer using RS 232C 422A communication When memory link is used the NT620S NT620C has a memory area called the PT memory which is treated as an area within a virtual PC This means that pseudo direct connection can take place between the PT memory and the NT620S NT620C display elements By reading from and writing to the PT memory the host can execute NT620S NT620C processing via the PT memory In addition dedicated commands are available for reading and writing of fre quently used numeral memory tables and character string memory tables N1620S 620
128. 7 5 Cursor Moving Key Function This is a Touch Switch to select the numeric value setting input column ten key type and the character string setting input column when entering data When the Touch Switch is pressed a cursor display frame is moved to the numeral character string setting input column specified to be ready for input operation Refer to 4 8 Numeral Setting and 4 9 Character String Setting The numer ic value character string setting input column is automatically produced with the Support Tool Note that it is also possible to set the pop up window open func tion for the same touch switch 4 7 6 SCREEN PRINT Key Function When the Touch Switch is pressed a screen hard copy screen image is printed by a printer connected to the NT620S 620C Two kinds of keys can be set START key that starts the printing operation and CANCEL key that cancels the printing operation Even when the screen hard copy is being carried out the NT620S 620C contin ues operation Screen hard copy START key When this key is pressed screen hard copy is started SWARU SY CANCEL key _ lt _ Screen hard copy CANCEL key Temperature adjustment When this key is pressed screen A Current temp 20 C hard copy is canceled Set temp 25 C 10 1 10 1 4 8 Numeral Setting N Caution The numeral setting is a function to ent
129. 8 ED H 5 4 2D 0 E EAA 2d e Restricted display attributes There are the following restrictions on display attributes 167 Character String Setting Section 4 9 Character type Wide size only Character magnification Either of double x4 or x9 in correspon dence with display size specified Character display attribute Normal display only reverse and so forth are not available Zero suppress Without zero suppress only For details refer to the Numerals which can be Displayed page 135 4 9 Character String Setting NT620S 620C has a function of character string setting to enter a character string on a screen The character string setting allows a character string to directly be entered from the touch switch into the character string memory table displayed in the screen and also sent to the PC This section outlines the character string setting function and explains how to in put character strings during operation The character string setting function can only be used when using Ver 3 or a later version of the direct connection function For the actual method used to ascertain input character strings at the PC see Notification of Character string to the PC page 222 The character string setting is carried out w
130. 9200 bps DM6553 e When using CPM1 Channel 0000 Writing Value Unit No 0 Settings DM6650 0001 Host link mode Set the conditions with the contents of DM DM6651 0304 Data length 7 bits 2 stop bits even parity baud rate 19200 bps DM6653 0000 Unit No 0 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 6 2 6 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Connect the NT620S NT620C to an OMRON PC in a 1 1 connection by the NT link method To do this the following settings must be made NT620S NT620C Comm Method memory switch NT Link For details on setting the Comm Method memory switch refer to Selecting the Host Communication Method page 70 and for details on setting the DIP switches refer to DIP Switch Settings page 24 2 6 1 Compatible PCs Some models and series of OMRON PCs have the NT Link function built in and some do not In the C200HX HG HE series there are some CPU models which can be connected by the NT link method after adding an expansion communica tion board Check the model and series of the PC against the type of NT link unit before mak ing the connections The PCs that can be connected to NT620S NT620C are indicated below CPU Units Connect able with Expansion Communication Board PC Series CPU Unit Connectable to CPM1 10CDR CPM1 20CDR CPM1 30CDR CQM1 CPU41 E CQM1 CPU42 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CP
131. 99 When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the position on the screen to display a numeral and also set a numeral number to be displayed When the NT620S 620C is operated the screen displays the contents of the nu meral memory table For the actual method used to modify a currently displayed numerical value see Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words page 204 Numeral memory table numbers 247 through 255 are used for the clock function They cannot be used for other applications For details on the clock function see Section 5 6 Clock Function page 229 Numerals which can be Displayed The power of expression of the screen can be increased by giving various attrib utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the numerals of the numeral memory table The numeral attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool 135 Memory Tables S Section 44 The following types of numerals can be displayed on the NT620S 620C Digits of the whole numbers 1 to 8 digits Digits of the decimal fraction 0 to 7 digits Character sizes Half normal Enlarged display Double width double height x4 x9 x16 x64 The characters enlarged to the x4 scale or larg er are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing Character background color 8 colors
132. Ai Run Stop Battery Low Normal Screen switching strobe Numeral setting strobe flag Character string setting strobe flag Printer operat ing status Printing Stopped The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas 190 C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective areas varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 The screen switching strobe numeral setting strobe flag and character string setting strobe flag turn ON i e change to 1 in the following cases Screen switching strobe Turns ON when the screen is changed by a command from the PC or an operation at the NT620S NT620C Numeral setting strobe flag Turns ON when the contents of a numeral memory table are changed by an operation at the NT620S NT620C Character string setting strobe flag Turns ON when the contents of a character string memory table are changed by an operation at the NT620S NT620C These strobes all automatically turn OFF i e
133. An integer part is entered from the least significant digit When an input numer al value is in excess of display digits the numeral value shifts to the left from the least significant digit When a decimal point is entered a decimal fraction can be entered thereafter The decimal fraction is entered from the most significant digit When an input numeral value is in excess of display digits the numeral value shifts to the right from the most significant digit Numeral Value Dis play Initial state 1234 5678 2341 5678 3412 5678 3412 5678 3412 4567 Key Entry e Changing the sign In case of sign display setting the sign alternates from to and vice versa each time the sign key is pressed e Confirming the input numeral value Be sure to press the RETURN key after an input operation is completed When the RETURN key is pressed the numeral value displayed is written into the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC e Initial operation of the input keys When the sign and decimal point keys are pressed initially when pressing these keys immediately after displaying a screen or inputting the keys the NT610C will operate as follows Sign key The display is cleared by 0 but the sign is not reversed when entering a decimal number or displaying a sign Decimal point key The display is cleared by 0 The NT620S 620C starts enteri
134. Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appen dix L PC Memory Map page 327 Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT PC to the PC memory 2 Using the support tool create a numeral setting screen and allocate the nu meral memory table to the PC memory 3 Create a PC program for reading the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area when the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area comes ON 1 4 Read the allocated word for the numeral memory table number read in step 3 e Disabling numeral input Numeral input can be disabled by a PT status control area operation For de tails see 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 Application Example This example shows the reading of the numeral memory table number after a value has been changed by inputting numerical data at the NT620S 620C e Support tool settings Make the following settings using the support tool Allocated word for the PT status notify area CH0110 Numeral memory table entry No 3 DM 0005 registration word 1 Numeral memory table entry No 4 DM 0006 registration word 1 Data registered for the screens Numeral set
135. Buzzer page 102 LED page 103 Battery page 103 DIP Switch page 105 Screen Memory page 106 Printer I F page 108 Calender amp Clock Page 109 Backlight NT620C only MEMORY INITIALIZATION MENU Quit Screen Data Memory page 63 Memory Tables page 65 Display History page 67 aan MEMORY SWITCH MENU For host link NT link Communication I F page 98 Communication I F CHECK MENU m Quit __ Tool I F page 98 Quit Key Press Sound page 81 Buzzer Sound page 83 Screen Saver Backlight page 85 Resume Function page 87 Printer page 89 Comm Method page 70 Host Link Speed page 73 Unit No page 74 gt K This mode does not appear when the memory link is used 60 For memory link Quit Key Press Sound page 81 Buzzer Sound page 83 Screen Saver Backlight page 85 Resume Function page 87 Printer page 89 Host Link Speed page 73 Data bit length page 75 Stop bit length page 75 Parity bits page 75 Flow control page 75 Response page 75 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 3 3 3 Operations with the System Menu Displaying the System Menu The following gives the procedure to call the System Menu select the menu items and other operations with the System Menu Make sure that DIP SW2 3 Switch to the System Menu enabled disabled is set to OFF enabled If the setting is ON disabled the Sys
136. C 8 x 8 to 640 x 480 dots User defined image character size is set freely in the unit of 8 x 8 dots Library data NT620S 1 x 1 to 640 x 400 dots NT620C 1 x 1 to 640 x 480 dots Enlargement function Double width double height and magnification of 4x 9x 16x 64x Smoothing processing Available for enlarged characters with magnification of 4x or more Character display attribute Normal inverse flashing inverse flashing transparent display Image data Variable size pictograph Size Min 8 x 8 dots max 640 x 400 dots NT620S max 640 x 480 dots NT620C Capable of setting a size in the unit of 8 dots Incapable of setting the enlarged display smoothing processing display attrib utes such as inverse flashing Library data Combination of any characters and graphics Size Min 1 x 1 dot max 640 x 400 dots NT620S max 640 x 480 dots NT620C Capable of setting any size Enlarged display smoothing processing and display attributes such as in verse flashing are displayed according to the setting registered Continuous straight line circle arc sector rectangle polygon 4 types only for continuous straight line solid line broken line alternate long and short dash long and two short dashes 283 Specifications Painting out Appendix A 10 types Graphic display attributes Normal inverse flashing transparent display Display color NT620C only
137. C Memory Map otee ee hi ae SoS Sa StS CAO eee 327 M Special Characters 0545 c00 s cs geese ha See pe Sha ws oe ee ale Be ees 329 MAER eisdear sent ee tes cae REN Oaa Renaa Sol Revision History 5 4 5 3 54 4045 402 40s00ss0ensnee0s0 337 About this Manual This manual describes the basic functions and operation procedures of the NT series programmable ter minal NT620S 620C its operations when connected to a PC or a Host and includes the sections de scribed below Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install and operate the NT series programmable terminal NT620S 620C Section 1 describes the operation functions system configuration and the direct connection function of the NT620S 620C Section 2 describes the hardware settings installation to an operation panel connection to optional de vices and PC Section 3 describes the operation of the System Menu and the maintenance of the NT620S 620C Section 4 describes the functions of the NT620S 620C when it is connected to a PC Section 5 describes how to use the NT620S 620C when it is connected to the PC using the host link or NT link Section 6 describes how to use the NT620S 620C when it is connected to a Host using the memory link Section 7 describes the procedures to follow when the NT620S 620C does not operate correctly APPENDIX describes the specifications and the method for making connecting cable
138. CV500 LK201 CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 series Gy500 LK201 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV500 LK201 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 CPU01 EV nee series v500 LK201 CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CVM1 CPU21 EV Connection to the CPU units of CVM1 CV series PCs whose model names are not suffixed with EV is not possible Connect CPU units without the suffix EVL to an NT620S NT620C by using a host link unit 2 5 2 Connecting the NT620S 620C Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connec tors and connect the NT620S 620C to the PC To make a connecior cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 Note Before inserting or removing the connectors make sure that the NT620S 620C and the PC are turned OFF Z Caution After connecting the communication cable be sure to lock the connectors with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail Connecting to a PC with a 25 pin Connector Use a connector cable with a 25 pin connector on one end and a 9 pin connector on the other end NT620S 620C side to connect the NT620S 620C to a PC with a 25 pin connector NT620S 620C Host link unit CPU unit
139. Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay OOK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for purposes other than system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 When data memory DM is specified specify the bit number 00 to 15 after the word number 225 Alarm Lists Section 5 5 5 5 2 Displaying Alarm Lists by Using Bit Memory Table Allocation This section explains the actual procedure used to display the alarm messages of the alarm list function on the screen of the NT620S 620C 226 In al NT620S 620C Character String Table No 32 A Image Library FE68 k order to display an alarm message the allocated bit of the bit memory table located to the PC has to be switched ON Character String Table No 50 Image Library FE52 No 9 3 Allocated bit bit memory table 10 Character String Table No 32 amp Image Library FE68 No 10 a 1 lt ON Character String Table No 54 Image Library FD34 No 11 Warning message and image library data corresponding to bit memory table No 10 The relationship between the status of the allocated bit of the bit memory table and the corresponding alarm message is as follows
140. Elements by Using Allocated Bits and Words The NT620S 620C will operate as follows in the display element notification op eration NT620S 620C operation The NT620S 620C will write any changes in the contents of the numeral or char acter string memory table being displayed or pressing of a touch switch to the bits and words area in the PC NT620S 620C operation example Touch switch 12 PIGS 0 Bit 009012 Bit 009012 ON Dmoto o4aa gt 00901210 ____ DMo110 0 0 0 0 gu 00901201 DM0110 0 4 3 2 Numeral memory table 100 Numeral memory table 0 O4 3 2 Number of saved words 1 Copy First word DM0110 Notifying the NT620S 620C Status by Using Allocated Bits and Words PT Status Notify Area PT to PC The PT status notify area PT to PC is provided to notify the NT620S 620C sta tus changes to the PC When any NT620S 620C status has changed such change is written to this area in the PC and the PC will read the data from this area to check the NT620S 620C status The PT status notify area is configured as three consecutive words as shown be low Word 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit m m 1 m 2 Screen No 4 digit BCD Screen being displayed 0 Numeral memory table No 3 digit BCD Content upgrade memory table PT status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PT status The first word word m of the PT status notify area must be set with t
141. Example to Make the Lamp Light or Flash This example gives a procedure to control the bits to move a robot arm and turn ing the lamps ON and OFF e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool Lamp No 0 CH 000200 output bit to raise robot arm guide display mes sage UP Lamp No 1 CH 000201 output bit to lower robot arm guide display mes sage DOWN Lamp No 2 CH 000202 output bit to rotate robot arm counterclockwise guide display message C CLOCk Lamp No 3 CH 000203 output bit to rotate robot arm clockwise guide dis play message CLOCK Lamp No 4 CH 000204 output bit to clamp rotate robot arm guide display message CLAMP Lamp No 5 CH 000205 output bit to unclamp rotate robot arm guide dis play message UNCLAMP 213 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 Contents registered to the screen Lamp No 0 to No 5 UP Lamp No 0 Line 1 Process 3 DOWN Lamp No 1 C CLOCK Lamp No 2 A CLOCK Lamp No 3 Conveyor Loading Robot Arm CLAMP Lamp No 4 UNCLAMP Lamp No 5 one cLock e PC ladder program No PC ladder program is required to control the NT620S 620C Only a pro gram to control the robot arm movements is required e Program operation When the ladder program to control the robot arm is executed the lamps on the NT620S 620C screen turn ON and OFF in synchronization with the robot arm
142. Exec Warning If you execute this check screen data is initialized e f End is pressed without having pressed Exec the check is not executed The screen memory check starts While the check is in progress the message Checking is displayed e If the check is completed normally the message Memory Normal is dis played e To quit the check press the End touch switch The I O CHECK MENU will be redisplayed e If the message Memory Trouble is displayed it indicates that the life of the screen data memory has expired or that there may be a hardware fault Initial ize the screen data memory and perform the test again If the same error mes sage is displayed again contact your OMRON service center 107 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Printer Interface Check communication with the printer by using the menu operation from the Sys tem Menu shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU PERELE Quit Display History J I O Check J PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J lect Printer I F 1O CHECK MENU Select Printer I Quit Battery Touch Switch _ DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED
143. For the memory initialization by using the DIP switch refer to the Initialization by using the DIP switch page 65 3 7 Starting the Operation After completing the screen data transmission connect the NT620S 620C to the PC and start the operation Check the operation of the screen data and host program carefully before start ing operation Switching to the RUN mode Press the Quit touch switch in the System Menu The start up screen in the RUN mode will be displayed If the NT620S 620C has failed to start correctly e g the start up screen is not displayed an error message is displayed or the screen is not displayed at all refer to Section 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages page 270 and take appropriate action Reference The start up screen is the screen whose screen number is set for the screen switching specification in the PT status control area If no screen data has been registered at screen number the Screen not registered error message will be displayed For the screen number setting refer to Section 4 3 Screen Display page 129 Confirming the Communications between the NT620S 620C and the PC Execute the PC program and confirm that the following operations are normally performed e Confirm that the NT620S 620C screens switch according to the PC Host pro gram execution If the screens do not switch correctly check the connection between the NT620S 620C and the PC and also
144. HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HE C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HG C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin type C series C200HX CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV2 CVM1 CPU11 EV2 CVM1 CPU21 EV2 Note Features a 9 pin connector for RS 232C connections CVM1 CV series CV500 CV1000 CV2000 A communication board is required with the CPU units marked with an asterisk CPUs For Connection Via an NT Link 1 N Model Specification PC Type C200HE CPU32 E C200HE CPU42 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HE C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin C series C200HG C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E Note Features a connector for RS 232C connections selectable 9 pin type C series C200HX A communication board is required with the CPU units marked with an asterisk 319 Model List Appendix J RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit Specification RS 232C 9 pin co
145. MP Setting 0 ee eee eee 151 4 7 Touch Switches 5 266 i 06 94 604 seh GA be aed eee Bee ee SA dele Ga eae pas 151 4 7 1 Functions of Touch Switches 0 0 ccc eee eee ee 152 4 7 2 Stand Alone Functions 0 0 00 eee cece ene 154 4 7 3 Input Key Functton owa peso mia ee el Stee pee ed tee hee be ee tee oe 155 4 7 4 COPY Key Function eisereen oana a UREA ote CE MRaN e Rs 156 4 7 5 Cursor Moving Key Function 0 0 00 ee eee 157 4 7 6 SCREEN PRINT Key Function 0 0 0 cee eee eee 157 4 8 Numeral Settings miera rrean ena a ees RIDES SIAR hIR She Roe eee Ss eae 157 4 8 1 Numeral Setting Functions 0 00 cee eee ene 158 4 8 2 Type of Numeral Setting 00 eee eee 159 4 8 3 Ten Key Cr ation 2 50 lt sec eces cg miee ed Seg heeded eee ee te tebe Se 160 4 8 4 How to Use Ten Key Type 0 00 162 4 8 5 How to Use a Thumb Wheel Type 0 0 0 2 ee eee eee eee 166 4 8 6 Setting Items for Numeral Setting 00 eee eee eee 167 4 9 Character String Setting 0 cece eee ene 168 4 9 1 Functions of Character String Setting 0 0 00 ee eee eee 169 4 10 Pop up Window Function 0 0 171 4 10 1 Functions of Pop Up Windows 0 2 0c cece ee eee 172 4 10 2 Opening and Closing Windows 0 0 cece eee eee 174 4 10 3 Temporary Input Fields 0 0 0 eee eee 175 4 11 A
146. Min 8 x 8 dots to Max 640 x 400 dots entire screen NT620C Min 8 x 8 dots to Max 640 x 480 dots entire screen Create images to be registered as image data by cutting part of another display screen or drawing them on the screen when creating screen data All data dis played on the entire screen can also be registered as image data gt Image data Aes ola Part of another screen can be i j cut and dis a S a played __ Image data Po ke An image drawn oes on the screen gt TARS J can be displayed Image data of up to 224 images can be registered in a screen data file as code of FE20 to FEFF Basically image data can be displayed in any position on the screen however the entire image may not be displayed in some specific positions e Library data Ver 3 direct connection or later version Library data is image data consisting of plural characters and graphics The size can be specified within the following range of rectangular areas NT620S Min 1 x 1 dotto Max 640 x 400 dots entire screen NT620C Min 1 x 1 dotto Max 640 x 480 dots entire screen The creation of library data starts by laying out characters and graphics with attributes on the screen in the same manner as regular screen data Next specify the area to be registered Only characters and graphics can be extracted from other screen data and registered as lib
147. N 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection selector switch Set this always to OV ON 37 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 38 e CPU mounted type C120 LK201 V1 Setting the rear switches Unit parity and transfer code DIP SW1 1 to SW1 5 Set SW1 1 to SW1 5 to OFF 0 Parity is fixed at Even Parity Transfer code is fixed at ASCII 7 data bits and 2 stop bits Baud rate DIP SW2 1 to SW2 4 Set these switches to 1010 to select 9600 bps Set these switches to 0010 to select 19200 bps 0 OFF 1 ON 1 to 1 1 to N selection DIP SW2 6 Set SW2 6 to 0 1 to N Instruction level DIP SW2 7 SW2 8 Set these switches to 1 Levels 1 2 and 3 are enabled CTS selection DIP SW3 1 and SW3 2 Set SW3 1 to ON 1 and SW3 2 to OFF 0 Set this always to OV Synchronization DIP SW3 3 to SW3 6 Set SW3 3 SW3 5 and SW3 6 to ON 1 and SW3 4 to OFF 0 Set these to Internal Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 e CVM1 CV series backplate mounted type CV500 LK201 Setting the front switches Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a CVM1 CV series host link unit is connected to the NT620SLSS 620C The PC s
148. N Lit during operation If the battery voltage becomes low lit in orange during operation and in red when stopped 281 Specifications Appendix A Display Specifications NT620C Item Specification Dot matrix of color STN liquid crystal display panel Number of dots resolution 480 dots vertically x 640 dots horizontally Effective display area 144 mm vertically x 192 mm horizontally View angle Left right direction 30 Life expectancy 50 000 hours minimum Display color 8 colors black blue red magenta green cyan yellow white Backlight white cold cathode tube Life expectancy 10 000 hours minimum Average 20 000 hours Screen saver 10 minutes 1 hour None Indicators POWER indicator Green LED Lit while power is being supplied RUN indicator Lit during operation If the battery voltage becomes low lit in orange during operation and in red when stopped It is the time taken for the brightness to decline to half its original value at normal temperature and humidity Panel Specifications Specification Touch panel Display Capacity Number of switches 512 for NT620S 32 horizontally x 16 vertically 768 for NT620C 32 horizontally x 24 vertically Maximum number that can be registered per screen 256 Input Pressure sensitive type Operating Activating force 1 N min Item
149. NT Link 1 1 2 cece eee 43 2 6 1 Compatible PES ss sis an n aaa Saa ee ated sisi ad EN ER SRAN 43 2 6 2 Connecting the NT620S 620C 0 2 cee ee 44 2 6 3 PC Switch Settings reda cee eee eee 45 2 7 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N 0 cee eee 48 2 7 1 Compatible PES cc oraren erst See sees Gb ence Wk e E bed Ma atte ears 48 2 7 2 Connecting the NT620S NT620C Units 0 000 002 48 2 7 3 PES with Settings yeeros terrone BB h aes SORES CADSR ORR BE REM Stee 54 2 8 Communication with the Host Using Memory Link 00 00 0000 54 2 8 1 Connection Method 0 0 eee a a A S a a E 55 2 8 2 Host Settings scce chia Ah ii eie pede Si e 55 29 Gonnecting a PNter oasa e a ea E eee es EE E ET 55 2 971 Howto Connect e ne cine nde ae Be A ROS E p EE A EE E Ss 55 21 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 2 1 Description of Parts and Settings Before getting to the operation confirm the names and functions of parts Also set the DIP switches on the NT620S 620C Z Caution On unpacking the NT620S NT620C check its external appearance and confirm that there is no damage Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise on shaking the NT620S NT620C lightly The product may malfunction if it is damaged 2 1 1 Description of Parts Front View POWER LED Lit when the power is supplied POWER RUN RUN LED Display e Lit in green when the unit Th
150. NT620S 620C DIP switch Set the DIP switch as follows to initialize the screen data memory Operation 1 Set DIP SW2 1 on the NT620S 620C to ON and turn the power ON Select Yes The screen Initialize Screen Memory Gate memoris initialized During the initialization the Yes j Initializing message will be displayed No If No is selected the memory initialization will be canceled 4 Screen Memory Init If you need Normal Mode please turn off SW2 1 then press reset button 2 Turn the NT620S 620C power to OFF 3 Set NT620S 620C DIP SW2 1 to OFF and turn the power ON Reference Selecting No will cancel the memory initialization To change the system set tings or to register the screen data set DIP SW2 1 to OFF and start the NT620S 620C and then call the System Menu screen The NT620S 620C DIP SW2 1 is used to set Screen data forced initialize effec tive ineffective Setting this to ON selects effective and OFF ineffective 3 4 2 Initialization of the Memory Tables It is possible to initialize the numeral memory tables and character string memory tables in the NT620S 620C Initialization of the memory tables means overwriting the present values in the memory tables in the NT620S NT620C with the initial settings set with the support tool If amemory table is initialized in the Maintenance Mode it is initialized regardless of the setting for t
151. NT620S 620C returns to the INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU 68 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches The NT620S 620C can be connected to a PC by the host link NT link 1 1 NT link 1 N or memory link The link can be selected by setting the memory switch Also the host link baud rate resume function effective ineffective etc are set with the memory switches This section describes the communications condition settings by using the memory switches Memory Switches The NT620S 620C has the memory areas used to store the PC connection meth od communications conditions system settings etc which can be used as the switches and called the memory switches Since the memory switches use the flash memory the stored data can be held even when the power supply is turned OFF Reference If the memory switch data is not backed up by the built in battery it will all be initialized to the values set with the support tool when the NT620S 620C is switched OFF If the message Battery Lowered is displayed while the NT620S 620C is oper ating replace the built in battery immediately For details on how to replace the battery see Replacing the Battery page 275 Setting Functions and the Memory Switch Menu The memory switches can be set easily by using the memory switch me
152. OFF Not pressed 1 ON Pressed Alternate The allocated bit is switches to 1 ON if currently 0 and to 0 OFF if currently 1 Set The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 1 ON Reset The allocated notify bit is forcibly switched to 0 OFF The status of a touch switch is determined by checking the ON OFF status of its notify bit The touch switch notify bits can be allocated to the following areas of the PC memory C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 When making a data memory DM specification specify the bit number 00 to 15 following the word number Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the touch switch notify bits to the PC memory 2 When creating the screen data using the support tool register the touch switch for a screen 3 Create the PC program to switch the notify bit of the touch switch ON and OFF 217 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 e Important Points Details on touch swit
153. ON and their remedies Cause Remedy Memory Unformatted The power was switched off during initialization of the screen data memory or while checking the screen data memory Initialize the screen data memory and transmit the screen data again Screen Data Corrupted The power was switched off during screen data transmission Initialize the screen data memory and transmit the screen data again Mark Data Corrupted e The power was switched off during screen data transmission e Transmission of screen data was interrupted Initialize the screen data memory and transmit the screen data again No direct information is set Use the Support Tool to set PT Control Area and PT Notify Area No words have been allocated for the PT status control area and PT status notify area Allocate words for the PT status control area and PT status notify area by using the support tool None NT620S NT620C doesn t start up Illegal data has been written to the screen data memory Initialize the screen data memory See 3 4 Initializing Memory page 63 None The buzzer sounds and the RUN LED lights in red and orange by turns The system program cannot be started up because there is an error in it Contact your OMRON service center Battery Lowered At the same time the RUN LED is lit in orange during operation or in red when stopped Voltage of battery in the NT620S 62
154. Support Tool NO 256 NO 257 NO 258 NO 259 data by using the support tool Section The following types of characters can be displayed on the NT620S 620C Character Type Dots vertical x horizontal Character Set Maximum Number of Characters Displayed in One Screen without overwriting NT620S NT620C Half height character Alphanumerics and symbols 80 characters x 50 lines 4000 charac ters 80 characters x 60 lines 4800 charac ters Normal characters 8x16 Alphanumerics and symbols 80 characters x 25 lines 2000 charac ters 80 characters x 30 lines 2400 charac ters 16 x 16 32 x 32 64 x 64 Create by using the support tool Image data Not fixed 8 dot units in both hori zontal and vertical directions Created using the support tool Library data Not fixed Created using the support tool e Enlarged display of the characters and marks The characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales Double width scale Double height scale x4 scale x9 scale x16 scale x64 scale Reference and library data When using a mixture of characters marks image data and library data in the same character string note that enlarged display is not possible for image data 134 4 4 Section 4 4 Memory Tables e Smoothing The characters and marks enlarged to the x4 scale or larger are displ
155. Switch I O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED Section 3 9 Select Maintenance Mode Select I O Check Select LCD Display or EL Display The example to the left shows the NT620S screen e Dots the points that make up the screen are displayed one by one starting at the top left of the screen In the case of the NT620C the check is performed for each color in the order black blue gt magenta white yellow gt green gt black If all the dots are displayed successfully the display is cleared and the O CHECK MENU is redisplayed e To discontinue a screen display check press the touch switch at the top right corner of the screen 101 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Buzzer Check the NT620S 620C buzzer by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Selec i Quit Display History _I O Check PT Settings nit Memory Memory Switch Select Buzzer 1 O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch _
156. Switching from the System Menu to the RUN Mode 62 The NT620S 620C will exit the System Menu and switch to the RUN mode in the cases mentioned below e Selecting Quit in the System Menu e The screen touch switches is not pressed for over 10 seconds Initializing Memory Section 3 4 3 4 Initializing Memory Reference If the NT620S 620C is used for the first time or if the screen data is ruined and the NT620S 620C cannot be normally started the memory needs to be initialized The memory initialization is required in the cases mentioned below When the screen data memory is initialized all the screen data that was stored in the NT620S NT620C up to that point is cleared Check that the created screen data is backed up in a floppy disk before initializing If no system program is installed or the system program has been destroyed the system program must be installed For the installation method refer to 2 4 Installing the System Program page 30 e The following memory data can be initialized Image data memory Memory tables Display history The screen data can be initialized regardless of the setting for Resume Function see page 87 3 4 1 Initialization of the Screen Data The screen data can be initialized by either of the following two methods Initialization by using the System Menu Initialization by using the DIP switch Forced Initialization Initialization by using the Syste
157. Tables and Graphs 0 0 ec eee 198 5 2 1 Allocation Words and Display of the Memory Tables 201 5 2 2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specification 204 5 2 3 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specification 00 0 arrn ee eee 205 5 2 4 Copying the Memory Table 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee 208 5 2 5 Upgrading Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words 0 000000 0 0000 211 5 3 Lamps and Touch Switches ssis 0 0 0 ec eect eee 212 5 3 1 Allocation Bits and Display of Lamps 0 00 0 002 cee ee eee 212 5 3 2 Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the Lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits 00 00000 212 5 3 3 Allocated Bits and Display of Touch Switches 00 00 0000 214 5 3 4 Lit Flashing and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses Changing the Status of Allocated Bits 0000000022 eee 216 5 3 5 Notifying the PC that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status 0 0 eee ee eee 217 5 4 Numeral and Character string Setting 00 0 e eee eee eee 220 5 4 1 Notification of Numbers to the PC 1 0 ee eee 220 5 4 2 Notification of Character string to the PC 0 0 eee eee 222 3 Alarmi Lists ag c ace ork was So eee SAG owes Cee eee Sy e
158. Tool page 29 PT model setting and direct access setting at the support tool do not match the NT620 620C Using the Tool Settings of the support tool set the PT model and direct access settings that match the NT620 620C Cannot communicate with the PC Memory switch settings do not match Check the communication setting in the Memory Switch menu of the Maintenance Mode and match the PC and NT620S 620C settings Refer to 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches page 69 NT620S 620C and PC are not correctly connected Check that the type length and installation of the connector cable match the specifications Refer to 2 5 Connection to a PC by the Host Link page 32 and 2 6 Connection to a PC by the NT Link page 43 In a host link connection the PC termination resistance setting is incorrect Set the PC termination resistance correctly In an NT link 1 N connection there is duplication of unit numbers Make the unit number settings again so that there is no duplication Refer to Setting Unit Numbers NT Link 1 N Only page 74 The buzzer sounds and the RUN LED goes off Incorrect operation due to external noise Disconnect the communication cable from the source of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line Touch panel does not react 268 Incorrect operation
159. U44 E C200HS CPU21 E C200HS CPU23 E C200HS CPU31 E C200HS CPU33 E CPM1 C200HS C series C200HE CPU32 i 2 C200HE CPU42 Z E CoogHE CPU42 Z C200HE C200HG CPU43 Z E C200HG CPU63 Z E C200HG CPU43 C200HG CPU53 C200HG CPU33 C200HG CPU63 Z Z Z Z C200HG C200HX CPU44 Z E C200HX CPU64 Z E C200HX CPU34 Z C200HX CPU44 Z C200HX CPU54 Z C200HX CPU64 Z E E E E E E E E E E C200HX CV series CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV500 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CVM1 series CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV CVM1 43 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 6 2 6 2 Connecting the NT620S 620C Refer to the illustrations below to select the appropriate cable for the unit connec tors and connect the NT620S 620C to the PC A host link connector cable can also be used To make a connector cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 Z Caution Before inserting or removing the connectors make sure that the NT620S 620C and the PC are turned OFF RS 232C Cable Use a connector cable with a 9 pin connector on both ends to connect the NT620S 620C to a PC with a 9 pin connector NT620S 620C__ Spia m e rA l SYSMAC C series PC es CVM1 CV ser
160. W1 6 to OFF Setting for continuous transmission 47 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 2 7 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Connect NT620S NT620C units to an OMRON PC in a 1 N connection by using the NT link method To do this the communication conditions must be set with the memory switches e Setting NT link 1 N Refer to Setting the Host Communication Method page 70 e Setting the unit No of the connected NT620S NT620C Setting Unit Numbers NT Link 1 N Only page 74 With NT link 1 N both RS 422A type 4 wire and RS 485 type 2 wire connec tions are possible The NT link 1 N cannot be used with the system programs installed in NT620S ST211 B and NT620C ST141 B on shipment The system program must be changed by using the NT620 ZS3AT EMV system installer 2 7 1 Compatible PCs The only OMRON PCs that can be connected in an NT link 1 N are the C series C200HX HG HE models When making a connection check the series and model of the PC to which the connection is being made and the type of CPU unit that is installed The follow ing is a list of the PCs that can be connected to the NT620S NT620C via an NT link 1 N CPU Units Connect CPU Unit with Built in able Using an Expan NT Link Function sion Communication Board C200HE CPU32 Z C200HE CPU42 Z C200HG CPU33 PC Series Connectable to C200HE CPU42 Z E C200HE C200HG CPU4
161. a part of bit memory table 181 Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 Recording Format of Alarm History For the alarm history the following data is recorded in the memory concerning the contact that turns 1 ON Contact number Date and time of occurrence Message set in the bit memory table the contents of the character string memory table Maximum Number of Alarms to be Recorded The number of alarms to be recorded is up to 256 in the order of occurrence or up to 255 for each alarm message in the order of frequency Data recorded is backed up by a battery so it is not lost even when the power supply is turned OFF Reference When the voltage of the battery in the NT620S NT620C drops the recorded data cannot be retained reliably How to deal with alarm recording in the order of occurrence when the number of alarms capable of being recorded is exceeded is determined by the Alarm First in First out setting of the System Memory of the support tool as follows ON Old history is cleared and new history is recorded OFF Alarms in excess of 256 are not recorded new alarms are discarded In order to clear initialize the alarm history the memory is initialized Refer to page 67 The alarm history can also be cleared using bit 11 of the PT status control bits Refer to page 237 How to Make Sure of Alarm History The alarm history can be displayed by the NT62
162. able for the connection When a connector cable of 5 m or longer is required When a connector cable of 5 m or longer is required please make the cable However note that the maximum transmission distance is 15 m To make a connector cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 When Long Distance Transmission is Required When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS 232C specification is re quired it can be achieved by using an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 to switch to RS 422A communication RS 485 communication can not be used For details refer to Appendix Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit page 315 of the appendix 2 5 3 PC Switch Settings Note When the NT620S 620C and PC are connected to each other set the conditions at the PC host link unit or the CPU as given in the table below The following is a general description of switch settings Refer to the manual for respective units for the details of the switch settings Switch Setting I O port RS 232C Baud rate Set the same baud rate as the NT620S 1 Transfer code ASCII 7 data bits 2 stop bits Parity Even 1 to 1 1 to N 1 to N 2 Instruction level Level 1 2 3 Unit 00 1 Set the host link baud rate at 9600 bps or 19200 bps with the memory switch for host link baud rate For the details refer to Selecting the Host Link
163. according to an instruction ON OFF from the PC Position and graphic to be displayed can be varied OFF state ON state For the Image Library LAMP presence of external frame Lit Flashing color dis play guide display and so forth cannot be specified unlike normal LAMP However since the attributes of every display factors when registering the Li brary Data are displayed as they are a range of application will be widened fur ther Image Library LAMP Attributes The following attributes can be set to the Image Library LAMP e LAMP code Graphics to be displayed during ON and OFF are specified by the Library Data or Image Data code respectively e Display position Positions to be displayed during ON and OFF are specified 4 7 Touch Switches Caution The NT620S 620C has a function whereby input operations can be performed by using touch panels displayed on the screen NT620S 620C screens can be switched or bit information sent to the PC by pressing lightly touching the touch switches in a panel The touch switches can also be made to light up or flash and go off like lamps Touch switches are set when creating the screen data with the support tool The following explanation covers the types of touch switch that can be displayed and functions other than that for notification to the PC For the actual method used to notify touch switch statuses to a PC see Lit Flashing and Unlit Touch Swi
164. al LAMP is ON Section LAMP OFF LAMP ON LAMP ON LAMP ON Memory Table update The characters The Memory Table are displayed in white against dark background display area in the LAMP during illu mination is over written LAMP Character String Memory Table display area e Frame display and ON Flashing Lit Flashing operations differ depending on the presence of the frame display of the normal LAMP When the frame is displayed only an area within the frame is ON or flashing When the frame is not displayed an area is ON or flashing together with the frame lt When the frame is displayed gt Unlit lt When the frame is not displayed gt Lit o 7 Li gt 1 1 N RS lt The frame is also flashing concurrently Only within the frame is flashing e Combined display of normal LAMP With multiple LAMPs of the same number or the same contact registered the LAMPs combined as shown below can be ON simultaneously lt Display example gt The same number or contact is specified for the LAMPs L1 through L5 L1 L1 L2 L3 L2 L4 L3 L4 L5 L5 150 Touch Switches Section 4 7 4 6 2 Image Library LAMP Setting The Image Library LAMP overwrites a different graphic and displays it at a sepa rate position
165. alues outside of this range are not displayed J 100 0 Values outside the range are not displayed 100 147 LAMP Section 4 6 3 When an absolute value of is equal to or greater than 1000 A value is not displayed in a graph in the same way as 2 Reference Ifa graph is duplicated by drawing multiple graph lines of the same value it is overwritten and displayed in the order of setting At this time since the part that the lines are duplicated is displayed by use of those colors of the Exclusive OR display Refer to page 121 the line type and line color are displayed dif ferently than that specified Since a graph line is overwritten with respect to the graph frame when 0 value continues in a graph with a sign displayed line type and line color are displayed differently than that specified When creating a graph apexes of polygon are placed in order at regular inter vals within the frame width Apex interval can be changed freely when correct ing a polygonal line 4 6 LAMP Lamp is a graphic area capable of changing the displaying state according to an instruction from the PC There are two kinds of LAMPs Normal LAMP that chan ges the displaying state OFF ON Flashing of a graphic fixedly displayed and Image Library LAMP that displays separate graphics in OFF and ON states LAMP is set when creating a screen data with the Support Tool A maximum of 256 LAMPs can
166. an operation panel Bear this in mind when selecting the installation location in the panel Install the NT620S 620C to the operation panel and connect the power to the NT620S 620C as described below Observe the following points when installing the NT620S NT620C in an opera tion panel Do not install the NT620S NT620C at sites subject to the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction Severe temperature variations Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications High humidity condensation Splashing chemical agents Severe oil splashing Corrosive or flammable gases Strong vibrations or shocks Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites Strong ultra violet irradiation Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT620S NT620C is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction Static electricity or noise from other equipment Strong electromagnetic fields Nearby power cables Potential exposure to radioactivity 2 2 1 Installation to the Operation Panel Caution The NT620S 620C can be flush mounted to an operation panel Use the panel fittings and tools included in the product package and follow the procedure below During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit Otherwise the product may malfunction 25 Installation Section 2 2 The thickness of applica
167. and Words aiiai PT Status Control Area PC to PT The PT status control area PC to PT is provided to control the NT620S 620C status from the PC When data is written to this area in the PC the NT620S 620C will read the data and operates according to the data The PT status control area is configured as four consecutive words as shown below Word 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit n Screen No 4 digit BCD Screen switch setting n 1 0 Copy source money table No eda BCD Copy memory n 2 Copy type Copy destination memory table No 3 digit BCD table setting n 3 PT status control bit 0 00 00 PT status control L The first word word n of the PT status control area must be set with the support tool 187 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 e Screen switch settings refer to page 191 Specify the screen No to switch the screen displayed on the NT620S 620C e Copy memory table settings refer to page 208 Specify the memory table No to copy the contents of a memory table internally in the NT620S 620C Set the copy type to match the type of memory table to be copied 0 Character string memory table 1 Numeral table e PT status control bits refer to page 235 Set the bits ON or OFF according to the following table to control the screen display and buzzer 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 Bit 0 0 Controlled I
168. and a maximum of 256 graphs can be registered in the graph frame A single broken line can display a maximum of 512 Numeral Memory Tables However the maxi mum number of numeral memory tables that can be displayed on one screen is also 512 e Reference table Specifies the first memory table number of the series of referenced memory tables Although it is possible to select either direct or indirect as the reference method with the support tool only the direct setting is meaningful when using an NT620S NT620C It is not possible to use hexadecimal values for broken line graphs If hexadeci mal values are specified in numeral memory tables referenced to obtain graph values the graph will not be displayed The letter F may be used to indicate negative values but make sure that no hexadecimal values are written Broken Line Graph Attributes When using an NT620S NT620C the following attributes can be used when dis playing broken line graphs e Graph frame This attribute specifies a rectangular area used to display a graph This area can occupy the following range NT620S Max 640 dots horizontally x 400 dots vertically NT620C Max 640 dots horizontally x 480 dots vertically The following setting can be performed for a graph frame Frame display With the Frame Display specified 1 dot width frame line is displayed out side of the frame area Color of a frame line can be selected out of eight
169. and other in formation NT620S 620C PT status notify area gt Currently displayed screen PT Content upgrade memory table stopped Screen number PT status 239 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 8 5 8 1 Ascertainable NT620S 620C Statuses 240 Notified Operating Statuses j PT status notification bits of the PT status notify area 15141312111098 765432 1 OBit Word m 2 T T PT status notification bits 0 0 0 10101010 l PT status Doca eS eye a 0 0 0 f A A A A A Controlled Item 1 ON 0 OFF ee operating sta operating stopped Battery low normal Screen switch strobe flag Numeral setting strobe flag Character string setting strobe flag Printer operating RAS status Printing Stopped N Caution PT operating status bit 15 When the NT620S 620C is in the RUN mode this bit is set to ON 1 In other modes and while the system menu is displayed it is OFF 0 When this bit is OFF allocated bits and words cannot be read or written to To ensure system safety be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally Battery bit 13 If the voltage of the backup battery for the NT620S 620C memory becomes low this bi
170. ange the lamp display status 212 Change the statuses of the touch switches 216 Changing displayed numeral or character strings 204 205 Changing the contents of allocated bits 212 Changing the contents of allocated words 204 205 211 Changing the system setting 59 Character keys 155 Character string input notify command Sent from PT to host 261 Character string memory table 133 Character string memory table clear command Sent from host to PT 258 Character string memory table read command Sent from host to PT 252 Character string memory table write command Sent from host to PT 256 Character string 14 Character string memory table display 203 Character string setting 168 Character string setting screen 121 Character string setting strobe flag 190 240 Characters 123 Check sum 249 Checking and setting the calendar and time 109 Checking the battery voltage 103 Checking the buzzer 102 Checking the communications 98 Checking the LCD EL display 100 Checking the LED 103 Checking the printer interface 108 Checking the PT setting status 111 Checking the screen memory 106 Checking the touch switches 97 Checking the upper lower limit 159 Chemical resistant cover 324 Child screens 129 130 Circle 126 Classification of screens 129 Cleaning method 278 Clock function 229 Close 174 Color display 121 Color of transparency 122 Command transmission intervals 248 Commands
171. anual for the host Operation When Using Instructions The flow of communications between the host and the NT620S NT620C follows one of the three patterns indicated below depending on the type of command and the setting made for response with the memory switches see page 75 e Pattern with write command when No is set for the response Operation at host Operation at NT620S NT620C Data write command However when an error occurs an error response is returned e Pattern with data read command re send command and data write com mand when response Yes is set Operation at host Operation at NT620S NT620C i a a y rr rz 5 Data write command Q 3 3 w a 2 o o e n co o a ne if fe a ry Be 0 n fo on to ae o on 3 n o fo get Re E a eer ae ans SO el ee ee I TT Ae EEE a T ALAR ole nia gate sey fee fa Mead pS Be eh Aaa nearer wees ye Sometimes multiple responses may be received for one command e Pattern when the operation at the NT620S NT620C is notified to the host Operation at host Operation at NT620S NT620C sy Notify command De eee Pee eke Lo ey ek Seca i a cere we Ue ree cee Tel en el ay Ga eed 6 2 2 Notes on Using Commands The points that should be observed when using commands are given below Method for Specifying Commands When a personal computer or similar device is used a
172. are used in the examples in this Chapter NT620S ST211 CQM1 Equipment PT PC Support tool NT series Support Tool Ver 2 Support tool settings PT 610G Note This is not 620S Memory capacity 512 KB Direct connection Ver 4 5 1 2 Allocatable Bits and Words The following bits and words are allocated to the PC and used for the NT620S 620C operation The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 The allocations must be made without exceeding respective area range OMRON PCs C Series PCs CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Word Charac ter String Data Memory O O O Allocated Word Charac ter String Data Memory O O O Allocated Bit Allocated Area Name Bit Area Name Numeral Numeral Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay O O Timer Timer Counter Counter O A A Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK A 1wordony x NG When allocating a memory table to words the allocation must not exceed the word area Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use However reading from them is possible One allocation word of the memory table can use continuous areas of up to 2 words in the case of numeral memory
173. area ei Ba DEEN 153 Touch Switches Section 4 7 lt Example of setting a display frame outside the Touch Switch area gt e Reverse display on input It is possible to set a touch switch so that its display will be inverted when it is pressed e Guide display Labels can be assigned to touch switches When the touch switch is ON the label is displayed in reverse video in the case of an NT620S and in the exclu sive XOR color see page 121 in the case of the NT620C Attributes of guide display characters are in the same way as character display Refer to Charac ter Types and Attributes page 134 e Lit and flashing This attribute can specify whether or not the Touch Switch is allowed to be ON or flashing when the Touch Switch is ON or flashing according to an instruction from the PC e Color display NT620C only External frame color when displayed 8 colors OFF color 8 colors or transparency Lit Flashing entry color 8 colors 4 7 2 Stand Alone Functions The NT620S 620C can switch over the screen only by operating the switches without instructions from the PC This function is referred to as Stand Alone Function When a screen data is created with the support tool the screen number of a screen to be switched over is assigned to the input terminal of the touch switch When the touch switch is pressed during operation the screen of the number specified is displayed At this time the
174. as terminated when the resume function is effective Battery life Five years 25 C When the voltage drops A message Battery Lowered is displayed The RUN LED is lit in orange or red Communication flag BAT LOW to the PC is ON 1 Key input sound setting 284 Touch switch Input sound Sounds for 0 2 second Setting Set the Key Press Sound to ON in the MEMORY SWITCH MENU Specifications Appendix A Item Specifications Resume function To retain the contents without initializing the memory table character string nu meral value when turning ON the power resetting changing over the opera tion mode Setting Set the Resume Function to ON in the MEMORY SWITCH MENU Screen print function To print the screen just displayed by means of printer interface connector Setting Set an output specification in the MEMORY SWITCH MENU NT620S ESC P TONE Conforms to ESC P 24 J81C PR201H TONE Conforms to NEC PL PR201H HP TONE Conforms to PCL5 NT620C ESC P COLOR Conforms to ESC P 24 J83C color printing ESC P TONE Conforms to ESC P 24 J83C monochrome 8 grayscale levels Conforms to NEC PL PR201H Conforms to PCL5 PR201H COLOR HP TONE Communications Specifications For a Host Link Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Communications settings Start stop synchronization Baud rate 9600 19 200
175. ation Method Remarks Host link Installed in the IBM PC AT NT link 1 1 ST E on shipping or compat Host link NT620 ZS3AT EV1 ible NT link 1 1 1 N NT ZS3AT EV1 IBM PC AT NT620 ZS3AT EMV1 or compat Memory link ible The system installer differs depending on the communication method used A brief description of the method for installing the system program is presented here For details on the procedure for setting up the system installer in the per sonal computer and its operation refer to the manual provided with the system installer e Procedure for installing the system program The procedure for installing the system program in the NT620S NT620C is presented below 1 Initialization of the NT620S NT620C If there is another system program already installed first delete this pro gram While the power to the NT620S NT620C is off turn DIP switch 2 8 ON then turn the power to the NT620S NT620C back on When the confirmation message is displayed select Yes 2 Setting the NT620S NT620C on standby for installation Turn the power to the NT620S NT620C off and return DIP switch 2 8 whose setting was changed in 1 above to OFF After that turn the power to the NT620S NT620C back on The NT620S NT620C will enter the standby status for installation of the sys tem program 3 System program transfer Connect a personal computer to the NT620S NT
176. ation Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 1 4 2 NT Link Features of the NT Link 12 The NT link is a new communication method applied between the NT620S 620C and a PC The PCs that can be connected using the NT link are as follows e When using the built in host link of the CPU unit CPM1 RS 232C adapter required CQM1 C200HS C200HX HG HE CVM1 CV series PCs e When using a communication board C200HX HG HE When using the NT620S NT620C in an NT link two communications modes are possible a single NT620S NT620C can be connected to one PC 1 1 NT link or alternatively up to eight NT620S NT620C units can be connected to a single PC port 1 N NT link However the 1 N connection NT link can be used with C200HX HG HE only In the following sections the NT link communication mode in general will be indi cated by the term NT link a 1 1 connection NT link will be indicated by NT link 1 1 and a 1 N connection NT link will be indicated by NT link 1 N High speed communications with specific types of PCs can be executed Writing in units of bits to the PC memory area is possible This enables another bit of a word data to which a touch switch has been allo cated to be used for other purpose e g to allocate a lamp This can be used even when the PC is in the RUN mode When using the host link the operation mode changes to the monitor mode Provided the PT used is one that suppor
177. aximum of 50 words can be written at one time 254 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Numeral memory table write command Sent from host to PT Command ESC W N m t t2 t3 t4 l4 l2 1B 57 E k k k k k E E k k k k k k t Data of 1 word Data of 1 word dt dim dny dnm s1 s2 CR 5 a ae k 2C je FP pe aL A k k k k k k oD C Behe ate ky fe ee es Tl on m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present 8 Absent only 1 table written 9 Present only 1 table written ty to tg First numeral memory table number written to 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0999 l4 lo Number of written tables 2 BCD digits 01 to 20 1 to 20 tables When m is 8 or 9 omit this setting d11 to dim dny to dnp Contents of the numeral memory tables 1 to 8 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFFFFFF It is possible to omit initial zeroes so that there are less than 8 digits Individual words of data are delimited by commas S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits When m is 0 or 8 omit this setting Response Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC w N 0 0 s4 so CR 1B 57 4E 30 30 32 30 oD S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as 20 e Writes the data
178. ay 122 Transporting 295 Trend graph 141 Turning ON the power 58 25 pin 29 U Upgrading graphs 211 Use touch switches for notification to the PC 214 User Numeral setting attribute 132 160 Using the display history recording function 92 V Virtual PC area 244 Voltage of battery 284 W Warning label 23 Warning lamp 238 Waterproofed 4 Window 172 Window keys Touch switches 155 Window opening 237 Window screens and display elements 173 Wiring 302 313 Word address setting error 271 Z Zero suppress 168 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No V033 E1 5 L Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content September 1995 Original production August 1996 Revisions associated with model change Page xi P 20 P 281 Correction of DIP switch description Page P 22 May 1997 Additional functions due to additions to installer NT link 1 N memory link Correction of errors Addition of text to comply with EC directives August 1997 Correction of errors April 2001 Page 29 Information on connecting cables added Page 30 Information on erasing the system program added Page 45 Changes made to information on cables Pages 70 96 Information on the maximum number
179. ayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing e Reverse and flashing display Reverse display The display brightness of the character and the background is reversed comparing with the normal display Flashing display Characters are displayed as they flash The normal display alternates with no display Reverse and flashing display The reverse display alternates with the nor mal display e Character color NT620C only When using an NT620C colors can be assigned to characters as follows Character display color 8 colors Character background color 8 colors 4 4 2 Numeral Memory Table The numeral memory table is an NT620S 620C internal memory used to store the numeral data Up to 1000 numeral memory tables can be used and up to 8 digits 4 bytes of numeral data including signs can be stored in one numeral memory table The numeral memory tables at up to 50 positions can be regis tered in one screen Number of Numeral Memory Tables Displaying a Numeral Ja amp Set the number of numeral memory tables in the support tool s system memory 512 Sets the number of numeral memory tables to 512 1000 Sets the number of numeral memory tables to 1000 The difference between setting 1000 numeral memory tables and 512 numeral memory tables in terms of the memory capacity required for screens is 4880 by tes The numeral memory tables are registered with table numbers 0 to 9
180. b utes such as the enlarged or reverse display to the characters and figures The character and figure attributes can be set in the edit screen when creating the screen data by using the support tool Types and Attributes of Characters On the NT620S 620C the following types of character can be entered and dis played Maximum Number of Dots Characters Displayed in One Screen h Tee vertical x Character Set without overwriting horizontal puzontell NT620S NT620C 80 characters x 80 characters x 50 lines 60 lines 4000 characters 4800 characters 80 characters x 80 characters x 25 lines 30 lines 2000 characters 2400 characters Half height 8x8 Alphanumerics character and symbols Normal Alphanumerics characters and symbols The NT620S 620C is provided with marks image data and library data in addition to regular characters e Marks A mark is a graphic pattern combining 16 x 16 32 x 32 and 64 x 64 dots But 32 dot and 64 dot marks are combinations of 4 2 x 2 and 16 4 x 4 16 dot marks respectively Up to 224 16 dot marks can be registered in one screen data file 16 16 16 16 E 16 16 16 16 16 dot mark 32 dot mark 64 dot mark 123 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 e Image data Image data is a set of images of which sizes can be designated in units of 8 dots in a square area NT620S
181. be dis played The memory table contents can be changed from the PC Graph display Not only bar graphs but also broken line graphs Note and trend graphs Note can be displayed using the numeral table Lamp display Lamps can be turned on or flashed as controlled by the PC Alarm list display Note In response to the state of PC contact warning messages are automatically listed plus when and how many times the messages appeared can also be displayed Function relating to gt communication Functions relating to Communications with PC The NT620S 620C communi data Input data input cates with PC through various Input by the touch switch host I F units or NT link so that Data can be input by simply touch as eins Si may p ing the screen There are various i sets d as t ae orma touch switch functions such as tek a ae fab sae the PC sending input data to the PC pneiee eine Ue Pop up window function A window overlaying the currently displayed screen can be alternately opened and closed by pressing a touch switch In addition to fixed displays numeric keys and character keys can be set inside the window Since the win hen in z z cow Deeg oly be opened aren Functions relating to the system put is required the screen can be used effectively System functions Numeric value character System settings and maintenance can be performed by selecting
182. be notified to the PC This means that in the case of 1 in the table all the bits in the word will be set to the OFF status When using the host link or when using the NT link with the DM area the notification operation is different for the momentary type and the other types and they should not both be specified in the same word In the case of 3 and 4 notification has no effect on the other bits in the word 215 Lamps and Touch Switches Section 5 3 Possible bit allocations Notify bits and control bits for touch switches can be allocated to the areas of the PC memory listed in the following table C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since all the CVM1 CV series special auxiliary relays are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for applications not related to the system The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appen dix L PC Memory Map page 327 When making a data memory DM specification specify the bit number 00 to 15 following the word number 5 3 4 Lit Flashing and Unlit Touch Switch Statuses Changing the Status of Allocated Bits This section describes how to change the statuses of allocated bits and thereby
183. be set in a screen and 1024 LAMPs can be regis tered in a screen data file Contents of the setting differs depending on the LAMP type Normal LAMP Image Library LAMP For the actual method used to modify a currently displayed lamp see Turning ON lit and OFF unlit the lamps Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits page 212 4 6 1 Normal LAMP Functions Normal LAMP is used to change the display state reverse reverse flashing erase of a graphic fixedly displayed according to an instruction ON OFF from the PC OFF state ON state Normal LAMP Attributes The following attributes can be set for the Normal LAMPs e Shape Any shape can be selected out of the following four kinds of shapes Size can be specified freely OS Oy Square Circle Polygon Fan 148 LAMP Section 4 6 e Frame Select whether or not the boundary line frame of the lamp display area is dis played If the frame is not set only the guide display message for the lamp is displayed when the lamp is not lit or flashing If the guide display message is not set nothing is displayed e Lit and flashing Select whether the lamp is lit reverse display or flashing reverse flashing when the lamp is turned ON by the PC e Color display NT620C only External frame color in case of color display 8 colors OFF color 8 colors or transparent Lit Flashing color 8 colors A part of external frame may be lost d
184. bit memory table and screen display function This paragraph describes the setting of the bit memory table For the display setting refer to NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 01 In order to set the message to continuous or duplicate screen only the first sub screen is effective In one alarm group the bit memory tables less than continuous 128 can be used and the state of up to 128 contacts can be monitored The smaller the bit memory table number the higher the order of priority a massage has The following settings are done to each bit memory table e Recording the alarm history Setting of whether or not a change of PC contact to which the bit memory table is assigned is recorded e Screen switchover function Setting of whether or not the screen switchover function is used e Character string memory table number Character string memory table number displayed as a message is set e Display color NT620C only Character color of a message is set Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 e Image library Code of image library data displayed together with a message is set e Screen switchover Screen number displayed by the alarm list and history display function is set e Contact Contact on the PC to which the bit memory table is assigned is set C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay T
185. ble operation panel is 1 6 mm to 4 8 mm All fittings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m in order to ensure water and dust resistance The panel must not be soiled or warped and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong 1 Open a hole shown below in the panel and install the NT620S 620C from the front side of the panel Be 0 5 mm 180 5 Omm l 263 5 8m 1 6 to 4 8 mm 2 Attach the panel fittings at four positions for the upper lower sides and at two positions for the right and left sides shown below on the rear side of the NT620S 620C Fit the hook of the fitting in the square hole in the body and tighten the screw with a Phillips head screwdriver while lightly pulling the fitting If there is no special need for dust and water resistance two fittings indi cated by are not required 26 Installation Section 2 2 2 2 2 Power Supply Connection Note Note Connect a 24 VDC power supply to the power input terminals Check the wiring carefully before turning on the power Do not connect an AC power supply to the power supply terminals Use a DC power supply with low voltage fluctuation If complying with EC directives low voltage directives observe the following points 1 Use a power supply with reinforced insulation to supply power to the PT 2 If using the EL display type e
186. bps Data length 7 bits Stop bit 2 bits Parity Even Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Number of units connected 1 to1 Transmission distance Max 15m Communications protocol For an NT Link C series SYSWAY 1 N Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Number of units connected 1to1 Transmission distance Max 15 m When NT AL001 used RS 232C cable Max 2 m RS 422A cable Total length 500 m For an NT Link 1 N RS 232C Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female Number of units connected 1 1 to8 Transmission distance e RS 232C cable e RS 422A 485 cable Max 2 m Total length 500 m 285 Specifications Appendix A When NT AL001 used For a Memory Link Item Specification Communications standard EIA RS 232C RS 422A Communication settings Start stop synchronization Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF RS CS can only be selected with RS 232C Connector 9 pin D SUB connector female 9 pin D SUB connector female NT620S NT620C Number of units connected 1 1 Transmission distance Max 15m RS 232C cable Max 15 m RS 422A cable Total l
187. by the settings for the temporary input field Character font scale display attribute smoothing character color back ground color Attributes determined by the settings for the actual input field on the base screen Numbers of integer and decimal fraction digits upper limit value lower limit value decimal hexadecimal zero suppress sign display The cursor frame of the temporary input field is always displayed 3 Input the numerical value or character string The method is the same as that normally used to input numerical values and character strings See En tering the Numeral Values page 164 or How to Enter the Character Strings page 169 The numerical value or character string is input into the temporary input field 4 The input numerical value of character string is written to the input field on the base screen on confirming it by pressing the ENT key or the return key E and the contents of the corresponding numeral character string memory table are changed accordingly notification to the PC also takes place at this time The cursor moves to the next input field on the base screen If the input value is outside the range delimited by the upper and lower limit values the original value is redisplayed Note also that if the actual input field on the base screen is changed before input is confirmed the input data will be destroyed The input data will also be destroyed if the window is closed or
188. can be entered in hexadecimal Range of numeral values Range of numeral values that can be entered is from 0 to FFFFFFFF 8 digit 158 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 e Attributes that can be set The attributes that can be set for numerical values displayed in input fields are the same as those for numeral displays See Numerals which can be Dis played page 135 Checking the Upper Lower Limit Caution When the upper limit and lower limit of the input numeral values have been set erroneous numeral values outside of the range can be prevented from being stored in the numeral memory table or notified to the host When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 4 8 2 Type of Numeral Setting Ten key Type Thumb Wheel Type There are two kinds of types of numeral setting ten key type and thumb wheel type Though basic functions are the same screen displaying and inputting methods differ between two types A maximum of 50 input fields combined total for both numeric key type and thumb wheel type can be registered on one screen When any numeral value is entered by the ten key character key assigned to the touch switch a numeral value just entered is displayed in a screen When the RETURN key is pressed after an input operation is completed the numeral value entered is written into the numeral memory table and then notified to
189. ch 23 Response 54 Restrictions when creating the thumb wheel type 167 Resume function 87 Reverse and flashing display 125 127 Reverse display 125 127 RS 232C adapter 320 RS 232C cable 29 RS 232C communication 244 246 RS 232C RS 422 converter unit 10 315 319 RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT AL001 35 44 RS 422A adapter 320 RS 422A cables 51 RS 422A communication 244 RS 485 cables 52 RUN LED 22 Run mode 58 S Scr list screen 116 Screen 120 Screen attributes 131 Screen changeover function Bit memory table 136 Screen data 283 Screen data memory 63 Screen display 129 235 Screen display timing 194 Screen No 0 121 Screen No 1980 through to 1979 121 Screen No 1997 95 121 Screen No 1998 95 121 Screen No 1999 121 Screen number range 1980 to 1996 121 Screen numbers 120 Screen print key function Touch switch 157 Screen printing 237 Screen printing function 89 Screen saver function 85 Screen switch setting 191 Screen switch strobe 190 192 195 240 Screen switching timing 192 Screen switchover return key 154 Screen to be displayed at the startup of the system 120 Scrolling keys shown in reverse video 179 Scrolling the message 179 Selecting the communication speed 73 Selecting the host communication method 70 Selecting the items 62 Sending error 272 Set Touch switches 214 Setting error 271 335 Index Setting status 111 S
190. ch notification operations are tabled below When using host link When using NT link DM area Type of notification operation When using NT link other than DM area 1 Notification in word units Momentary all other bits in the word 8 Notification in bit units are OFF 2 Notification in word units Alternate note that the word con tents are read on display 4 Notification in bit units and notification is based on these contents When using touch switch input notification note the following points In the case of 1 in the table the other bits in the same word are turned OFF by notification Press the touch switch Bit 15 14 134 1 0 Bit 15 14 tot 1 0 o 1 oli olo 110 Touch switch Bits other than notify notify bit bits are set to 0 OFF In the case of 2 in the table since notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the word before display the other bits in the word are not overwrit ten However if the contents of the word are changed at the PC during dis play they will be rewritten based on the contents before display If the screen is switched while a momentary key is pressed the touch switch itself will disappear and the OFF status will be notified to the PC This means that in the case of 1 in the table all the bits in the word will be set to the OFF status When using the host link or
191. check the settings Refer to Section 2 Hardware Settings and Connections Confirm that the information selected by the NT620S 620C touch switches has been set in the PC by displaying the contents of the words and bits using a pe ripheral tool LSS etc If the information sent from the NT620S 620C has not been correctly received by the PC check the screen data settings specifically the switch settings For the details of the screen data creation refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 80 Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 Various System Settings The NT620S 620C can set a variety of functions to the memory switches which are convenient during the operation This section describes the memory switch settings related to the operation environment The memory switches can also be set by selecting In Scr F8 on the File Selection screen of the support tool The settings made using the support tool are written to the NT620S NT620C on screen data registration For details refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L Since the memory switch data are backed up by the battery in the NT620S NT620C they are not cleared when the power is switched OFF Reference If the memory switch data is not backed up by the built in battery it will all be initialized to the values set with the support tool when the NT620S NT620C is switched OFF I
192. col ors Background color in a frame NT620C only 8 colors Separate background color can be specified for positive and negative value display area 145 Graphs Section 4 5 e Direction This attribute can select the direction of putting the referring Memory Table val ues in order Rightward Upward Leftward Downward Large number 100 100 gt 100 100 Small number 100 position is determined in accordance with the direction of putting the re ferring Numeral Memory Table values in order 100 position falls to the right when putting those values longitudinally in order and at the upper side when putting those laterally e Sign representation This attribute can specify whether or not a numeric value less than 0 value is displayed To display a value below 0 Sign display Yes The broke line graph is displayed in the range of 100 to 100 In this case 0 position of a graph falls the center of a graph display area lt 100 lt 0 gt Negative value is displayed EI lt 100 Not to display a value below 0 Sign display No The broken line graph is displayed in the range of 0 to 100 0 position is at the end of a graph All values less than 0 are displayed as 0 100 0 Negative value is not displayed f f e Number of apexes This specifies the number of Numeral Memory Tables to be referred to One
193. contrast when using the memory link the NT620S NT620C has an area in its memory called the PT memory and direct connection is executed with respect to this area treating it as though it were a memory area in a PC By issuing memory link commands when necessary the host can read and write the contents of the PT memory and the contents of NT620S NT620C memory tables Also when touch switches are pressed or numeric values or character strings are input at the NT620S NT620C side the NT620S NT620C issues a command to notify this input to the host PT memory Numeric value displays a Character displays 0000 RS 232C communication Lamps lt RS 422A communication Graphs lt lt Memory R W commands ouch switches lt Table operation commands Numeric value input Input notification EEE Character input commands Therefore memory link is virtual direct connection executed at the NT620S NT620C and controlled by commands from the host Memory link has the follow ing restrictions when compared with host link and NT link e The only area that can be used for allocation is the I O relay area word area The PT memory is a virtual PC area within the NT620S NT620C However there is no classification of the area as there is with real PC areas it consists of an I O relay area of just 10000 words from 0000 to 9999 Consequently only I O relay words can be designated as a
194. cted Unit No 5 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 6 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 7 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 0 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 1 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 2 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 3 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 4 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 5 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 6 Priority registration lamp ON when registered Unit No 7 Priority registration lamp ON when registered This is the port of the communication board 236 Continuous buzzer bit 13 short intermittent buzzer bit 12 and long intermit tent buzzer bit 9 The continuous buzzer sounds continuously without interruption The short intermittent buzzer sounds for 0 5 seconds at 0 5 second intervals The long intermittent buzzer sounds for 1 0 seconds at 1 0 second intervals If 1 ON is specified for more than one of the three buzzers at the same time the buzzers will sound in accordance with the following order of priority 1 Continuous buzzer 2 Intermittent buzzer short 3 Intermittent buzzer long NT620S 620C Status Control Section 5 7 Another way to stop a buzzer sounding is to use a touch switch to which t
195. d ON 1 3 NT620S 620C running low battery volt age is transmitted to DM0001 If PT operating status contact 11215 is turned ON 1 and battery con tact 11213 is turned OFF 0 4 NT620S 620C running normal battery voltage is transmitted to DM0001 SECTION 6 Using Memory Link This section gives an overview of memory link operations and contains explanations centered on communications between the NT620S NT620C and host when using the memory link 6 1 Operation of the Memory Link 0 0 eee eee 244 6 1 1 What is the Memory Link 00 02 eee 244 O 1 2 PA Memory tas esses conics soins 36 BA aE a R A sean had S EER SA 244 6 1 3 Memory Link Commands 0 0 ee eee 245 6 2 Outline of Communications 0 00 eect eee 246 6 2 1 Communication Protocol ss ss sss sers e ee cee eee 246 6 2 2 Notes on Using Commands 0 0 0 eee 247 6 3 Commands Responses 0 0c cent teen eens 249 243 Operation of the Memory Link Section 6 1 6 1 Operation of the Memory Link This section describes the function of the memory link 6 1 1 What is the Memory Link 6 1 2 PT Memory 244 The memory link is a new communication method which allows use of the direct connection function from a host with RS 232C or RS 422A communications In ordinary direct connection each of the display elements of the NT620S NT620C is allocated to the PC memory of the host In
196. d on the screen can easily display the System Menu For the relationship between the system key and the touch switch refer to the System key functions page 155 61 Operation Modes and the System Menu Section 3 3 Selecting the Menu Items System Menu Items Press touch a menu item on the screen to select the item Menu items allow to make the ON OFF selection or to call subsequent menu or screen Example 1 To call the Maintenance Mode Menu by pressing the Maintenance Mode on the System Menu screen SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History W O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J The System Menu items and the functions are as given below Menu Item Function Quit The System Menu screen is cleared and the NT620S 620C will return to the RUN mode Transmit Mode The Transmit Mode screen will be displayed to allow the trans mission of the screen data between the NT620S 620C and the support tool For the transmission of the screen data refer to Section 3 5 Registering the Screen Data page 77 Maintenance Mode The Maintenance Mode menu will be displayed to allow the maintenance of the NT620S 620C system Expansion Mode For future expansion Currently not used
197. data corruption during communication Check the contact allocation and the word settings If the influence of noise is deemed to be present separate the cable from the source of the noise and insert a noise filter in the power supply line When using in an environment with high levels of noise use a noise resistant cable for communications The influence of noise can be further reduced by using as short a cable as possible Power supply to the PC only is temporarily interrupted e g due to momentary power interruption Note Due to the power interruption information about multiple bits registered by the PT is erased After that if the PT sends a command to read the status of multiple bits error number 19 is returned from the PC If the PC power interruption is due to noise insert a noise filter in the PC s power line Unit No Error The unit No does not match that set on the PC Set the PC unit No to 0 The PC is transmitting incorrect data Check PC operation Noise caused data corruption during communication Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs in an environment with high levels of noise FCS Error Sumcheck Error 272 The PC is transmitting incorrect data Check PC operation Noise caused data corruption during communication Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs in an environment with high levels of noise Maintenance o
198. display history record data The display history record data can be read either in the maintenance mode or by using the support tool It is also possible to display this data by calling screen numbers 1997 and 1998 see page 120 e Numeral setting attribute Select whether the numeric keys or control keys are automatically displayed or the numeric keys are created at arbitrary positions on the numeral setting screen The following two numeral setting attributes are used System The numeric keys or control keys registered to the system are auto matically displayed User The numeric keys or control keys can be created at any arbitrary positions e Back col NT620C only Screens for which this attribute has been set are automatically displayed with the set background color extending over the entire screen 132 Memory Tables Section 4 4 4 4 Memory Tables The NT620S 620C has the character string memory table for the character data the numeral memory table for numeric data and the bit memory table for bit data which can be written and updated by the PC The contents of the memory tables can be set by using the support tool when displaying the memory tables on the screen or by editing the table 4 4 1 Character String Memory Table The character string memory table is an NT620S 620C internal memory used to store the character data Up to 1000 character string memory tables can be used and up to 20 ful
199. ditions Communication conditions are set when a support tool is started e Recommended connecting cables OMRON CV500 CN228 length 2 m 9 pin D SUB male 25 pin D SUB male OMRON XW2Z S001 conversion cable 25 pin D SUB female gt Half pitch 14 pin male Purchase the CV500 CN228 separately OMRON XW2Z S002 length 2 m 9 pin D SUB male lt gt 9 pin D SUB female For IBM PC AT or compatible com puters Reference To make a connector cable refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 29 Installing the System Program Section 2 4 2 4 Installing the System Program Reference Reference 30 With the NT620S 620C the system program is not fixed and different programs can be installed This makes it easy to change the system program when a new version becomes available or in order to respond to changes in system configu ration If the system program is erased it will be impossible to use the NT620S 620C Ensure that the system program and the system installer are on hand before erasing the system program Registered screen data and memory switches will however be saved When using the memory link install the system program for the memory link The following software is used for system installation NT620S NT620C system installer Applicable Model Personal Computer Communic
200. dix G Connector Specifications and Wiring for OMRON Units The combination of pin numbers to which the connecting wires are connected differs according to the connector specifications for each unit Check the connector specifications of the unit to be connected and make the wiring connections for the items in the connection combination indicated below which are applicable NT620S 620C Connector Specifications 9 pin Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to NT620S 620C Signal Connector Pin No Signal Name Abbreviation Direction Input Output Send data O Receive data Request to send Clear to send 5V 150 mA max Signal ground Z Caution Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 150 mA before using the 5 V output of pin No 6 The 5 V output of NT620S NT620C delivers 5 V 5 and 150 mA maximum Do not use the 5 V output of the RS 232C interface unit Connecting an NT620S 620C to a C Series Host Link e C Series host link unit 25 pin connector specifications Applicable host link unit C200H LK201 V1 C500 LK201 V1 C500 LK203 C120 LK201 V1 Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC 1 E Signal Name Direction Input Output A Frame ground
201. dual tables is delimited by commas S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added e Reads the data from the specified number of numeral memory tables starting from the specified numeral memory table A maximum of 100 tables can be read at one time e In the response the data of a maximum of 20 tables can be returned at one time If reading of more than 20 tables is specified multiple responses are made each comprising the data of 20 tables Note that the first word number read in the second and later responses will be the word number of the first word of the response data Character string memory table read command Sent from host to PT Command ESC R S m ty to t3 t4 1B 52 53 k k k k k k k k k CR oD N n n N na rar rt m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present 8 Absent only 1 table read 9 Present only 1 table read t to ty First character string memory table number read 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0999 l4 lo Number of read tables 2 BCD digits 01 to20 1 to 20 When m is 8 or 9 omit this setting S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits When m is 0 or 8 omit this setting 252 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Response ESC R S ty to t3 t4 dt dio 1B 52 53 k k k k k k k k k k k k k k dn dno S4 S2 CR k
202. e PC and to write it to the memory table in the NT620S 620C Also the data input on the NT620S 620C can be written to the PC s memory area The NT620S 620C screen status can be switched according to the PC s memory area and the NT620S 620C s status data can be written to the PC s memory area NT620S 620C DM area Internal relay area m gt m gt lt L__ L__ Auxiliary relay area Timer counter Features of the Direct Connection Function e The bits and words referring to operating status and work instruction informa tion and those for storing input data can be freely allocated to almost any part of the PC memory Bits and words in the PC can be referenced from any memory table e The NT620S 620C can directly refer to PC bit and word data so that it can be connected to a PC without changing the PC program which controls currently running production line e The area used for control and notification of NT620S 620C statuses including displayed screens whether the screen display is on or off buzzer output etc can be freely allocated to any part of the PC memory The direct connection function allows the NT620S 620C to directly read and write almost all bits and words in the PC and to automatically change the NT620S 620C screen display This function can reduce the load on the PC so that the program development efficiency of the PC improves 11 Communic
203. e area in the PC e Important points concerning numeral memory tables used for the clock func tion Numeral memory tables 247 through 253 store clock data which is updated by the internal clock of the NT620S 620C This data cannot be rewritten by the PC Numeral memory tables 247 through 253 are exclusively for display read only Do not attempt to write data to them by using numeral settings or by co pying between memory tables Do not allocate the numeral memory tables to which the clock function is as signed numbers 247 to 255 to PC words Example of Reading the Time Set for the NT620S 620C This is the procedure for reading the time hour minute set for the NT620S 620C e Settings with the support tool The following settings are made using the support tool PT status control area CHO0100 Numeral memory table No 258 DM0000 one registered word Numeral memory table No 259 DM0001 one registered word 233 NT620S 620C Status Control Section 5 7 e PC program Create the PC program in the way shown below 00000 MOV 21 1258 102 MOV 21 0248 101 Tmooo 0010 MOV 21 1259 102 MOV 21 0249 101 e Program operation When the program is executed the operation is as follows 1 When bit 00000 comes ON the contents minute of numeral memory table 248 which is used for reading the clock function are cop
204. e control panel Dimensions 110 4 33 l i 74 5 2 93 j 0 16 100 2 3 94 30 i i 1 18 105 4 13 less than p p s 1 77 _ Units mm inch With RS 422A terminal block cover closed 30 W x 114 H x 100 2 D mm With RS 422A terminal block cover open 30 W x 114 H x 119 5 D mm Installation and Removal The RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT ALO01 is installed on a DIN rail or in an operation panel The RS 422 terminal block of the converter unit can easily be removed Installation on a DIN Rail Hook the top part of the rear of the converter unit a in the figure onto the top edge of the DIN rail and push the unit in direction b Then fit end plates on the right and left sides of the converter unit so that the unit cannot shift sideways 291 Handling the RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit Appendix C Removal from the DIN Rail Remove the end plates at right and left then insert a flat tipped screwdriver into the rail stopper on the bottom of the unit and pry the unit away Installation in an Operation Panel Make two screw holes in an operation panel wall at least 2 mm thick and secure the converter to the wall with screws Units mm inch Note In order to ensure a strong installation the wall of the operation panel must be at least 2 mm thick 292 Appendix D NT
205. e numbers When writing the number of the memory table whose contents are to be dis played to the numeral memory table to be referenced in indirect specification Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 always specify this number in BCD format Also make sure that you do not specify a number outside the range of memory table numbers that actually ex ist for example by specifying O500 when the number of character string memory tables is set to 256 If the contents of the memory table used for indirect specification are written in hexadecimal format or if the specified memory table number is outside the available range the display will not be updated Important points when writing character strings The important points when displaying character strings are the same as those that apply for indirect specification See the Important points when writing character strings when using direct specification page 204 Example of Changing a Character String in Indirect Specification An example in which the character strings being displayed are changed by ad ding the contents of the word allocated to the numeral memory table which is used in indirect specification is given below Setting by the support tool Perform the following setting with the support tool Numeral memory table number 51 DM0000 registration word 1 Character string memory table number 100 NT612G 6 digits Character string memory table number 101 NT61
206. e of cable RS 422A or RS 485 as shown below RS 422A Cables When using RS 422A cables note the following points The wiring method for RS 422A cables is different for the connection closest to the PC than for other connections Follow the instructions below in order to complete the wiring correctly Always set a terminal resistor terminator at both ends of the RS 422A cable Do not set terminal resistors at any other positions When equipment has functional ground terminals always connect the shielding of the RS 422A cable to these terminals Always use an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit NT ALO01 to make a con nection between an NT620S NT620C and an RS 422A cable The actual wiring and settings depend on the system configuration as shown below When the PC is RS 232C PC RS 232C Same settings for same equipment RS 232C cable RS 422A Terminal NT RS 422A cable 1 RS 422A cable 2 cable 2 resistor set AL001 ana No terminal NT Terminal NT resistor AL001 resistor set AL001 RS 232C RS 232C cable cable NT620S NT620S NT620C NT620C When the PC is RS 422A Terminal resistor set PC RS 422A Same settings for same equipment RS 422A RS 422A cable 1 RS 422A cable 2 cable 2 No terminal NT Terminal NT resistor ALO01 resis
207. e panel must not be soiled or warped and must be able to support an installation that will remain secure and strong During work at the panel take care to ensure that no metal scraps enter the unit Otherwise the product may malfunction After connecting the communication cable be sure to lock the connectors with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail e The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail e Do not install the NT620S NT620C at sites subject to the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction Severe temperature variations Temperatures or humidities outside the ranges stated in the specifications High humidity condensation Splashing chemical agents Severe oil splashing Corrosive or flammable gases Strong vibrations or shocks Direct exposure to wind and rain outdoor sites Strong ultra violet irradiation e Take adequate measures to ensure shielding if the NT620S NT620C is used at a location subject to any of the following conditions Otherwise the product may malfunction xiii Safety Precautions xiv Static electricity or noise from other equipment Strong electromagnetic fields Nearby power cables Potential exposure to radioactivity e Carry out grounding correctly in order to prevent misoperation due to noise e When installing the PT in the operation
208. e screen printing func tion The NT620S 620C will continue operating even when such a hard copy is being printed However since the screen print function shares the NT620S 620C memory with the pop up window function page 171 hard copies cannot be printed while a pop up window is displayed For printer connection refer to Section 2 9 Connecting a Printer page 55 Printing Screens Screen printing can be performed by using a touch switch for which screen print ing interruption function is set or by giving a screen printing command from the PC Using the touch switch When creating screen data with the support tool set the screen printing func tion to a touch switch For details refer to NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L Pressing the touch switch so set as to start hard copy printing prints a hard copy of the screen displayed To interrupt the printing press the touch switch to which hard copy printing interruption is set Giving instruction from the PC Set up a PT status control area PC PT and then start printing the screen For details refer to Section 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 However printing of screen hard copies may not be interrupted from the PC Setting Screen Printing Set the type of the printer and a way of printing in the Memory Switch The factory setting is not fixed 89 Various System Settings Section 3 8 90 Screen printing by usi
209. e the NT link communications The settings at the PC are the same regardless of whether the connection at the NT620S NT620C is an RS 232C type or RS 422A type The following is a brief description of the setting method e C series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 When connecting an NT620S NT620C and a C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 or CQM1 CPU unit set the communication conditions in the PC system setting area Write the settings directly from the peripheral tool e g SYSMAC support tool to the PC system setting area data memory The switch settings made to enable PC system setting are described here For details on PC system setting area operations refer to the manual for the PC you are using page 19 Switch settings C200HX HG HE CQM1 DIP switch settings RS 232C port communication condition settings Set DIP switch 5 to OFF right side to enable the PC system settings 9G F amp TNO o e 0 e e e ON OFF PC system setting area settings C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 In accordance with the CPU unit and port used for connection to the NT620S NT620C write the appropriate numerical value to the PC system setting area data memory PC side Channel Writing Value Settings RS 232C port of DM6645 4000 NT link 1 1 is C200HX HG HE CQM1 used Port A of C200HX HG HE DM6655 Port B of C200HX HG HE DM6550 CPM1 DM6650 45
210. ease decrease by 1 Each time or key is touched the nu meric value just changed is notified to the PC It is not necessary to press the RETURN key unlike the ten key type Thumb wheel numeric value setting Numeral Memory Table 11213 1234 GI E T gt 2234 H A G E amp Numeric value increases by 1 A numeric value cannot be entered into the thumb wheel type from the ten key e Changing signs In case of sign display setting the sign is specified by touching the key of the digit for which the sign is displayed and the sign by touching the key e Checking the upper lower limits Upper lower limits are checked when pressing the increment decrement keys If it is found that an input numeral value is in excess of the limit as a result of checking the contents of the numeral memory table previous value before pressing the increment decrement keys is displayed again but this is not notified to the Host However with thumbwheel type numeral setting if the situation is such that with an upper limit of 1n n and a lower limit of Om m where n and m are the values of each digit n n lt m m it is not possible to carry digits upward or downward Example
211. eck sum e The checksum of the command response is the lower one byte of the total sum in units of bytes of the following from the ESC code at the beginning to the character immediately before the checksum value Reference If ON is set for the Automatic Reset memory switch communication errors are not displayed on the screen even if they occur with the exception of overflow errors If an overflow error occurs an error message is displayed on the screen and operation is stopped 6 3 Commands Responses This section describes the commands used with the memory link and their re sponses PT memory read command Sent from host to PT Command ESC R M m Cy Co C3 C4 1B 52 4D kK k k k k k k k k k l4 l2 s1 s2 CR 5 k k k k k k k k oD 5 m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present 8 Absent 1 word read 9 Present 1 word read C4 tO C4 First word number read 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 l4 lo Number of read words 2 BCD digits 00 100 words 01 to 99 1 to 99 words When m is 8 or 9 omit this setting S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits When m is 0 or 8 omit this setting 249 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Response ESC R M Cy Co C3 C4 l4 lo 1B 52 4D k k k k k k k k k k k k k Data of 1 word Data of 1 word dl 5 k Example 250
212. ect Memory Switches Set the communication conditions by pressing the touch switches to the right of each menu item To set and quit the menu press Quit The final settings made will be set and the screen will return to the maintenance mode menu Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6 3 6 Registering the Screen Data The screen data is created by using the support tool and registered to the NT620S 620C screen data memory This section describes the procedure to register the screen data to the NT620S 620C For the screen data creation and the support tool operation refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L Transmission Transmission in File Units The NT620S 620C uses several screens which are switched on its display The screen data of one NT620S 620C unit corresponds to the files created by using the support tool Select a file which contains the screen data to be transmitted when selecting the screen data to be transmitted to the NT620S 620C so that the required screen data can be transmitted to the NT620S 620C Screen data file NT620S 620C Screen 1 Screen 1 Screen 2 gt Screen 2 All screen data are Screen N transmitted by one operation Screen N Memory table Memory table Mark data Mark data System memory System memory Cait Eh Ss Sle Geka ee Ses yy Bh Sea eal Direct connection i
213. ed Hewlett Packard printers that conform to the PCL5 standard can be used Specify this for a printer such as the EPSON ESC P Printer 24 pin that conforms to the printer control standard ESC P Hard copies will be made in colors Specify this for a printer such as the EPSON ESC P Printer 24 pin that conforms to the printer control standard ESC P Hard copies will be made in mono chrome with colors expressed by gray scale levels A printer that emulates NEC s PC PR201H can be used Hard copies will be made in colors A printer that emulates NEC s PC PR201H can be used Hard copies will be made in monochrome with colors expressed by gray scale levels Hewlett Packard printers that conform to the PCL5 standard can be used Hard copies will be made in monochrome with colors expressed by gray scale levels 91 System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 System Maintenance The NT620S 620C has self maintenance functions such as display history re cording I O check and PT setting display These functions are accessible mainly from the Maintenance Mode 3 9 1 Using the Display History Recording Function The display history recording function is used to record the display sequence and frequency of screens during operation The data recorded can be displayed and confirmed on the system screen Recording Display History Display history is recorded in the following procedure Setting screen attributes To c
214. ed If the most significant digit is F when decimal with signs has been set the numeral is handled as a negative number The maximum number of digits of the negative number becomes smaller than that of the positive number by 1 digit Reference If the number of digits of a numeral is greater than the total of the settings for the number of digits of the integral portion and the number of digits of the deci mal portion an error will be generated and x symbols will be displayed at all digits If the number of display digits is not 4 and x symbols are displayed check that the number of words in the numeral memory table is 1 The actual display will vary according to the zero suppress setting and deci mal fraction setting as well as the contents mentioned above Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 02 Contents of the character string memory table A character string is stored in the allocated words beginning with the first word in half size or normal size characters 202 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 Two half size characters or two normal size character is stored in one word One memory table can store up to 20 words 40 characters Start Start 1 Start 19 i ee e e ea oe ee pes ee Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 4 Code39 Code40 1 pe STi TS a Se i Sey a a i ER es pe TP O ae Le CAER Character string memory table display example To d
215. ed Select the communication conditions from the following in accordance with the host used Setting Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Data bit length 7 8 bits Stop bit length 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF Response No Yes Sets whether or not a response is re turned even when a command from the host is processed correctly See page 248 75 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 76 Set the memory link communication conditions by following the menu operation from the System Menu described below SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Host Link Speed 2400 bps Key Press Sound OFF Data Bit Length 8 bits a Buzzer Sound OFF Stop Bit Length 1 bit Screen Saver None J Parity Bit Odd Resume Function OFF Flow ControlRS CS Printer ESC P TONE Response Always e Host Link Speed 2400 4800 9600 19200 e Data Bit Length 7 bits 8 bits e Stop Bit Length 1 bit 2 bits e Parity Bit None Odd Even Flow Control None XON XOFF RS CS e Response Always No Select Maintenance Mode Sel
216. eee 275 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 0 0 eet nea cc eet eee 278 267 Hardware Faults Section 7 1 7 1 N Caution NT620S 620C Symptoms Hardware Faults When a fault relating to the operation of the NT620S 620C occurs find the symp toms in the table below and respond by following the corresponding Remedy indicated in the table Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting Other wise the system may operate unpredictably Do not disassemble the NT620S 620C for repairs or modification Otherwise the product may malfunction Cause Remedy POWER LED fails to come ON Power is not being supplied Check the connections and make sure that power is supplied correctly Refer to 2 2 2 Power Supply Connection page 27 Power supply fuse has blown Contact your OMRON service center Nothing is displayed on the screen it is completely white LCD or black EL Screen No 0 has been read at the PC side This is not an error Change the screen number Refer to 4 3 Screen Display page129 Communication with the support tool not possible The Transmit Mode has not been established Display the system menu and select the Transmit Mode Refer to 3 6 Registering the Screen Data page 77 Not connected to the support tool Check the installation of the connector cable Refer to 2 3 Connecting to the Support
217. een 2 If an attempt is made to open a window that has not been registered no window is opened if a window is currently open it will be closed It is not possible to open more than one window at the same time If multiple child screens are registered for an overlapping screen only the first child screen will be applicable On switching to another screen an open window will be automatically closed Reference When creating a screen with the support tool it is possible to specify a window to be displayed when the screen is displayed an initial window by using the win dow display function of the input setting function Opening Windows with the Cursor Moving Keys It is possible to set a window key open function for the cursor moving keys used for numeral character string setting in addition to their cursor moving function Doing this makes it possible to specify an input field and also display the window to be used in a one touch operation If another window is open when the cursor moving key is pressed that window is closed first before the specified window is opened the cursor also moves to the 174 Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 Touch switch for which cursor moving and window opening functions have been set specified input field If the specified window is already open the cursor moves to the relevant input field but nothing else happens
218. een by using indirect specification NT620S 620C Allocated word Numeral memory numeral memory table 20 table 20 DMo0000 abed l gt 0051 ___ 0 0 5 1 A Indirect specification Allocated word Character string character string memory table 51 memory table 51 DM0100 198 abcd lt _ 16 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 This specification method is a little complex but it allows the display to be changed more easily according to the circumstances In the example above if 1 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 were added to the contents of memory table 20 to give 52 the contents of memory table 52 would be displayed instead The memory tables used for display can also be allocated to areas in the PC so that the display can also be changed in response to changes in the data to be displayed i e the contents of character string memory table 51 in the example above However in comparison with direct specification indirect specification requires more time for processing Setting the Words of the Character String Memory Table When creating the screen data by using the support tool make the following set tings for each numbered character string e Initialization setting Set whether or not the PC words are initialized with the character string memory table initial value registered to the screen data memo
219. een is 30 to the left and 30 to the right Install it at a position and height where operators will be able to see it well Install the unit as far as possible from personal computers amateur radio equipment radios etc The radio waves generated by the unit may cause interference that will affect these types of equipment 293 Appendix E Transporting and Storing the NT620S NT620C Pack the NT620S NT620C in the packaging intended for it before transporting it Store the NT620S NT620C in a location that meets the following conditions Ambient temperature 20 to 70 C NT620S 20 to 60 C NT620C Ambient humidity 35 to 85 RH 295 Appendix F NT620S NT620C Internal Processing The following processing is executed inside the NT620S 620C Processing is divided into two types periodic pro cessing and incidental processing Periodic Processing The following processing is executed inside the NT620S 620C to enable high speed control from the PC Usually the only data read from the PC are the elements used for the currently displayed screen Even if the con tents of the PC words allocated to memory tables are changed these contents are not updated at the PT unless the memory table is used for the displayed screen However the bit memory tables that can be used with Ver 3 and later versions of the direct connection function can be set to be read continually NT620S 620C PT processing PT power ON
220. eens However it is assumed that the screen switch over return key has been set to all screens to be returned 4 7 3 Input Key Function This is a function that allows touch switches to be used for input and is mainly used when using numeral character string setting functions Input keys are clas sified into the following three types Character keys Used to input character strings when using a character string setting function For details see 4 9 Character String Setting page 168 Window keys Used to open and close windows when using the pop up window function Also used to switch between key boards when using character string setting functions For details see 4 9 Character String Setting page 168 or 4 10 Pop Up Window Function page 171 Control keys Used for functions provided by the system such as the numeric key function used with numeral setting functions the system key functions provided with previous PT mod els and special control functions For details see the next section Functions of Control Keys Functions of Control Keys Key Function 0to9 Ato F Used to input numerical values CLR Clears input numerical values and character strings Assigns the opposite sign to input numerical values Used to input a decimal point 155 Touch Switches Section 4 7 Used to move to the input field at the top left of the screen Used to move to the next input field Conf
221. em Maintenance Section 3 9 Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Por en eee Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J lect Battery I O CHECK MENU Select Battery Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED Pa BATTERY CHECK Select Battery Battery Normal 104 System Maintenance Section 3 9 e After checking the screen message press the End touch switch The I O CHECK MENU will be redisplayed Checking the NT620S DIP Switch Settings Display the NT620S 620C DIP switch settings by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Selec Check Quit Display History VO Check _ PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch lect DIP Switch I O CHECK MENU Select DIP Switc Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED
222. emory table No 101 Copy source word MOV 21 2 0004 Copy type copy destination memory table No 102 Copy destination word MOV 21 0011 Copy source memory table No 101 Copy source word e Program operation 1 When an error occurs bit 09000 turns ON the NT620S 620C displays the message Error 2 When the error is cleared bit 09000 turns OFF the NT620S 620C display message reverts to Normal 5 2 5 Upgrading Graphs Changing the Contents of Allocated Words The following describes the procedure to upgrade the graph on the NT620S 620C by changing the contents of the allocated words To change the graph display on the NT620S 620C change the contents of the PC words to which the numeral memory tables have been allocated The graph display cannot use hexadecimal numbers If hexadecimal numbers are set the graph will not be displayed By writing a negative number whose most significant digit is F to the allocated word of a graph set as Sign display No the graph display will become 0 and the display will show x gt For the procedure to write numeral values to the allocated words of the numeral memory tables refer to Allocation Words and Display of the Memory Tables page 201 For the procedure to change the contents of the numeral memory table PC words refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Character strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words
223. en is read and written to the currently displayed screen word in the PT status notify area In this case the NT620S 620C will not write the same screen twice 5 1 5 Switching the Screen Display by Using the Allocated Bit of a Bit Memory Table This section describes the actual procedure used to perform screen switching under the control of the PC by using bit memory tables This function continually reads the allocated bits of the screen switching function regardless of which screen is currently displayed Consequently if the number of screens that could be switched to with this function is large PT operations such as updating of memory tables touch switch response lamp response may be delayed One of two methods can be used to switch the screen display registering a screen number for a touch switch and pressing the touch switch during opera tion or writing the screen number into the PT status control area For details on these methods see Stand Alone Functions page 154 or Switching the Screen Display by Using the PT Status Control Area page 191 193 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 To switch the screen displayed on the screen of the NT620S 620C under the con trol of the PC the allocated bit of the bit memory table in which the screen number of the screen to be displayed is registered is set to 1 ON NT620S 620C Be Allocated bit bit table 1 Screen No 42 Screen No
224. en numeral input has occurred When character string input has occurred e Note also that the PT status notify command is not issued when the screen switching strobe the numeral setting strobe or the character string setting strobe changes to ON or OFF Example e Command ESC P M 0 1 0 0 0 3 1B 53 53 30 31 30 30 30 33 0 0 3 1 0 0 0 0 30 30 33 31 30 30 30 30 9 0 0 0 2 9 CR 39 30 30 30 32 39 oD 5 5 First word number of PT status notify area No 100 Number of words in PT status notify area 2 BCD digits 3CH Contents of the PT status notify area hexadecimal 0031 word 100 screen No being displayed 0000 word 101 No of memory table whose contents have changed 9000 word 102 PT status 263 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Check sum hexadecimal 29 From the fact that bit 15 PT operating status and bit 12 screen switching strobe of the PT status have come ON it is ascertained that the screen has switched and from the screen No being displayed it is ascertained that screen No 31 is being displayed for details on the PT status notify area see page 189 Re send request command Sent from host to PT Command Response ESC R R m s1 s2 CR 1B 52 52 S ai ati oD m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits If m is 0 omit this set
225. ength 500 m An RS232C RS422 converter unit is required 286 Appendix B Dimensions Body NT620S ST211 B lt 6 0 24 275 71 10 83 2 80 Unit mm inch 287 Dimensions Appendix B Body NT620C ST141 B lt 6 0 24 275 76 8 10 83 3 02 Unit mm inch 288 Dimensions Appendix B e Cable connection dimensions common to NT620S and NT620C 32 96 3 78 i 1 26 P 24VDC GR 91 3 58 kiele 46 1 81 RS 232C cable Printer RS 232C cable cable Unit mm inch e Dimensions for Installation NT620S NT620C A a Wan _etataion A Installation panel _spe Sige LE fixture 38 1 5 max Unit mm inch 289 Appendix C Handling the RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit This section shows the dimensions of the RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT ALO01 and describes the meth ods for installing and removing it Refer to this information when designing th
226. epending on a combination of external frame color of the normal LAMP and OFF color or ON Flashing color This is caused by the properties of the color LCD and does not indicate failure of equipment When part of the external frame is lost change a combination of colors e Guide display message Lamps can be displayed with the guide display messages The guide display message attributes are the same as that for the character display Refer to Characters and Figures which can be Displayed page 134 e When a memory table display is overlapped with a normal lamp The guide display character of the normal LAMP is a fixed character string In order to change the guide display of the normal LAMP according to the circum stances display the display area of the Numeral Memory Table or Character String Memory Table in conjunction with illumination of LAMP However de pending on a timing of ON of normal LAMP and Memory Table update the re sult of indication differs as shown in the examples below Be careful when creating a control program Example 1 When the normal LAMP is turned on after updating the Memory Table LAMP OFF LAMP OFF LAMP ON Memory Table LAMP ON update The characters LAMP Character String Memory are displayed in white against Table display area dark background 149 LAMP Example 2 When the Memory Table is updated while norm
227. er is very helpful in switching the screen being displayed to a desired one from the host or in specifying the screen to be displayed at the startup of the system ini tial display screen Screens No 0 and No 1997 through No 1999 are kept for the following special purposes Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Note Screen No 0 Screen No 0 is reserved with the system as the no display screen Select this screen when there is no need to display data on the screen Screen No 1997 Screen No 1997 is reserved with the system as the screen for History record in order of occurrence Select this screen to display screen data in order of occurrence available only with direct connection Screen No 1998 Screen No 1998 is reserved with the system as the screen for History record in order of frequency Select this screen to display screen data in order of frequency Screen No 1999 Screen No 1999 can be defined as the Connecting to host screen Without registering this screen a screen with the message Connecting To Host au tomatically appears when the power is turned on or the mode is shifted to operation The screens numbered 1900 through 1979 can be used as window screens for pop up windows If you do not want to use them as window screens they can be used as ordinary screens Screens No 1980 through No 1996 are intended to be used for extension func tions If they are used
228. er string setting input column is specified to be ready for an input operation before a character string is entered by the character key e Specifying the character string setting input column to be entered The character string setting input column to be entered is specified by either ten key system key or touch switch cursor moving key The frame cursor around the specified character string setting input column and the cursor attributes can be specified Concrete specifying method is the same as numeral setting Refer to the Specifying the Numeral Setting Input Column to be Entered page 162 The window opening function can be set for cursor moving keys For details see 4 10 Pop Up Window Function page 171 e Entering the character string The character strings are displayed in the input column of the character string setting in due order of the touch switches being pressed A character is in serted at an input cursor position At this time the keyboard screen can also be switched over halfway When entering the character strings the following control keys of the touch switches can be used Control Key Function CA Used to cancel character string entry 169 Character String Setting Section 4 9 Used to delete a character just before an input cursor Used to delete a character at an input cursor Used to move an input cursor to the left by one character Used to move an input curs
229. er the numeral values on the screen The numeral setting allows the numeral value to be entered directly from the touch switch into the numeral memory table to be displayed in the screen and further to be sent to the PC The following is a guide to the numeral setting function a guide to the method for creating the numeric keys required for numeral settings on the screen and an explanation of how to use numeric keys during operations Numeral setting screens cannot be registered as child screens of continuous screens In the case of overlapping screens only one screen can be set as a numeral set ting screen In order to input numerical values using touch switches apart from the display area for the numeral setting the numeric keys must also be created For details on how to create numeric keys see Notification of Numbers to the PC page 220 Ensure the safety of the system before changing the monitor data 157 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 For the actual method used to notify the PC of input numerical values see Notifi cation of Numbers to the PC page 220 The numeral setting is carried out when a screen is created with the support tool 4 8 1 Numeral Setting Functions The numeral setting has the following functions Basic Operation The numeral setting operation is as follows 1 A numeral value is entered from the touch panel 2 The numeral value entered is displayed in the numeral setting area in a
230. er to Making the Cable page 310 of the appendix NT ALO01 RS 422A terminal block specifications e Connected terminal block RS 422A terminal block M3 screws e Electrical characteristics Conform to EIA RS 422A e Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the NT ALOO1 Terminal Signal Direction Block Pin Signal Name Abbreviation No Input Output 8 Request to send A Request to send B Receive data A Receive data B Send data A Send data B Signal ground Functional ground The CSA and CSB signals are for special applications Terminal Screws and Crimp Terminals The terminal screws are M3 screws Use M3 size crimp terminals Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of 0 4 N m Note During wiring crimp terminals must be used for connections Recommended crimp terminals Fork type Round type Doo 6 2mmorless 6 2 mm or es O Maker Type Recommended Wire Size Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 1 25 N3A fork AWG22 to 18 0 3 to 0 75 mm Molex Y1 25 3 5L fork 50 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 Wiring Method and Settings Relating to Wiring The wiring method for the connections between the PC and NT620S NT620C units and the settings of each piece of equipment related to wiring are described here The wiring method and settings to be made depend on the typ
231. es Ses es 225 5 5 1 Allocated Bits of Bit Memory Tables 0 00 00 00 eee eee eee 225 5 5 2 Displaying Alarm Lists by Using Bit Memory Table Allocation 226 5 6 Glock FUNCHON j s hice cS e sass hued Beas dae een asia eee ese ate aes 229 5 6 1 About the Clock Function 0 0 ee eee 229 5 6 2 Date and Time Display 00 eee cee 229 5 6 3 Date and Time Setting 0 ec ce ee 230 5 6 4 Notification of the Date and Time to the PC 0 0005 233 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control 0 0 eee eens 234 5 7 1 Controllable NT620S 620C Functions 0 0 02 eee eee ee 235 5 7 2 How to Control NT620S 620C Functions 0 00 0c eee eee eee 237 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC NT620S 620C Operating Status 0 ee eee ee 239 5 8 1 Ascertainable NT620S 620C Statuses Notified Operating Statuses 0 0 ee eee eee 240 5 8 2 Reading the NT620S 620C Operating Statuses 0005 241 185 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 5 1 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation This section explains the fundamentals when using the host link NT link allo cated bits and words and the method for control of the NT620S 620C and notifi cation to the PC and also describes the actual procedure used for screen switch ing 5 1 1 Equipment and Settings Used in This Chapter The following equipment and settings
232. es occur simultaneously the proces sing is executed in accordance with the order of priority NT620S 620C processing High Writing to the PT status notify area A gt Bit writ E it writing a 5 D 5 Writing to numeral memory tables y Low Writing to character string memory tables PT gt PC PT gt PC PT gt PC PT gt PC Details of processing Writing to the PT status notify area in order to inform the PC of changes in the PT operating status Writing to bits in order to inform the PC that a touch switch has been pressed Changing the contents of words allocated to the PC when the value in a numeral memory table has changed Changing the contents of words allocated to the PC when the value in a numeral memory table has changed Data is only written to PC bits and numeral character string memory tables for elements in screens currently being displayed If the contents of numeral character string memory tables that are not being displayed change the changed contents are not written to the PC 299 Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Explained below is the method for making the cable that connects the NT620S 620C and the PC Connect the wires to the connectors in accordance with the connector specification for each unit Parts Required Two connectors two connector covers and one cable are required to make up a connecting cable
233. es other than system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 Clock Function Section 5 6 Procedure 1 Date and Time Setting Example Allocate the two memory tables that are to be the copy source for the setting to areas in the PC Two words must be allocated for each table Next at the PC specify the date and time that are to be set in numeral memory tables 254 and 255 in these allocated words Copy the settings from the copy source numeral memory tables to numeral memory tables 254 and 255 For the method for copying memory tables see Copying the Memory Table page 208 Important points concerning the numeral memory tables used for the clock function Do not allocate the numeral memory tables to which the clock function is as signed numbers 247 to 255 to PC words Numeral memory tables 247 through 253 are exclusively for display read only Do not attempt to write data to them by using numeral settings or by co pying between memory tables Numeral memory tables 254 and 255 are exclusively for time setting write only Do not use them for numeral displays or graph displays Initial values set with the support tool are invalid in the case of numeral memory tables 247 through 255 The following is an example of setting the date and time from the PC In this example a C200H type C200H CPU11 21 22 23 31 which has a time functio
234. et Select the communica tion conditions from the following in accordance with the host used see page 75 Setting Data bit length 7 8 bits Stop bit 1 2 bits Parity None even odd Baud rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 bps Flow control None RS CS XON XOFF Response No Yes Connecting a Printer Section 2 9 2 8 1 Connection Method 2 8 2 Host Settings Make the connection cable by referring to the description of the RS 232C type or RS 422A type host link method and the connector specifications for the host to be connected If the host is an IBM PC AT or compatible and the connection is RS 232C the support tool connection cable can be used without alteration For details on cables refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Con nection to the PC page 301 Set the same communication conditions at the host as were set at the NT620S NT620C For details on the setting method refer to the instruction manual for the host used 2 9 Connecting a Printer Hard copies of screens can be printed printing of screen images onto a printer connected to the NT620S 620C In order to make a hard copy at a printer connected to the NT620S 620C it is necessary either to create a screen print key as a touch switch on the screen to be printed during screen creation or to issue a print instruction from the PC For details see 4 7 Touch Switches
235. etting the support tool 114 Setting the words for the character string memory tables 199 Setting the words for the numeral memory tables 201 Setting unit numbers 74 Short intermittent sound 117 Smoothing 125 Sound the buzzer 83 Spare PT 273 Special characters 329 Special features 284 Specifications 281 Specifying the numeral setting input column 162 Square 126 Stand alone functions 154 Standard equivalent to IP65 4 Starting 58 Stop bit 54 Storing 295 Straight lines 126 Support tool 3 77 98 SW1 23 SW2 23 Switch character strings according to the situation 208 Switch over the screen 154 Switching the continuous screen 131 Switching the screen display 191 193 Switching to the RUN mode 80 System Numeral setting attribute 131 160 System installer 17 30 70 320 System menu 58 System program 270 System program transfer 30 T Temporary input fields 175 Ten key 160 Ten key type 159 162 Terminal resistor 51 Thumb wheel type 159 166 167 Tiling pattern 126 To stop the buzzer sound 83 336 Tool I F 98 Tool settings 114 Touch switch Screen printing function 89 Touch switch input notify command sent from PT to host 259 Touch switches 14 151 214 Touch switches Displaying the system menu 61 Touch switches to display the system menu 61 Transmission 77 Transmit mode 59 62 78 119 Transmitting screen data 114 119 Transparent displ
236. f the NT620S 620C Section 7 3 7 3 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C WARNING Carry out maintenance work in order to ensure that the NT620S 620C is always used in its optimum condition Do not disassemble the unit or touch parts inside while the power in ON You could sustain an electric shock e Spare PT It is advisable to have a spare NT620S 620C available to minimize system downtime in the event of an NT620S 620C failure or if the screen display be comes difficult to read due to deterioration of the display unit 7 3 1 Replacing the Backlight When the backlight in the display is getting dim and the screen cannot be read easily replace the backlight The backlight can be replaced at the rear of the NT620C while it is mounted in an operation panel Reference There is no backlight in the NT620S Backlight Replacing Method WARNING Operation e Replaceable backlight model NT620C CFLO1 e Guide to backlight replacement Under normal conditions it can be assumed that the backlight will need to re placed after about 20 000 hours However the life of the backlight does vary in accordance with the environment in which it is used and it should be replaced when it is getting dim and the screen is getting hard to read Follow the procedure below to replace the backlight Turn the backlight off before replacing it Otherwise you could sustain an electric shock 1 Turn off the power to the NT620C and remove the l
237. f the message Battery Lowered is displayed while the NT620S 620C is oper ating replace the built in battery immediately For details on how to replace the battery see Replacing the Battery page 275 3 8 1 Setting the Key Press Sound Whether or not the key press sound is given when the NT620S 620C touch switch is pressed can be set with the memory switch The factory setting is not fixed 81 Various System Settings Section 3 8 Set the key press sound by the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History J I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch JOS Each time the Key Press MEMORY SWITCH MENU Sound touch switch is STI gt l pressed the setting option Quit f Comm Method Host Link ON alternates with OFF Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps Buzzer Sound ON fe N Screen Saver None Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU e ON The key press sound will be given for 0 2 second
238. for negative numbers can be set To set a negative value for the upper or lower limit value set F for the eighth digit Example If the upper limit value or lower limit value is 123 FO000123 e Display attribute The same attributes as the numeral display are set For details refer to the Numerals which can be Displayed page 135 Restrictions and Additions when Creating the Thumb Wheel Type For numeral setting for thumb wheel type there are the following restrictions and additions when setting the items e Number of digits of positive numbers to be entered with a sign displayed For the thumb wheel type with a sign displayed the number of digits of the pos itive numbers to be entered is also a maximum of 7 digit e Display size There are only three kinds of size that can be specified Size is specified by the touch switch size of the increment decrement keys Display size is se lected out of three size minimum unit of touch switch NT620S 20 dots by 25 dots NT620C 20 dots by 20 dots 1 x 1 small 2 x 2 medium 3 x 3 large Entire size of the numeral setting input column is specified by the touch switch size just specified e Shape end plate Either of the two kinds of shape as shown below can be set Decoration end plate at both ends of the numeral setting input column differs lt With end plate gt lt Without end late gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
239. from system string setting function menus displayed on the screen Touch switch keys can be assigned Creation of screen data numeric values or character strings Screen data created by using a support tool on a personal computer can be so that these values and character transferred and stored to the image data memory installed to the strings may be input at the operation NT620S 620C site or even written onto the numer Syst installati f ti ic character string table and sent to ystem program instalation tunction the host By using the optional system installer the NT620S NT620C system program can be changed Functions of NT620S 620C Section 1 2 1 2 4 Displays Characters fixed characters Characters The NT620S 620C can display various kinds of elements such as characters numeric value lamps touch switches and bar graphs on a screen The screen data displayed on the NT620S 620C are created by using support tools on a character string memory table Bar graph gt 0 Production qty 137 units 20 computer Touch Eeo y switches o stop Restart gt Machine name NT620S ST211 lt Numeric value Numeral table 50 100 Stage 1 gt Stage 2 gt Stage 3 Lamps Characters fixed characters Marks and image data which do not need to be changed can be written direct
240. from the host and as the response the NT620S NT620C sends a reply indicating whether or not writing was completed normally It is possible to omit the response when writing is successful There are the following six commands e PT memory write command Page 253 e Numeral memory table write command Page 255 e Character string memory table write command Page 256 e PT memory batch write FILL command Page 257 e Numeral memory table clear command Page 257 e Character string memory table clear command Page 258 245 Outline of Communications Section 6 2 Notify commands Re send command 6 2 6 2 1 These commands serve to notify the host of the results of operation at the NT620S NT620C Only these commands are issued by the NT620S NT620C and therefore there is no response for them The following four switches are available e Touch switch input notify command Page 259 e Numerical input notify command Page 260 e Character string input notify command Page 261 e PT status notify command Page 262 This command lets the NT620S NT620C re send a notify command It is issued from the host and the notify command issued last is re sent from the NT620S NT620C e Re send request command Page 264 Outline of Communications This section describes the basic communication protocol when using memory link and the program flow for using memory link taking RS 232C communica tions using the BASIC language as an example Communicatio
241. g page 168 Make sure that the touch switches and numbers set in the normal screens do not overlap in an overlapping screen If the set positions of the touch switches and or numbers in the normal screens overlap with each other such settings may some times not be effective as intended Use the support tool and make sure that the set positions do not overlap with each other A group of normal screens which are related in series and can be switched con secutively is called the continuous screens Up to eight screens can be regis tered to one screen as a group of continuous screens The base screen used for registering the continuous screens is called a parent screen and the registered continuous screens are called child screens The current screen number and the total number of continuous screens can be displayed in the top right corner of the screen This is called the page number display The page number is set when creating the screen data by using the support tool Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L With the child screens of continuous screens all display elements except nu meral setting and character string setting can be used The parent screen is used to register the child screens and so display elements cannot be registered The screen attributes set in the parent screen become effective in the continuous screens Example continuous sc
242. g a screen attribute so that the specific function can be executed by displaying the screen For exam ple by displaying a screen to which a buzzer attribute has been set the buzzer of the NT620S 620C starts sounding Screens attributes are set for each screen on the Screen List screen Note that the support tool displays the Alarm attribute but this attribute cannot be used with the NT620S NT620C The following several attributes can be set with one screen e Buzzer attribute This attribute will become effective to sound the buzzer in the NT620S 620C when the screen to which this attribute has been set is displayed The buzzer sound can be set as follows No Buzzer does not sound when the screen is displayed Continuous sound Buzzer sounds continuously Short Buzzer sounds intermittently at 0 5 second intervals Long Buzzer sounds intermittently at 1 0 second intervals The buzzer sound is set with the NT620S 620C memory switch The buzzer can also be set by using the PC Refer to Using the buzzer page 83 for the buzzer setting using the memory switch 131 Screen Display Section 4 3 To stop the buzzer by using the screen operation create a E control key as a touch switch e History attribute When a screen for which this attribute is set is displayed the screen number of the displayed screen the day minute and second of display the number of dis play events and a message is recorded as
243. g expansion I O equipment 23 Host I F tool connector 23 Host link 9 Host link method 32 Host link unit 32 36 317 Host settings 55 T O check 96 T O relay 244 Image data 134 Image library 137 Image library Alarm list 178 Image library lamp 151 Image library data corresponding to alarm messages 226 Important points concerning numeral memory tables used for the clock function 231 233 Important points relating to notification operations Touch switch 215 Important points when writing a character string 204 Important points when writing memory table numbers 206 In order of frequency Alarm history 183 In order of frequency Display history recording 92 In Scr Support tool 69 Indirect specification 198 200 205 Initial operation of the input keys 164 Initialization error 271 Initialization of the display history data memory 67 Initialization of the memory tables 65 Initialization of the screen data 63 Initialization setting 199 201 Initialize the screen data memory 65 Initializing 63 Initializing memory 63 Input key function Touch switches 155 Inspection method 278 Installation 25 Installation and removal NT ALO01 291 Installation environment 293 Installation to the operation panel 25 Integer part 164 Intermittent buzzer long 236 Intermittent buzzer short 236 Internal processing 297 K Key press sound 81 Keyboard 155 L LAMP 148 21
244. ght screens can be overlapped to form one overlapping screen The base screen used for making an overlapping screen is called a parent screen and a bunch of screens which are laid over the parent screen are called child screens With the child screens of an overlapping screen all display elements can be reg istered The parent screen is used to register the child screens and so display elements cannot be registered The screen attributes such as a buzzer attribute set in the parent screen become effective in an overlapping screen Example overlapping screen Screen No 10 1 This is an Screen No 8 Screen No 7 This isan lt 2 overlapping overlapping screen Screen No 25 screen 129 Screen Display Section 4 3 Continuous Screens 130 Parent screen No 8 Child screens No 10 No 7 and No 25 When screen No 8 is designated screen No 8 becomes the parent screen and the child screens No 10 No 7 and No 25 are displayed over the parent screen in that order Only one numeral setting screen or character string setting screen screens which allow numeral and character string input on the NT620S NT620C screen can be registered as a child screen For details on numeral settings see Section 4 8 Numeral Setting page 157 and for details on character string settings see Section 4 9 Character String Settin
245. gs of NT model memory size direct connection etc are made in this 115 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 screen Refer to Setting the support tool for use with the NT620S 620C on the previous page 4 Select Edit Screen File List NT610G V3 0 1024KB File Selection FileName Title 1 10 Pabe raue NEW_FILE Creation of New File R CR For Line Input Process control backup Esc Exit to Main Menu Production Qty Check SAMPLE INPT_SCR For Line Input PROCE Process control backup PROC_C Production Qty Check PROC_CTL For process Help Message NT6106 Ver 3 0 Direct OMRO Mum Mem Tabls 1000 Str Mem Tabls 1000 AC func No 0 00KB il Copy WeletesPrint MloolS BHi st a Tm D Rov gin Sori itle i Next Select a file used for storing the screen data for the NT620S 620C in the File List screen To create a new file select NEW FILE To edit an existing file select a file to edit Select NEW FILE and press Enter Enter filename on completion of creation Select Screen Creation NEW_FILE Ser list NT610G 3 0 1024KB Screen Selection No Status Comment Papal Paue 5 Help Message tat Speci fied Page Seace Mark Unmark Homelrmark All ShsidMark Unmark Al _sc Select File Hist OO AME Ong il Copy WeletasPrint attr ibik Read Blomnnigents glo Ov Mark U Next Select a screen number to edit in the se
246. h Direction of increase gt e Sampling period Sampling period is the time interval applied when the NT610C samples and displays the Numeral Memory Table value and is specified in the range of 1 to 65535 in increments of 0 1 second Reference Actual drawing timing varies depending on the operating conditions This does not accurately coincide with the time interval specified e Data value The same is also true as the bar graph Refer to page 139 e Graph line type This attribute specifies a graph line type among those as shown below A graph width is fixed at one dot Line color can be selected out of eight colors Solid line Brokenline 1 dot chain line 2 dot chain line 143 Graphs Section 4 5 e representation The same is also true as the bar graph Refer to page 139 e Differences when a trend graph is displayed using percentage values When value is in the following range the graph displaying method is re stricted as follows 1 In case of negative value A graph is displayed differently depending on the sign representation Without sign representation Displayed in the same manner as 0 With sign representation A graph is displayed in the negative direction 2 When an absolute value of is from 100 to 999 A graph is not displayed in this range of Only a part of value within the graph frame is displayed A value is displayed as it is 10
247. hat of the other switches DoS The touch switch is normal if it is highlighted while pressed NT620C A checking screen which shows switches of 24 rows and 32 column will be displayed 4 This touch switch is to exit the touch switch checking screen Its color is differ ent from that of the other switches C C The touch switch is normal if it is highlighted while pressed e Press a touch switch on the screen If the touch switch is highlighted while it is pressed the touch switch is normally functioning e After the check is completed press the touch switch in the upper right corner The screen will return to the I O CHECK MENU Reference If memory switch setting for the key press sound has been made for ON the key press sound will be made when a touch switch is pressed The number of pressed touch switch will not be notified to the PC Checking the Communications with the Support Tool Execute a NT620S 620C to support tool communication check by the menu op eration from the System Menu as shown below The NT620S 620C uses one connector for connection to both the support tool and the PC If it is connected to other equipment remove the connecting cable from the connector and connect the cable to the connector for the support tool Then
248. he buzzer stop attribute function is allocated Whether or not the buzzer actually sounds also depends on the setting of the buzzer memory switch of the NT620S 620C For details on this setting see Using the buzzer page 83 In addition to PT status bit operations the buzzer status can also be controlled by using screen attributes The screen attributes are set with the support tool Buzzer attribute Set whether the screen will sound or not when a screen is displayed and if it sounds the type of buzzer Display history initialization bit 11 Display history initialization initializes the display history in the NT620S 620C When bit 11 is switched from 0 OFF to 1 ON the display history in the NT620S 620C is initialized After initialization it returns to the 0 OFF status Screen printing bit 7 Hard copies of the screen can be made by connecting a printer to the NT620S 620C When bit 7 is set from 0 OFF to 1 ON printing of the screen displayed at that time starts Note that it is not possible to stop printing part way through Start printing after confirming that bit 7 printer operating status of the PT sta tus notification area is in the O OFF status When printing starts and bit 7 of the PT status notification area has been set to the 1 ON status the screen printing bit is returned to O OFF Window opening bit 6 It is po
249. he NT620S NT620C units when necessary C200H HG HE can be used RS 232C cable max length 2 m or directly connected RS 232C RS 422 RS 232C RS 422 RS 422A 485 cable converter unit converter unit type NT ALOO1 type NT ALOO1 RS 422A 485 cable RS 232C RS 422 converter unit type NT ALOO1 RS 232C cable RS 232C cable Not required if the max length 2 m max length 2 m connection is made at the RS 422A 485 port of the communication board NT620S NT620C NT620S NT620C Up to eight NT620S NT620C units can be connected Total cable length 500 m Maximum Number of NT620S NT620Cs Connectable to One Port The maximum numbers of NT620S NT620C units that can be connected to the built in RS 232C port of the CPU and ports A and B of the communication board respectively are as follows e C200HE Up to 4 NT620S NT620C units per port unit Nos 0 to 3 e C200HG C200HX Up to 8 NT620S NT620C units per port unit Nos 0 to 7 Reference When connecting the C200HX HG HE and an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or higher Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected 49 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 Converter Unit Connector Specifications The terminal block specifications of the RS 232C RS 422 converter unit are indi cated here For details on the method for making the connection cable ref
250. he resume function resume function page 87 If Effective is set for the Resume Function memory switch the initial values set with the support tool will not be reflected in the present values of the memory tables unless the memory tables are initialized 65 Initializing Memory Section 3 4 66 Reference If Ineffective is set for the Resume Function memory switch the memory tables can be initialized just by switching the NT620S NT620C power off and back on again or by resetting it Using the System Menu initialize the memory tables by following the procedure given below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Init Memory MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History I O Check J PT Settings Init Memory _ Memory Switch Select Memory Table INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU Quit Screen Memory Memory Table History Initializing Memory Section 3 4 Select Yes Initialize Memory Table The memory table is initial Yes ized No If No is selected instead of Yes the NT620S 620C returns to the INI TIALIZE MEMORY MENU without initializing the memory Upon completion of memory table initialization the NT620S NT620C returns
251. he support tool e Currently displayed screen refer to page 195 The screen number displayed on the NT620S 620C is written to this word Simultaneously the PT status screen switch strobe flag is set to ON 1 After this is notified to the PC this flag reverts to OFF 0 Checking the status of this flag will provide a simple method of checking if the NT620S 620C display has switched Content upgrade memory table refer to page 220 The number of the numeral or character string table is written to the word when the numeral or character string memory table contents change due to the touch switch operation on the NT620S 620C The contents of the word to which the numeral or character string table has been allocated also change 189 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 As the number of the numeral table is written the PT status numeral or charac ter string setting strobe flag is simultaneously set ON 1 After this is notified to the PC this flag reverts to OFF 0 Checking the status of this flag will provide a simple method of checking if a number or character string has been input from the NT620S 620C e PT status notify bits refer to page 240 The NT620S 620C operation status and other information are written with the ON or OFF of the bits as shown below 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 Bit 0 0 0 he ee if Controlled item 1 ON 0 OFF
252. hen creating a screen with the sup port tool 168 Character String Setting Section 4 9 4 9 1 Functions of Character String Setting The character string setting has the following functions The NT610C operates the character string setting as follows 1 The touch switches character key are previously set by the support tool 2 When the character key NT620S in an example in the figure is pressed a guide character of the character key NT620S in the example in the figure is entered in the character string setting input column 3 When the Enter amp key is pressed the character string of the character string input column is written into the character string memory table and si multaneously notified to the PC Character string setting input column i gnp NT620S 620C Y Write RETURN Notify NT620S gt Tos _ __ PC Display Enter Character string memory table NT620S NT620C NT610C Reference By using the pop up window function see page 1771 it is possible to select and open a number of windows keypads each of which comprises a number of character keys thus allowing various types of input Input to character string setting input fields can be disabled by a system control PT status control area operation How to Enter the Character Strings Reference An appropriate charact
253. hen multiple contacts become 1 ON the bit memory table with smaller table number is displayed preferentially When multiple messages can be displayed the messages of higher priority smaller bit memory table number will be displayed earlier The display column of message and the image library displayed correspond ingly are referred to as Alarm Group collectively The NT620S 620C can dis play up to four individual alarm group in one screen and simultaneously show up to the following messages in one alarm group NT620S Max 16 pcs NT620C Max 24 pcs Alarm List amp History Display Functions Section 4 11 Example Message character string No 32 set to bit memory table number 14 Character String Table No 50 he NO 13 Contact PC Character String Table No 32 Image Library FE52 POP SER od Jo A000000 Character String Table No 32 Character String Table No 32 NO 14 lt lt Image Library FE68 Sate 1 ON Hoe Library Character String Table No 54 NO 15 Sores n Image Library FD34 ma When the message displayed is pressed the image library FE68 set to the bit memory table number 14 is displayed II Now when the contact A000000 turns ON Message character string 50 set to bit memory table number 13 Character String Table No 50 NO 13 Contac
254. hen the ST211 is pressed NT620S ST211 e Character string setting NT620S NT620C sT211 STI ST211B ST141B Tg PEERS a ee ho Character keys Finally when the Enter f key is pressed the NT620S ST211 being dis played in the input column of the character string setting is confirmed and written into the character string memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 4 10 Pop up Window Function The NT620S NT620C features the pop up window function which is used to dis play windows overlaying the currently displayed screen base screen These windows can be opened whenever required by pressing touch switches The pop up window function can only be used with Ver 3 and later versions of the direct connection function Reference When using NT612G NT610C the windows can only be used as keyboards The opening of windows can be disabled by a system control PT status control area operation 171 Pop up Window Function 4 10 1 Functions of Pop Up Windows The functions of pop up windows are described below What is a Window A window is a screen that can be displayed overlaying a currently displayed screen the base screen Its size and display position can be changed without Section 4 10 restriction Windows are mainly used for the following applicati
255. his is notified to the PC e Available allocation words The PT status notify area PT to PC can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status notify area PT to PC to the PC memory 2 Create a PC program to read the currently displayed screen word in the PT status notify area when the screen switch strobe flag in the PT status notify area has turned ON The contents of the currently displayed screen word are updated also by switching the screen by pressing a touch switch on the NT620S 620C 196 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 For this function refer to the Stand Alone Function page 154 or Switching the Screen Display by Using the Allocated Bit of a Bit Memory Table page 193 e Continuous screens and overlapping screens When a continuous or overlapping screen is displayed the number of the par ent screen
256. ible to use the character keys of the input key function to create nu meric keys with one byte characters 0 to 9 and A to F 160 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Reference Even when the Numeral Setting of the screen attribute is User the same ten key as the System attribute can be displayed When the User Ten Key of the Input Setting is specified to create data for the Numeral Setting screen the following ten key is displayed Tank A Tank B vel 0000 0000 L Tank C Tank D ol 0000 0000 Tank E Tank F 0000 0000 1JeJsJ45J e Jefe Jo ps 161 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Allocation of Ten key Ten key can be allocated to the touch switches Specify the numeric keys to be allocated to touch switches when creating the touch switches For numeral settings the following numeric keys system keys can be used For creation of the touch switch refer to the 4 7 Touch Switches page 151 Ten key system key t Ten key Ten key 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MENU means the system menu display When any touch switch allocated to the ten key and system key in the numeral setting screen is pressed it will not be notified to the PC 4 8 4 How to Use Ten Key Type In order to enter the numeral values using the ten key type the numeral setting input column subject to entry is specified to be ready for input operat
257. ic value data hexadecimal 30000 Check sum hexadecimal 05 Here it is ascertained that 30000 has been input to numeral memory table No 150 whether this is 30000 in hexadecimal or 30000 in BCD is determined on the ba sis of the input conditions Character string input notify command Sent from PT to host Command ESC S S t to is t4 d dto 1B 53 53 k k k k k k k k k k X o k k k dn dno S4 S2 CR k k wo k k k k k oD t to ty Input character string memory table number 4 BCD digits 261 Commands Responses Section 6 3 0000 to 0255 This is the number of the character string memory table for which there has been character string input dl d1o zus dn dno Contents of the read character string memory tables 2 digits hexadecimal corresponding to 1 to 40 char acters 00 to FF In the case of character string memory tables allo cated to the host this is the registered number of words multiplied by 2 and the case of character string memory tables not allocated to the host it is data for 40 characters S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added Response None e In accordance with operations at the PT such as character string settings and copying of character string memory tables notifies the host that a character string has been input to the character string memory table
258. ics Conform to EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the NT AL001 Signal Signal Name Abbreviation Direction Input Output Connector Pin No Connector Grounding or earth for safety cover purposes 2 Send data Receive data Request to send Clear to send 5V input Signal ground NT AL001 RS 422A terminal block specifications Connected terminal block RS 422A terminal block M3 screws Electrical characteristics Conform to EIA RS 422A Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the NT ALO01 Signal Signal Name Abbreviation Direction Input Output Terminal Block Pin No Request to send A Request to send B Receive data A Receive data B Send data A Send data B Signal ground NIO AJ AJOINI Functional ground Note The CSB and CSA signals are for special applications 308 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G Wiring For NT620S NT620C NT620S NT620C RS 232C Abbrev Pin No SD RD sl Rs 232C RS interface CS 5V SG oJI NIoD A AJOIN 9 pin NT AL001 Host RS 422A Pin No Abbrev Abbrev
259. id of the CFL case located at the upper right part of the rear of the NT620C remove the screw with a Philips head screwdriver then open the CFL case lid Pull the side of the CFL lid that had the screw in it toward you and pull it out at an angle CFL case lid Screw securing CFL case lid a mi T T 273 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C Section 7 3 274 2 While lightly pressing down on the projection on the upper part of the back light connector pull the connector toward you to remove it from the NT620C body While doing this be careful not to put excessive strain on the backlight cord Remove the screws that secure the backlight with a Philips head screwdriv er grip the handle and pull the backlight out note that the screws are de signed not to come out of the backlight As shown in the figure below the backlight can be removed easily if it is pulled straight out to begin with and then at a downward angle Screw Backlight handle Screw Removing the Backlight View from side Insert the new backlight Reversing the action in step 3 push the backlight in at an angle to start with then when it contacts something solid continue by pushing it in straight Now make sure that the positions of the screws that secure the backlight coincide with the positions of the screw holes in the top of the NT620C PCB The backlight has been inserted correctly if it fits snugly in
260. ied to numeral memory table 258 2 After waiting about a second for the memory table copy operation in step 1 to be completed copy the contents of numeral memory table 249 hour which used for reading the clock function into numeral memory table 259 The hour and minute set in the NT620S 620C are stored in DM0000 and DM0001 which are the words allocated to numeral memory tables 258 and 259 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control In order to control the status of the NT30 30C from the PC the PT status control bits in the PT status control area are used The statuses of the NT620S 620C can be controlled from the PC by writing con trol data to the PT status control bits of the PT status control area allocated in the PC memory NT620S 620C PC Y 4 Screen off PC NA PT status control area Screen switch setting Buzzer sounds Copy memory table setting T status control bits 4 lt Control data 234 NT620S 620C Status Control Section 5 7 5 7 1 Controllable NT620S 620C Functions Word n 3 PT status control bits of the PT status control area 1514131211109 8765 43 21 OBit T PT status control bits 0 0 0j0 0 oO PT status control designation 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 Bit Reference 0 0 A A A A A A A l Controlled Item 1 ON 0 OFF Screen display Performed Not performed
261. ielding _ wire 7 eels ee eee eel i 20 ER 25 pin connector Communication port 2 9 pin Connector NT620S 620C PC host link unit Abbreviation ERNA sine Abbreviation Seer a EG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS neice interface cs 5 5 cs 5V 6 6 7 7 CD 8 SG 9 9 SG 9 pin connector Shielding wire 306 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G Connecting an NT620S NT620C to a C Series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 or CVM1 CV Series EV_ CPU Including Communication Board e C series C200HS C200HX HG HE CPM1 CQM1 CVM1 CVM1 CV series EV unit 9 pin connector specifications CPU Applicable CPU units CPM1 10CDR LJ CQM1 CPU21 E CV500 CPU01 EV1 C200HS CPU21 E C200HE CPU32 E CPM1 20CDR L CQM1 CPU41 E CV1000 CPU01 EV1 C200HS CPU23 E C200HE CPU42 E CPM1 30CDR L CQM1 CPU42 E CV2000 CPU01 EV1 C200HS CPU31 E CQM1 CPU43 E CQM1 CPU44 E CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV C200HS CPU33 E C200HG CPU33 E C200HG CPU43 E C200HG CPU53 E C200HG CPU63 E C200HX CPU34 E C200HX CPU44 E C200HX CPU54 E C200HX CPU64 E cannot be used Note The host link function incorporated in CV CVM1 CPUs with the exception of EV Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC 1 6 l S
262. ies PC a T 9 pin connector E Host I F connector 9 pin connector RS 232C 9 pin type S RS 232C connector cable The following are the recommended cables Connector Specification Model Cable Length SJ46006 102 1m J46006 202 2m 9 pin to 9 pin Z Caution After connecting the communication cable be sure to lock the connectors with the screws Otherwise the cable may disconnect causing operation to fail The cable s tensile load is 30 N Do not subject it to loads greater than this Otherwise a discontinuity may occur causing operation to fail If a Cable Longer Than 5 m is Required If a cable longer than 5 m is required a connector cable will have to be made Refer to Appendix G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC page 301 The maximum transmission distance is 15 m When Long Distance Transmission is Required When transmission over a distance exceeding the RS 232C specification is re quired it can be achieved by using an RS 232C RS 422A converter unit type NT AL001 to switch to RS 422A communication RS 485 communication can not be used For details refer to Appendix Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit page 315 of the appendix 44 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 1 Section 2 6 2 6 3 PC Switch Settings When the NT620S 620C and PC are connected to each other set the conditions at the PC CPU so as to enabl
263. ignal RE Seer Signal Name Abbreviation Direction A j Input Output 3 2 a Frame ground o S 2 Send data LAA Receive data 5 9 Request to send Clear to send Signal ground e Wiring connections The NT620S 620C does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure NT620S 620C PC host link unit Abbreviation RI PUN ii Abbreviation 1 Te SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 4 4 RS dacs interface cs 5 5 CS 5V 6 7 8 SG 9 9 SG 9 pin connector Shielding wire 307 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G Connecting an NT620S NT620C to an RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit NT AL001 Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit allows transmissions over distances greater than 15 m maxi mum of 500 m NT ALOO1 NT620S NT620C Host RS 232C RS 422A Max 2m Max 500 m Reference When connecting a C200HX HG HE and an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit use a converter unit whose lot number is 15Y5 or higher Converter units of lot numbers previous to 15Y5 cannot be connected NT AL001 RS 232C Connector Specifications 9 pin Type Electrical characterist
264. imer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG The Auxiliary Relay area of CVM1 CV series PC is used exclusively for special application in the system and cannot be used for other application When Data Memory DM is specified the bit number 00 to 15 is specified following the channel number Example of setting No Host Table Dsp CI Aa SwScreen Bit Comment 000 No No 001 No No 002 Ys No 999 Red FD20 2000 eia 000000 003 Ys No 123 Blue FD21 1234 AR 000000 004 No No 124 Whit FD22 1235 LR 001003 005 No No 125 Whit FD23 1236 LR 001004 006 No No 007 No No In this example four contacts of CH000000 AR000000 LR001003 LR001004 are monitored using four bit memory tables of bit memory table numbers 002 to 005 4 11 2 Displaying the Alarm History Alarm History always monitors the state of contact that has the Record setting in the item Recording the alarm history of the bit memory table and records the date and time when the contact turns 1 ON The contacts recorded in the alarm history are always monitored irrespective of the display screen of the NT620S 620C If the number of contacts are increased excessively the processing speed of the NT620S 620C may become slower Alarm history is common to all bit memory tables Unlike the message display it cannot deal with only
265. imum of 8 registered screens can be displayed sequentially by scrolling The screen can be scrolled by E keys Window screen For input setting numeric keys character keys maximum of 50 set tings Window screens use screen numbers 1900 to 1979 Display history screen Order of occurrence max 1023 screens order of frequency max 255 times Screen attribute Buzzer display history numeral setting display Background colors NT620C only Number of screens Max number of registered screens 2000 screens Screen number 0 No display 1 to 2000 User registered screens However 1997 screen is a display history occurrence order screen 1998 screen is a display history frequency order screen 1999 screen is a host con necting screen Screen registration method By transferring a screen data created using the support tool to the NT620S 620C Screen saving method screen data memory Flash memory storing format unique to NT620S 620C 1 The total number of display elements for numeral display graphs and numeral settings must be 1024 or less Display Element Specifications Item Specifications Display characters Half size characters 8 x 8 dots Alphanumerics and symbols Normal size characters 8 x 16 dots Albhanumerics and symbols Mark 16 x 16 dots User defined pictographs 32 x 32 dots 64 x 64 dots Image data NT620S 8 x 8 to 640 x 400 dots NT620
266. ing Screen for the screen attribute is set to System the order of movement using the system keys ff and can also be changed For details refer to NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 e Specifying the column using the cursor moving key With the cursor moving key of the touch switch being set the numeral setting input column can be specified only by touching the key 1234 1234 Position to Pressed EEA be entered is moved Numeral setting d i 5678 gt 5678 cursor moving key 9012 lt Position to 9012 be entered Reference When using Ver 2 L of the NT series support tool cursor moving keys can be automatically created as touch switches associated with the input fields when numeral setting input fields are created The pop up window function open can also be assigned to the cursor mov ing keys if the keys are created automatically this function can be set by modi fication 163 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Entering the Numeral Values 164 The numeral values are entered using the ten key numeric 0 to 9 A to F deci mal point sign clear CLR RETURN amp keys The numeral values can be entered in the same manner as a general electric calculator as follows e Entering the integer part and decimal fraction
267. ing memory tables and initial values can be set when creating the screen data During operation automatic updating is performed to ensure that the currently displayed NT620S 620C character string memory table contents and PC word contents always match each other There are two methods for referencing character string memory tables used for character string display as follows Direct specification Indirect specification Reference Only direct specification can be used as the reference method for character string memory tables used for character string settings e Direct specification Direct specification is a method of specification in which the contents of dis played memory tables are directly correlated with the contents of the allocated words NT620S 620C Allocated word abcd eae psa gt abcd e gt 6 1 6 2 Character string character string memory table 51 memory table 51 DM0100 Direct 6 3 6 4 specification e Indirect specification In indirect specification even if the displayed data is a character string the dis play is correlated with a numeral memory table The contents numerical val ue of this numeral memory table are regarded as a character string memory table number and the contents of the table with this number are displayed A combined total 50 of numeral displays and character string displays can be specified on one scr
268. inters and personal computers can be connected to each NT620S NT620C NT series support tool Used to create screens for NT620S NT620C at a personal computer and transfer them to the NT620S NT620C and to make NT620S NT620C settings The personal computer and NT620S NT620C are connected only when necessary NT620S NT620C system installer Used to change the NT620S NT620C system program The personal computer and NT620S NT620C are connected only when necessary Communication Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 1 4 Communication Using the Direct Connection Function 1 4 1 Direct Connection Function The communication method applied between the NT620S 620C and the PC is either a host link or NT link The NT620S 620C can be used to refer to the contents necessary for the display information or to allocate the bits and words used for storing the input data to any area inthe PC The NT620S 620C can directly write and read such allocated bits and words so as to change the display elements control the operating status and notify the status This function is called the direct connection function The NT620S 620C is de signed exclusively for use with the direct connection The bits and words allocated by the direct connection function are called allo cated bit and allocated word respectively This function allows to read the information to be displayed on the NT620S 620C from the memory area in th
269. ion before entering the numeral values using the ten key Specifying the Numeral Setting Input Column to be Entered The numeral setting input column to be entered is specified by either ten key system key or touch switch cursor moving key The frame cursor around the specified numeral setting input column and the cursor attributes can be specified e Specifying the column using the ten key The numeral setting input column is specified with the HOME 5 8 0 keys out of the ten keys A cursor can be moved between the numeral setting input columns by these keys as shown below gt 6563 gt 3200 HOME 7 4568 0000 ae lt lt 5107 lt 4624 When the HOME key is pressed the cursor can be moved at a stretch to an area at the upper left corner where a sum of XY coordinates is at a minimum the numeral setting input column at the upper left in the example above 162 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 e Specifying the column using the system key When the system keys and of the touch panel a cursor can be moved in the order that the numeral setting input column is created by the support tool For example when three numeral setting input columns are created a cursor can be moved in due order as follows f key First Second Third First key First Third Second First When the Numeral Sett
270. irms character input without shifting to another input field Stops the buzzer Screen switching of continuous screens shifting to input fields System menu display Used to cancel input Cancel Deletes the numeral or character immediately preceding the input cursor Deletes the numeral or character at the input cursor location Used to shift the input cursor Confirms input of a character after confirmation the cursor shifts to the next input field Alarm list history display page scrolling Alarm list history line scrolling 4 7 4 COPY Key Function Table input column are copied into other Memory Table or the numeral charac ter string setting input column Refer to 4 8 Numeral Setting and 4 9 Charac ter String Setting The COPY key is useful to set the numeral character string display to its initial state and to enter the same value initial value etc into the multiple numeral character string setting input column X COPY key Counter 00000 E a T E EN nN Numeric Value Memory Table Roge 00000 lt Y 00000 12345 Copied 67890 a lt Example that the COPY key is used as a RESET key for the counter gt Copy source Memory Table or code and copy destination Memory Table or nu meral character string setting input column are specified 156 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 4
271. is is an EL screen in the case of an is in RUN mode NT620S and an STN color LCD screen e When the battery is low it with backlight in the case of an NT620C is lit in orange or red red The whole area of the screen is a touch in the RUN mode and panel which works as an input device orange in other modes Reference The NT620S 620C comes in two body colors NT620S NT620C Body Color NT620S ST211 E NT620C ST141 E Beige NT620S ST211B E NT620C ST141B E Black 22 Description of Parts and Settings Section 2 1 Rear View Warning label NT620C only are installed underneath this lid DIP switch SW2 Set various system statuses with these switches Lid of CFL case The backlight unit and battery Contrast control NT620C only Use a fine flat blade screwdriver Turn clockwise to increase the brightness Expansion I O connector under the label A When connecting expansion I O equipment remove the label to expose the 24VDC G EL expansion I O connector Holes for mounting Lee expansion I O equipment GR terminal Grounding terminal to prevent electric shock Host I F tool connector or support tool here Power input terminals Connect the power to the NT620S 620C at these termina
272. isplay the characters in order allocate the characters as follows A 41H B 42H Start ae ae ee fa C 43H D 44H Start 1 4 E 45H F 46H Start 2 4 G 47H H 48H Start 3 4 gt ABCDEFGH NIJ A o oj A 203 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 5 2 2 Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specification The following describes the procedure to change displayed numerals or charac ter strings by changing the contents of the allocated words If using indirect specification refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Charac ter Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Indirect Specification page 205 Numerals and character strings can also be changed by copying between memory tables see Copying the Memory Table page 208 To change the numerals or character strings displayed on the NT620S 620C make changes with the numeral or character string memory table To make changes with the numeral or character string memory table of the NT620S 620C change the contents of words by the PC NT620S 620C Allocated word Numeral numeral table memory table 1 Start 57 6 7 8 12345678 Start 1 s 12345678 12345676 Allocated word character string memory table stri Start Mab mins Starte1 abcdef memory table 4 Starts bed When it is necessar
273. it of the touch switch at which there has been a change d4 to d4 Contents of the word after the change 4 hexadecimal digits 0000 to FFFF a to a4 Changed bit information 4 hexadecimal digits 0000 to FFFF The changed bit in the contents of the word after the change is set to 1 S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added 259 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Response Reference Example None e When the status of a touch switch changes because it has been touched or released notifies the change of status to the host e Normally one command notifies the change in status of one allocated bit only but when multiple bits in the same word change simultaneously these changes are all notified together with one command When the screen is switched after pressing a momentary key this command goes OFF The change is also notified to the host Command ESC S T 0 1 0 2 3 0 1B 53 54 30 31 30 32 33 30 1 3 0 0 0 1 0 D CR 31 33 30 30 30 31 30 44 oD 5 5 Changed word number 0102CH Contents of the word after the change hexadecimal 3013 binary notation 0011 0000 0001 0011 Changed bit information hexadecimal 0001 binary notation 0000 0000 0000 0001 Check sum hexadecimal OD From the changed word number and changed bit information it is ascertained that the change relates to
274. itch is pressed the bit comes ON if it is OFF and goes OFF if it is ON Set When the touch switch is pressed the bit comes ON and it remains ON when the touch switch is released Reset When the touch switch is pressed the bit goes OFF and it remains OFF when the touch switch is released Important points relating to notification operations Details on touch switch notification operations are tabled below When using host link When using NT link DM area Type of notification operation When using NT link other than DM area 1 Notification in word units Momentary all other bits in the word 3 Notification in bit units are OFF 2 Notification in word units Alternate note that the word con tents are read on display 4 Notification in bit units and notification is based on these contents When using touch switch input notification note the following points In the case of 1 in the table the other bits in the same word are turned OFF by notification In the case of 2 in the table since notification is executed on the basis of the contents of the word before display the other bits in the word are not overwrit ten However if the contents of the word are changed at the PC during dis play they will be rewritten based on the contents before display If the screen is switched while a momentary key is pressed the touch switch itself will disappear and the OFF status will
275. k k k k k k oD t to ty First character string memory table number read 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0999 d14 to dim dny to dnn Contents of the read character string memory tables 2 digits hexadecimal corresponding to 1 to 40 char acters 00 to FF In the case of character string memory tables allo cated to the host this is the registered number of words multiplied by 2 and the case of character string memory tables not allocated to the host it is data for 40 characters S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added e Reads the data of the specified number of character string memory tables starting from the specified character string memory table e A maximum of 20 tables can be read at one time e In the response data is returned in units of one table at a time If reading of multiple tables is specified a number of responses equal to the specified num ber of tables is made Note that the read character string memory table num ber is always the number of the data of the response PT memory write command Sent from host to PT Command ESC W M m Cy Co Cg C4 l4 l2 1B 57 4D k k k k E oe k k k k k k k Data of 1 word Data of 1 word d1 dim f dn dnm s1 S2 CR 5 wa eee i 2C mR FUT lie ce k k k k k ve k oD p aa BY amp ve i O NS A FS m Presence
276. l area ee Screen switch setting lt Screen number Designated screen _ Copy memory table _ setting PT status control setting Screen switch setting in the PT status control area PT status notify bits 1514131211109 876543 21 OBit Word n Screen number 4 digit BCD Screen switch setting Screen number 0000 screen clear no display 0001 to 02000 Reference The screens numbered 1997 to 1999 are earmarked for special functions as shown below The display history can be checked by calling them during opera tion 1997 Display history order of occurrence screen 1998 Display history order of frequency screen 1999 Screen when connected to the host 191 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 e Available allocation words The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay 7 Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327
277. l input and output is relative to the PC Signal sameaa Signal Name Abbreviation Direction Input Output Frame ground Send data O Receive data Request to send O Clear to send Signal ground 303 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC e Wiring connections Appendix G The NT620S 620C does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at both the NT620S 620C and CPU ends of the cable NT620S 620C RS 232C interface Abbreviation Pin number SD RD RS CS 5V PC CPU Pin number Abbreviation 1 FG SD RD RS CS SG O O N OD om AI VIN 304 Shielding wire NIJA AJIN SG RS 232C interface 9 pin connector Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G Connecting an NT620S 620C to a CVM1 CV Series Host Link Unit e CVM1 CV series host link unit connector specifications Applicable host link unit CV500 LK201 Electrical characteristics Complies with EIA RS 232C Signal direction Signal input and output is relative to the PC Communication port 1 25 pin Connector 1 14 yon me Signal Name Abbreviatio
278. l size characters 40 bytes can be stored in one memory table The character string memory tables at up to 50 positions can be registered in one screen Number of Character string Memory Tables Displaying a Character string Set the number of character string memory tables in the support tool s system memory 256 Sets the number of character string memory tables to 256 1000 Sets the number of character string memory tables to 1000 The difference between setting 1000 character string memory tables and 256 character string memory tables in terms of the memory capacity required for screens is 29760 bytes The character string memory tables are registered with table numbers 0 to 999 When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the position on the screen to display a character string and also set a character string number to be displayed When the NT620S 620C is operated the screen displays the contents of the character string memory table For the actual method used to modify a currently displayed character string see Changing Displayed Numerals or Character Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words page 205 Character string memory tables are divided into two types depending on their numbers Numbers 0 to 255 can be written to and read from without restriction while numbers 256 to 999 are read only character string memory tables The difference in the way memory tables are used depending
279. larm List amp History Display Functions 00 0000 178 4 11 1 Alarm List Display 00 oe cee eee eee 178 4 11 2 Displaying the Alarm History 0 0 00 0c cee eee ee eee 181 113 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 4 1 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data This section describes briefly the support tool settings required for creating screen data and the screen data creation procedure Reference For the details of the support tool and screen data creation refer to the NT se ries Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L 4 1 1 Setting the Support Tool for Use with the NT620S 620C To create the screen data for the NT620S 620C make settings with the support tool for use with the NT620S 620C NT series Support Tool Yersion 2 3 Edit Screen r Tool Settings Exit C OMRON Corporation 1995 ALL Rights Reserved Select Tool Settings Tool Settings BPT Type T2OM NT20S ST121 124 ONT20S TE00M ONTOS ENTSLOG o NT30C o 96KB 0 128KB O Vers Memory Size Direct Access Direct Maen Type Printer Sheet Feeder Mouse Use Epson Dot Matrix es o Auto movemnt o AutoMvmnt ONot used Mz a OOB OM OOOOO Communication Port OM1 Communication Mode m Standard ispeed be Work Di rectory Data Di rectory IDE To specify the type as the
280. layed Word Address Setting Error Word Area of Screen data or PT Control Area is wrong Please confirm Screen Data 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transfer The table below shows the errors that can occur when data is written to the NT620S 620C screen data memory and their remedies Message Cause Remedy Initialization Error Hardware fault or screen data If the same message is displayed even after memory life reached executing screen data memory initialization or screen data transmission several times contact your OMRON service center 7 2 4 Communication Errors This section describes the errors relating to communication with the PC that can occur during operation and their remedies e Operation when a communication error occurs When a communication error occurs the error message is displayed at the NT620S 620C and the buzzer sounds Error messages are displayed when the Automatic Reset memory switch is not set OFF Note Some error messages are displayed even if the Automatic Reset memory switch is set ON e Procedure when a communication error occurs When an error message is displayed press the Confirm touch switch dis played on the screen The screen display will return to the RUN mode e Display of communication errors As shown below communication errors are displayed in the center of the screen together with a classification indicating whether the
281. le operations For details on the actual operations required for these functions refer to Section 5 Using Host Link NT Link NT620S NT620C Functions that can be Controlled The following NT620S NT620C functions can be controlled Screen display Screens can be displayed and deleted Buzzer Three types of buzzer can be sounded and stopped Display history initialization The display history can be initialized Window control The opening of pop up windows can be disabled Numeral character string input control The input of numerals and character strings can be dis abled For details on the actual methods used for these types of control with the NT620S NT620C see Section 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 Ascertainable NT620S NT620C Operation Statuses The following NT620S NT620C statuses can be ascertained Operating status Whether the NT620S NT620C is operating or not Battery voltage The battery voltage Screen number The screen number of the currently displayed screen Numeral setting input Whether a numerical value has been input with a numeral setting Printer operating status Whether the printer is printing or stopped For the actual methods used to determine these operation statuses of the NT620S NT620C see Section 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Determining the NT620S 620C Operating Status page 239 128 Screen Display Section 4 3 4 3 Screen Display
282. lected file in the Scr list screen However before selecting the screen number the PT status control area and PT status notify area must be set by referring to the sections specified below To read the screen data from other file press the F5 Read function key 116 Creating and Transmitting Screen Data Section 4 1 While in the Scr list screen press the F10 Next key and then the F2 Di rect key to display the Direct Connection Data Setting window in which the head words in the PC used to allocate the following areas e PT status control area Section 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 e PT status notify area Section 5 8 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC page 239 e Numeral memory table 4 4 2 Numeral Memory Table page 135 e Character string memory table 4 4 1 Character String Memory Table page 133 e Bit memory table 4 4 3 Bit Memory Table page 136 Pressing F4 Attrib on the Scr list screen enables the screen attributes to be set in the Help Message area The following screen attributes can be set e Buzzer None Cont continuous sound Long long intermittent sound Shrt short intermittent sound e History No Yes e Keypad System User e Back Col Back Col background color can only be set when using an NT620C 4 Select a screen number and press Enter Tx DISPO NUM DISPO STR DISPO LAMP o TOUCH SW _es lt
283. llocated words Memory link can be treated in exactly the same way as direct connection except Operation of the Memory Link Section 6 1 that there is no area classification The specification of bits is also the same A diagram of the PT memory is shown below 1514131211109 8 7 65 4 3 2 1 O Bits Words 0000 0001 0002 9997 9998 9999 Reference The PT memory is backed up by the battery even while the NT620S NT620C power is OFF The explanations in this section concentrate on the memory link communication method For details on control and notification between the NT620S NT620C display elements and the PT memory refer to Section 5 Us ing Host Link NT Link 6 1 3 Memory Link Commands When using the memory link data is sent and received between the host and NT620S NT620C using commands such as those indicated below Data Read Commands Responses These are the commands for reading the contents of the PT memory and memory tables in the NT620S NT620C They are issued from the host and as the response the NT620S NT620C sends back the specified data There are the following three commands e PT memory read command Page 249 e Numeral memory table read command Page 251 e Character string memory table read command Page 252 Data Write Commands Responses These are the commands for writing data to the PT memory and memory tables in the NT620S NT620C They are issued
284. low Execute program y Stop flag 1 ON Stop touch switch Lit jg Press Run touch switch Press Stop touch switch Run flag 1 ON Run flag 0 OFF Run touch switch Lit Run touch switch Unit Stop flag 0 OFF Stop flag 1 ON Stop touch switch Unit Stop touch switch Lit 219 Numeral and Character string Setting Section 5 4 5 4 Numeral and Character string Setting 5 4 1 Notification of Numbers to the PC 220 This section describes how the numerical data input at an NT620S 620C is as certained by the PC In order to determine when numerical data has been input at the NT620S 620C the numeral setting strobe flag in the PT status notify area is used In order to determine the upgraded numeral memory table number the content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area is used When numerical data is input at the NT620S 620C this is automatically notified to the PT status notify area PT PC allocated in the PC memory as follows Notification of upgrade PT status numeral setting strobe flag turned ON 1 Upgraded numeral table number Stored in the content upgrade memory table When the PC reads the content upgrade memory table at the leading edge of the numeral setting strobe flag it determines the numeral memory table number in which the numerical data that was changed at the NT620S 620C i
285. ls Connect the cable from a PC Reset switch SW1 Initializes the NT620S 620C statuses Note that for the image data memory and the memory switch the status before the initialization is retained Printer connector Connect the printer cable here Output conforms to Centronics specifications Contrast control is available only for the following models e NT620C ST141 E e NT620C ST141B E 23 Description of Parts and Settings 2 1 2 DIP Switch Settings Section 2 1 Set the NT620S 620C operation status with the DIP switches located in the bot tom right corner on the rear side of the body ELE WAUQUUWU 24VDC GR To ee Switch Function SW2 1 Screen data forced initialize effective ineffective ON The NT620S 620C will start in a special RUN mode in which the screen data memory is initialized When it is started the memory initialization menu will be displayed For the initializa tion procedure refer to Section 3 4 Initializing Memory page 63 OFF The NT620S 620C will start in normal RUN mode System Reserved ON Displays the messages for the installer in English when SW2 8 is ON OFF Uses Japanese messages Switching to the System Menu enabled disabled ON The System Menu cannot be displayed If an error occurs during a start up the System Menu will be a
286. ls on screen switching see Switching the Screen Display page 191 If a screen disappears while bit 15 is ON switch bit 15 OFF and then back ON again Priority registration for processing NT link 1 N connections only bit 14 It is possible to register one of the multiple PTs connected by the 1 N NT link method to have processing priority The PT for which bit 14 is set ON 1 is given priority over the other PTs and has a higher response speed for display 235 NT620S 620C Status Control Section 5 7 touch switches etc When bit 14 is turned OFF 0 this registration is canceled and the normal re sponse speed is reinstated If priority registration is set for more than one PT the one for which the registration was made last will have priority By monitoring C200HX HG HE words the unit number of the PT for which priority registration has been set can be confirmed For details on the monitor ing operation at the PC side refer to the manual for the PC used Connection to RS 232C port of C200HX HG HE Channel i Function ClO265CH standard Unit No 0 Communication in progress flag ON port when connected ClO284CH port A ClO285CH port B Unit No 1 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 2 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 3 Communication in progress flag ON when connected Unit No 4 Communication in progress flag ON when conne
287. ly to the screen Characters character string memory table Character strings stored in the character string memory table are displayed The display characters can be changed by changing the data stored in the character string memory table Numeric Values numeral memory tables Numbers stored in the numeral memory table are displayed The display num bers can be changed by changing the data stored in the numeral table Hexa decimal values can also be displayed Lamps Lamps indicate the operating status They are controlled by the PC and can be lit reversed or made flash alternates normal with reversed displays Touch switches These switches can be set at any location on the screen Pressing the part of the screen where a touch switch has been set can have the following effects notification of the fact that the switch has been pressed to the PC PC notifica tion function screen switching input of a numerical value or character string guide key function input key function copying of a numerical value or charac ter string copy key function shifting to another numerical value or character string input field cursor moving key function obtaining a hard copy of the screen screen print key function Touch switches are controlled from the PC and can be made to light or flash in the same way as lamps Graphs Bar graphs trend graphs and broken line graphs can be displayed in accor dance with numerical values stored
288. m puter is normal To check communication with the support tool use the Tool Transmit function in the maintenance mode of the NT620S 620C See Checking the Communica tions with the Support Tool page 98 Precautions to be Observed During the Screen Data Transmission When any of the following or a system error occurs during the screen data trans mission the transmitted screen data will not be registered correctly to the NT620S 620C If an error message is displayed in the System Menu and the Transmit Mode cannot be selected the screen data memory needs to be initial ized e The power to the NT620S 620C is interrupted or the NT620S 620C is reset e The power to the computer on which the support tool is running is interrupted or the computer is reset e The cable connecting the NT620S 620C to the computer on which the support tool is running is disconnected or has a broken wire e The No touch switch on the NT620S 620C screen is pressed to end the trans mission during screen data transfer e The ESC key on the support tool is pressed to end the transmission When the power to the NT620S 620C is turned ON or reset the screen data is checked However if any of the above occurs during the screen data transmis sion the screen may disappear and other unexpected problems may occur In the case of such problems set DIP SW2 1 to ON to initialize the memory 79 Starting the Operation Section 3 7
289. m Menu Initialize the image data memory by following the procedure given below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode 63 Initializing Memory Section 3 4 64 Select Init Memory MAINTENANCE MENU Quit J Display History I O Check J PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Select Screen Memory INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU Quit Screen Memory Memory Table _ History Select Screen Memory Initialize Screen Memory The screen data memory is initialized During the Yes initialization the Initializ No ing message will be dis played If No is selected the memory initialization will be canceled and the NT620S 620C returns to the INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU Upon completion of image data memory initialization the NT620S 620C re turns to the INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU After the screen data memory has been initialized if an attempt is made to set the NT620S 620C to the RUN mode before screen data has been transferred from the support tool the error message No direct information is set will be dis played Initializing Memory Section 3 4 Initialization by Using the DIP Switch Forced Initialization Note Be sure to turn the power OFF before setting the
290. m Settings page 89 e Comm Method Selecting the Host Communication Method page 70 e Host Link Speed Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed page 73 e Unit No Setting the unit number page 74 Comm Method and Host Link Speed can only be set from the memory switch menu called from the system menu In addition the following settings can only be set from the support tool e Number of numeral memory tables Numeral Memory Tables page 135 e Number of character string memory tables Character String Memory Tables page 133 e Alarm FIFO Alarm History Display page 181 3 5 1 Selecting the Host Communication Method 70 The NT620S 620C can be connected to a PC by the host link NT link 1 1 NT link 1 N or memory link Either link can be selected by setting the Comm Meth od memory switch However if using the memory link install the dedicated system program using the system installer Select the communication method that is supported by the connected PC The factory setting is not fixed Select the host communication method by the menu operation from the System Menu as mentioned below Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode Select Memory Switch MAINTENANCE MENU Quit J Display Histor
291. mbed the rear part of the PT in a control panel so that after the product has been made ready for installation the user can not touch any part of it other than the part where PT operations are performed the front panel 24VDC GR rie OIOI Breaker X X X X 24VDC Power Supply Power supply In order to comply with EC directives use a SELV power supply Applicable power supply specifications are as follows Item Value Power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC fluctuation range 24 VDC 15 10 Power supply capacity 20 W or over Parts used for connection For the connection to the power supply terminal block twisted wires of 0 2 mm or greater cross sectional area and M3 5 size crimp terminals must be used Tighten the screws on the terminal block to a torque of 0 5 N m Do not connect wires that are twisted together directly to the power input termi nals This can cause fire and other hazards Use the recommended M3 5 size crimp terminals Fork type Round type 7 mm or less a 7mm or less G Recommended terminals Maker Type Type Applicable Wire fork type round type stranded wire Japan Solderless Terminal MFG 2 YS3A 2 3 5 Fuji Terminal 2 YAS3 5 V2 S3 5 2 0 to 2 63 mm2 Nichifu Terminal 2Y 3 5 2 3 5 27 Installation Section 2 2 2 2 3 Grounding The NT620S 620C has
292. mitting Screen Data 0 114 4 1 1 Setting the Support Tool for Use with the NT620S 620C 114 4 1 2 Creating Screen Data cuo oceny y berri eca i E E aea a ea V eee 115 4 2 Outlineof Functions sea srera meen Epa e e es Oe ERE a E ERIE 120 4 2 1 NT620S 620C Screen soosse iii ee i E E nee 120 4 2 2 Color Display NT620C Only 00 eee eee eee 121 4 2 3 Characters and Figures which can be Displayed 0 123 4 2 4 Communication with the PC 02 eee eee 128 A 3 Sereen Display ss cat r E E ARA eg ad Bee nl ete tases red 129 4 3 1 Classification of Screens 0 0 eect een eae 129 4 3 2 Sereen Attributes issia iho can ges ciate kaa ese we eg a he 131 4 4 Memory Tables sanot n r 22 Ria ach eae a ech ee ee Se 133 4 4 1 Character String Memory Table 00 0 cece eee eee eee 133 4 4 2 Numeral Memory Table 00 0 cee ee eee ee 135 4 4 3 Bit Memory Table e i eee S 136 4 5 Graphs ie eee ns ee ahd be Ra es BAD os Rare eet Bee eta ba eee ones games Gales 138 4 3 1 Bat Graph Functions ays eet ek op oN k Rae eats tae eS 138 4 5 2 Trend Graph Setting 224 6 0s can ees cies bees E Sete a oe 141 4 5 3 Broken Line Graph Setting 0 00 cee ee eee eee 145 4 6 LAMP Aiseee panenn pan Eren aed oop RE Hb ea ER Reged E Aa AERA ORNs Beh ae 5 tiles 148 4 6 1 Normal LAMP Functions 0 00 cece eee eee 148 4 6 2 Image Library LA
293. mory Link sania tate ties kee 243 6 1 Operation of the Memory Link 0 00 eee eee 244 6 2 Outline of Communications is oss erore aaee EKEN cece eee eens 246 6 3 Commands Responses 0 a E eee eee eee ERA eee 249 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 267 Tei Hardware Faults 2 204 Bee REE eae eal eh ea ie 268 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 0 00 e eee eee eee eee 270 7 3 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C 0 eee ee 273 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning 0 0 0c cece eee eee 278 Appendices A Specifications 4 23 34 tured ctn ite a ed Ge ack rete ae ea eee 281 B DIMENSIONS soc ikea oa h sate aries nth ah sepia bran atta aot A meena E ae iS 287 C Handling the RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit 0 0 eee eee eee 291 D NT620S 620C Installation Environment 0 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 293 E Transporting and Storing the NT620S NT620C 0 0 eee eee 295 F NT620S NT620C Internal Processing 0 0 0 eee eee ee 297 G Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC 0000000 301 H Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool 0000 313 I Connecting to an RS 232C RS 422 Converter Unit 0 00 0 00 000 315 J Mod l Pst ccs g nash aed Sats eel oni cl pe a Adana AR a eee we ee aS 317 K Option List a0 fed cenainsieees hee Sede Lae hey bb hawt 2 obeae hee ep hae htee hee ENEE 323 L P
294. mum condition Cleaning Method If the display is dirty the screen is difficult to see Clean the screen from time to time as follows e In daily cleaning wipe the display with a soft dry cloth e f the soiling cannot be removed with a dry cloth wet the cloth with diluted neu tral detergent 2 wring it out well and wipe the display with it e f rubber or vinyl products tape etc are left stuck to the display for long periods they will cause staining If such items are stuck to the display remove them during cleaning Note Never use volatile solvents such as benzene or thinners or chemical dusters These could cause degeneration of the coatings of the NT620S 620C display and body Inspection Method In normal environments inspect the NT620S 620C at intervals of between 6 months and a year In environments that are extremely hot and humid or very dusty environments shorten the inspection interval Items required for the inspection Prepare the following items before starting the inspection The tools supplied with the NT620S 620C Screwdrivers Philips flat head Tester or digital voltmeter Industrial alcohol 100 cotton cloth Hygrometer required in some cases Thermometer required in some cases Synchroscope required in some cases Pen writing oscilloscope required in some cases 278 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 Point Inspected e Points inspected Inspect the following poi
295. n able communication with a variety of hosts All you have to do is connect to the host no complicated installation work is necessary A flash memory is used for the screen data memory making battery backup unnecessary e Easy adjustment to system program version upgrades and system configura tion changes The system program is installed using the system installer The following communication methods can be used host link direct NT link and memory link e Touch switch operation The System Menu can be displayed by using the touch switches located in four corners of the screen e Compatibility with NT61LJG 610C Existing screen data ladder programs and support tools are compatible NT61LIG NT620S NT610C gt NT620C Functions of NT620S 620C Section 1 2 1 2 2 Comparison between NT620S and NT620C Two NT620 models the NT620S which is capable of versatile graphic displays and the NT620C which is also capable of color display are available The dif ferences between the NT620S and NT620C are tabled below Function NT620S NT620C Display panel Amber EL display type STN color LCD type with backlight Display size 192 mm horizontally x 120 mm vertically 8 9 in 197 mm horizontally x 149 mm vertically 9 4 in Number of display dots 640 dots horizontally x 400 vertically 640 dots horizontally x 480 vertically Number of to
296. n Direction f Input Output Connector Frame ground S o cover 8 9 1 Frame ground S 9 Send data o 9 Receive data 5 Request to send E Clear to send Signal ground 13 Carrier detected Optical connector 5V Data terminal ready Signal Signal Name Direction Input Output Connector Pin No Connector cover 2 Send data Receive data Frame ground Request to send Clear to send Signal ground 305 Method for Making the Cable for Connection to the PC Appendix G e Wiring connections CVM1 CV series host link units have two types of connector which must be wired differently The NT620S 620C does not use pin 4 RS or pin 5 CS Either short the RS and CS pins of the PC connector together or set the CTS setting selector switch at the rear face of the host link unit to OV see in the figure Connect the cable shielding wire to the connector cover and pin 1 at the host link unit end of the cable only Communication port 1 25 pin Connector NT620S 620C PC host link unit Abbreviation See AURI Abbreviation 1 1 FG SD 2 2 SD RD 3 3 RD RS 232C RS 232C RS 4 4 RS interface interface cs 5 5 cs 5V 6 j 6 7 7 SG 8 8 SG 9 Sh
297. n Protocol Communication between the host and the NT620S NT620C takes place in ac cordance with the following protocol Host program 1 2 3 OPEN instruction PRINT instruction CLOSE command LINE INPUT instruction In order to perform communications it is first necessary to open the commu nication line Opening here means making the line usable In accordance with the commands the NT620S NT620C is controlled or no tification is received from the NT620S NT620C To terminate communication the communication line is closed Function of each instruction 246 Communication line Operation at NT620S NT620C Line opened Command transmission g Command reception 3 Command i response transmission Command response transmission Lineclosed Once the line has been opened it can be used until it is closed OPEN instruction Opens the RS 232C line Also sets the communication conditions at the host side see page 54 PRINT instruction Sends commands to the NT620S NT620C via an RS 232C line Outline of Communications Section 6 2 LINE INPUT instruction Receives the command or response from the NT620S NT620C In order to receive input delimited by commas and double quotation marks use LINE INPUT CLOSE instruction Closes the RS 232C line For detailed information on instructions refer to the BASIC language instruction m
298. n is used The time function is assigned to words AR 18 to 21 of the C200H Numeral memory table No 252 2 digit display Numeral memory table No 249 2 digit display Support tool settings The following settings are made using the support tool PT status control area CH0100 Numeral memory table No 264 DM0000 registration word 2 Numeral memory table No 265 DM0002 registration word 2 Data registered on the screen Numeral memory table Nos 247 to 252 Numeral memory table No 251 2 digit display Numeral memory table No 250 2 digit display 19 95 4 20 L Numeral memory table No 247 2 digit display Numeral memory table No 248 2 digit display 231 Clock Function Section 5 6 232 e PC program Create the PC program in the way shown below 00000 TIMOO1 XFER 70 0004 AR18 DMO0000 MOV 21 1254 102 MOV 21 0264 101 e Program operation MOV 21 1255 102 MOV 21 0625 101 0010 1 08 When the created screen is displayed on the NT620S 620C and the program is executed the operation is as follows 1 When bit 00000 comes ON the date and time AR 18 to 21 set in the PC are read and written to the words DMO0000 to 0003 allocated to numeral memory
299. ndix G 5 Wrap vinyl tape over the cut off end of the shielding wire 5 0 19 5 4 Units mm in Vinyl tape Soldering 1 Slide heat shrink tube over each wire 2 Pre solder each wire and connector cable 3 Solder each wire to the connector terminal ef Soldering iron Heat shrink tube F 1 5mm dia 10mm 4 Push the heat shrink tube over the soldered joint and heat the tube to shrink it in place Heat shrink tube Connector Cover Assembly Assemble the connector covers as shown in the diagram below Aluminum foil tape End connected to FG End not connected to FG 311 Appendix H Making the Cable for Connection to the Support Tool The wiring to be done depends on the type of RS 232C connector at the personal computer e For a 25 pin connector sD O sD RD OH RD Personal computer RS RS Connector for peripheral cs cs devices on PT body sa O SG FG O Shielded wire FG The table below indicates the recommended parts for making the connection cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2A 2501 25 pin manufactured by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Plug manufactured by OMRON Connector cover XM2S 2511 25 pin manufactured by OMRON XM2S 0911 9 pin manufactured by OMRON Cable AWG28X5P Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd IFVV SB CO MA VV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd 5PX28AWG e For a 9 pin connector
300. ne whether a change of PC contact to which the Bit Memory Table is assigned is recorded in the Alarm History e Screen changeover function This setting is to determine whether the Bit Memory Table is used for the screen changeover function e Character string memory table number The Character String Memory Table number displayed as a message is set This setting is not necessary when used for the screen changeover function e Display color NT620C only Color of the characters used for message is to be set This setting is not neces sary when used for the screen changeover function e Image library This is a setting of a code for Image Library data displayed together with a mes sage This setting is not necessary when used for the screen changeover func tion e Screen changeover This is a setting of a screen number displayed for the screen changeover func tion or alarm list amp history display function 137 Graphs Section 4 5 4 5 Graphs e Contact This is a setting of a contact on the PC to which the Bit Memory Table is assigned C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data Memory Data Memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG The Auxiliary Relay area of CVM1 CV series PC is used exclusively for special application in
301. nformation Direct connection information When screen data is transmitted from the support tool to the NT620S 620C all existing screen data in the NT620S NT620C is deleted Transmission in screen units is not possible with the NT620S 620C If an error message and the System Menu are displayed immediately after the NT620S 620C has been started the screen data memory needs to be initialized Transmitting the Screen Data from the Support Tool To transmit the screen data from the support tool to the NT620S 620C connect the NT620S 620C to the computer on which the support tool is being used and follow the procedure below Reference When screen data transmission is performed the NT620S 620C screen data memory is automatically initialized before the new screen data is transmitted There is therefore no need to initialize the screen data memory using menu operations before transmitting the screen data The NT620S 620C uses the same connector for screen data transmission and connection to the PC If the NT620S 620C is currently connected to the PC disconnect the PC cable and connect the support tool personal computer cable to this connector before attempting screen data transmission 77 Registering the Screen Data Section 3 6 Operation 1 Connect the NT620S 620C to the computer on which the support tool is be ing used and turn ON the NT620S 620C 2 Turn ON the computer and start up the support tool
302. ng the decimal fraction when entering a decimal number or displaying a decimal fraction e Checking the upper lower limits The upper lower limits are checked when pressing the RETURN key after an input operation is completed If it is found that an input numeral value is in ex cess of limit as a result of checking the contents of the numeral memory table previous values prior to entry is displayed again but this is not notified to the PC e Example of input Numeral display varies as shown below when actually entering numeral val ues Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Input example 1 In case of decimal notation sign displayed integer part 4 digit decimal fraction 3 digit Order Key Numeral Dis play Numeral Dis play Numeral Dis play Initial value 0000 000 1524 000 0000 000 1 1 0001 000 1524 000 0000 700 0015 000 1524 100 0000 720 0152 000 1524 150 0000 720 0152 000 1524 152 0000 000 0152 000 1524 527 0001 000 1524 000 1524 527 0001 000 Input example 2 In case of decimal notation sign not displayed integer part 4 digit decimal fraction 3 digit Order Key Numeral Dis play Numeral Dis play Numeral Dis play
303. ng the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below SYSTEM MENU Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode V0 0 MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History _ I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Comm Method Host Link Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps Buzzer Sound ON Screen Saver None Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE Select Maintenance Mode Select Memory Switches Each time the Printer touch switch is pressed the next item in the appli cable cycle of options be low is selected For the NT620S PR201H TONE ESC P TONE PCL5 TONE For the NT620C PR201H COL ESC P COL ESC P TONE PCL5 TONE To set and quit the menu press the Quit touch switch The setting made last will be set and the display will return to the Maintenance Mode menu Various System Settings Section 3 8 NT620S e ESC P TONE e PR201H TONE e PCL5 TONE NT620C e ESC P COL e ESC P TONE e PR201H COL e PR201H TONE e PCL5 TONE Specify this for a printer such as the EPSON ESC P Printer 24 pin that conforms to the printer control standard ESC P A printer that emulates NEC s PC PR201H can be us
304. nnector RS 422A 8 pin terminal block RS 232C adapter RS 422 adapter Model Specification CPM1 CIFO01 Acts as a relay between the RS 232C port of the NT620S NT620C and the peripheral port of the CPM1 CPM1 CIF11 Acts as a relay between the RS 422A port of the NT620S NT620C and the peripheral port of the CPM1 Related Parts and Equipment for PT Name Remarks Support Tool NT ZA8AT EV2 3 5 inch FD System installer NT620 ZS3AT EV1 3 5 inch FD Host Link NT Link 1 1 1 N NT620 ZS3AT EMV1 Memory Link Options NT620C CFLO1 Replaceable backlight NT620C NT600M KBA04 Reflection suppressing protective sheet NT620C KBA04 NT620S Reflection suppressing protective sheet NT620C NT600S KBA0O1 Chemical resistant cover NT620S NT620C KBAO1 Chemical resistant cover NT620C 3G2A9 BAT08 Battery 320 Model List Appendix J Parts Used for Connection Cables with connectors Model Cable Length Applicable Unit Communication Method XW2Z 200S XW2Z 500S Host link units with 25 pin connectors Host link SJ46006 102 SJ4606 202 Connection cable Model Host link units with 9 pin connectors Host link NT link CPU units Remarks AWG28X5P IFVV SB Multicore cable manufactured by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB 5PX28AWG Applicable connectors Name Model Multicore cable manufactured by Hitachi Cable Ltd Remark
305. nts to determine if there is any divergence from the stated criteria If there is either improve the surrounding environment so that the values fall within the stated range or adjust the NT620S 620C Inspection Details Criterion Inspection Instrument Power supply voltage Fluctuation in power supply terminal voltage Permissible voltage fluctuation range 24 VDC 15 10 Tester Ambient environmental conditions Ambient temperature temperature in the operation panel 0 to 45 C NT620S 0 to 40 C NT620C Thermometer Ambient humidity humidity in the operation panel 35 to 85 RH Hygrometer Presence absence of dust Dust must not be settled Visual inspection Mounting conditions Looseness of mounting brackets etc To be no looseness Accessory tools Connector connections of connecting cable To be fully inserted and locked with no looseness Looseness of screws in external wiring To be no looseness Philips screwdriver Conditions of external connecting cables Faults such as incipient disconnections Visual inspection Components with limited lives Caution Reference Brightness of the backlight NT620C Must be sufficiently bright Backlight life Brightness is halved after about 10 000 hours in use Visual inspection Brightness of EL display unit NT620S Must be sufficiently bright EL display unit life B
306. nu in the System Menu The memory switches can also be set by selecting In Scr F8 on the File Selection screen of the support tool The settings made using the support tool are written to the NT620S NT620C on screen data registration For details refer to the NT series support tool operation manual V028 E1 The settings that can be recorded for the memory switches are shown below For details on each function see the next section and 3 8 Various System Settings page 81 Host Link NT Link MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Comm Method Host Link Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps a gt Buzzer Sound ON Screen Saver None j Resume Function ON j Printer ESC P TONE 69 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 Memory Link MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Host Link Speed 2400 bps Key Press Sound ON Data Bit Length 8 bits Buzzer Sound ON Stop Bit Length 1 bit Screen Saver None Parity Bit Odd Resume Function ON Flow Control RS CS Printer ESC P TONE Response Always e Key Press Sound 3 8 Various System Settings page 81 e Buzzer Sound 3 8 Various System Settings page 83 e Screen Saver Backlight 3 8 Various System Settings page 85 e Resume Function 3 8 Various System Settings page 87 e Printer 3 8 Various Syste
307. o which connection is not possible NT link CVM1 CV series PC Can be connected to CPU units However there are some CPU units to which connection is not possible see page 48 Heese cable au E na computer or FA computer for host link p p Max 15 m or RS 422A cable for host link ex 500 gt Computer NT series support tool IBM PC AT or compatible Used to create screens for NT620S NT620C at a personal computer and transfer them to the Support tool NT620S NT620C and to make NT620S NT620C settings The personal computer and ka NT620S NT620C are connected Il only when necessary ek fe REESE I foe eo to ite in f f NT620S NT620C system installer Used to change the Juan Se Se NT620S NT620C system Printer L lt a j program The personal computer Can print out screens and NT620S NT620C are being displayed at the NT620S 620C connected only when necessary NT620S NT620C Gives displays of production line monitoring and instructions to the operation site and notifies the switch ON OFF status and numeric value inputs to the PC When the NT620S NT620C is used with RS 422A an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT ALO01 is required Reference In host link and NT link 1 1 communications it is possible to connect to RS 422A via an RS 232C RS 422 converter unit NT AL001 but not to RS 485 For details on wiring with RS 422A see Appendix Connecting to an
308. of recordable screens added Page 135 Changes made to information on overlapping screens Page 136 Changes made to information on continuous screens Page 141 Information on enlarged display added Page 193 Minor change made to first paragraph after diagram Page 197 Changes made to information on the maximum number of record able alarms in three places Page 206 Information on strobes added Page 220 Changes made to information on display digits Page 224 Information added to procedure 1 Page 260 Information on thumb wheel switches added Page 299 Information on troubleshooting for display digit errors added Page 303 Changes and additions made to information on NAK Received error Page 314 Minor change made to information on touch panel specifications Page 343 Information on connector hood added Page 350 Information on cables with connectors added 337
309. of the specified number of numeral memory tables starting from the specified numeral memory table e Writing from a maximum of 20 memory tables is possible at one time 255 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Character string memory table write command Sent from host to PT Command ESC W S m ty to t3 t4 1B 57 53 k k k k k k k k di dio dn dno s4 S2 CR 5 k k a aie k k w k k we i oD hes Papel ig SRE m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present t to ty Character string memory table number written to 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0255 d1 to d1o dny to dno Contents of the read character string memory tables 2 digits hexadecimal corresponding to 1 to 40 char acters 00 to FF In the case of character string memory tables allo cated to the host specify the registered number of words multiplied by 2 and in the case of character string memory tables not allocated to the host specify the data for 40 characters S41 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits When m is 0 or 8 omit this setting Response Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC w S 0 0 S4 so CR 1B 57 53 30 30 32 35 OD S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as 25 e Write
310. onnected to the NT620S 620C The PC system settings can be made directly from the peripheral tool LSS etc or the PC system setting information created with a peripheral tool can be trans ferred to the CPU The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the PC system settings refer to the SYSMAC CLILJH User s Manual Programming W176 E1 and the SYSMAC CVM CV Se ries Support Software Operation Manual Details W196 E1 1 C series COCOH C20H C28H C40H C60H No switch settings are required when connecting to a C series CLJLJH CPU 2 CVM1 CV series CV500 CPU01 EV1 CV1000 CPU01 EV1 CV2000 CPU01 EV1 CVM1 CPU01 EV CVM1 CPU11 EV CVM1 CPU21 EV Only the CVM1 CV series CPUs of the EV1 or later version can be con nected to the NT620S 620C When connecting to a CVM1 CV series CPU set the switches as given be low Setting the front switches m O port selection selector switch Set this to RS 232C r System setting DIP SW4 To effect the existing DIP switch settings set SW4 to ON To effect the existing PC system settings set SW4 to OFF I O port lect Switch Note In the case of CPU units manufactured before June RS 232C 1995 lot No LIL165 the factory settings of the DIP
311. ons An explanatory message can be registered in a window enabling it to be used as a HELP screen during an operation C0 HELP Press here By registering multiple character keys touch switches for use in character string setting windows required for specific purposes can be displayed gt Control the conveyor whenever necessary allowing various types of input Character string setting input field numerals letters Press numerals Note In order to make character string settings a key to confirm character string in put is required Allocate the Enter or ENT control key to a touch switch to create this key 172 Press letters Window opens numerals letters Window for numerals numerals letters Window for letters Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 By registering multiple screen switching keys touch switches menus for screen switching can be created C C MENU Press here When Next is pressed When Graph is pressed w MENU O MENU ir Window Sc
312. onses Section 6 3 e Response ESC R M 0 0 1 2 0 1 1B 52 4D 30 30 31 32 30 31 9 0 0 0 A 7 CR 39 30 30 30 41 37 OD 5 5 Numeral memory table read command Sent from host to PT Command 1B 52 4E k k E k k k i 6 s CR r e sl ed m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present 8 Absent only 1 table read 9 Present only 1 table read ty to ty First numeral memory table number read 4 BCD dig its 0000 to 0999 l4 lo Number of read tables 2 BCD digits 00 100 01to99 1to 99 When m is 8 or 9 omit this setting S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits When m is 0 or 8 omit this setting Response ESC R N ty to t3 t4 ly lo 1B 52 4E k k k k k k k k k k wake Data of 1 word Data of 1 word di dim P dn dnm S4 S2 CR k k k k 2C wN k k k k k k k oD A OOTA ENNEA EET Ss Be i S ETERA EA t to ty First numeral memory table number read 4 BCD dig its 0000 to 0999 l4 lo Number of read tables 2 BCD digits 01 to 20 1 to 20 tables 251 Commands Responses Section 6 3 d14 to dim dny to dnn Contents of the numeral memory tables 1 to 8 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFFFFFF Since initial zeroes are omitted there may be less than 8 digits The data for indivi
313. or LCD not a failure with the system In such a case change the color combination e Reverse and flashing display Normal display Only the outline of a graphic is displayed in a designated color Reverse display A graphic filled in the same color as that of the graphic outline is displayed Flashing display Normal display alternates with no display Reverse and flashing display Normal display alternates with reverse dis play Polylines and arcs cannot be inverted flashed or inverted and flashed alter nately Filling can be designated only with normal display Do not fill graphics to which a flashing display or inverse flashing display attrib ute has been set If a graphic with a flashing display or inverse flashing display attribute is to be filled the area outside the graphic may be filled in the same pattern when the system operates 127 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 4 2 4 Communication with the PC Communication Using Host Link NT Link The NT620S NT620C can communicate with a PC by using the host link NT link Using the host link NT link bits and words can be allocated to any area in the PC memory and data can be written to and read from these bits and words directly This makes the following functions possible Control and notification of screen elements Control and notification of NT620S NT620C statuses Screen switching Obtaining the screen number of the currently displayed screen Memory tab
314. or the system maintenance are also explained here 3 1 Operation Flow by the System Menu 0 2 eee eee 58 3 2 Starting the NT620S 620C seers rean y eena eee 58 3 2 1 Changing the System Settings etc 0 00 eee eee eee 59 3 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu 00 0c eee eee ee eee 59 3 3 1 System Menu and the Operation Modes 00 0002 e eee 59 3 322 Menu r c 1 325 Sots gs oh hots Santee at gis saute ts dite a 60 3 3 3 Operations with the System Menu 0 00 00 eee eee eee 6l 3 4 Imtializing Memory aaen e e E date r ee ee 63 3 4 1 Initialization of the Screen Data 00 eee ec eee 63 3 4 2 Initialization of the Memory Tables 0 0 00 eee eee eee 65 3 4 3 Initialization of the Display History Data Memory 67 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches 69 3 5 1 Selecting the Host Communication Method 0000 70 3 5 2 Selecting the Host Link Communication Speed Host Link Only 73 3 5 3 Setting Unit Numbers NT Link 1 N Only 2 0 2 02 ee eee ee eee 74 3 5 4 Setting the Communication Conditions for Memory Link 75 3 6 Registering the Screen Data 0 cee eee eens 77 3 7 Starting the Operation 0 eee ete e ree eb enone 80 3 8 Various System Settings 2 cence ences 81 3 8 1 Setting the Key Press Sound
315. or to the right by one character Used to confirm an input character After confirming this a cursor moves to the following input column Be sure to press the Enter key after an input operation is completed At this time the character strings being displayed are written into the character string memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC Note In order to make character string settings a key to confirm character string in put is required Allocate the Enter or ENT control key to a touch switch to create this key Reference It is also possible to use the control keys of the input key function however the four keys used for alarm display cannot be used By switching between windows a large number of character keys can be used It is also possible to create a temporary input field in a window to allow the exist ing data to be checked while inputting new data For details see 4 10 Pop Up Window Function page 171 Using copy keys page 156 allows you to input the value or code constant stored in a character string memory table into a character string setting input field in a one touch operation Example When the NT620S is pressed 170 NT620S le Character string setting input column NT620S NT620C st211 sTi44_ ST211B ST141B LT et Pes Se pee Character keys Then w
316. orted Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably Check that the current capacity of the equipment to be supplied is within 150 mA before using the 5 V output of pin No 6 The 5 V output of NT620S NT620C delivers 5 V 5 and 150 mA maximum Do not use the 5 V output of the RS 232C interface unit Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 20 N Applying higher force may cause glass to break cause injuries and prevent operation If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession their inputs may not be suc cessfully received Safety Precautions 3 Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before moving on to the next operation Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while noth ing is displayed on the screen Otherwise the system may operate unpredict ably Only press touch switches after confirming system safety When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably Do not disassemble the NT620S NT620C for repairs or modification Other wise the product may malfunction The disposal of the NT620S NT620C and used backlights may be regulated by national and local authorities Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority To ensure system safe
317. ot required e NT620S 620C operation When the created alarm message screen is displayed the following opera tions will take place in accordance with the status of the allocated bits When all allocated bits are OFF lt gt gt 227 Alarm Lists Section 5 5 When bit AR0000 comes ON Contents of character string memory table corresponding to bit memory table No 22 WATER TANK OVERHEATING lt gt gt l If bit 00407 then comes ON PROCESS 3 STOPPED A WATER TANK OVERHEATING 4 y l When the second from top alarm message is pressed Image library data corresponding to se cond from top alarm message PROCESS 3 STOPPED A WATER TANK OVERHEATING 4 l Check the thermostat When bit 00407 returns to the OFF status WATER TANK OVERHEATING gt gt gt lt gt 228 If an alarm list with multi ple lines is created alarms are displayed in descending order of bit memory table numbers If the bit memory tables are set in ascending or der of priority the display will also be arranged in accordance with the or der of priority The alarm list is composed of touch switches By pressing the touch switch of a displayed alarm message corresponding image library data can be displayed The selected alarm message is highlighted I
318. parameters are specified in this format m 1 1 BCD digit ty to tg t4 0123 4 BCD digits l lo 99 2 BCD digits S4 S2 24 2 hexadecimal digits The character string actually transmitted is as shown below ESC R N 1 0 1 2 3 1B 52 4E 31 30 31 32 33 9 9 2 4 CR 39 39 32 34 OD 5 gt Reference In the Format sections in the explanations for commands responses paren theses are used to indicate parts that can under some circumstances be omitted and is used to indicate the ASCII code two hexadecimal digits of the specified character Processing differences according to command length e If a command is too long because it has been incorrectly specified an error response for a command length error is returned e If a command is too short because it has been incorrectly specified a commu nication error time out occurs Command transmission intervals e f commands are sent too frequently processing at the NT620S NT620C will not be able to keep pace with them and a communication error buffer overflow will occur e Use the flow control to prevent a buffer overflow 248 Commands Responses Section 6 3 Order of priority of input communication commands e When a reason for input notification arises during processing of a command from the host the input command is issued only after the ongoing command processing has been completed Ch
319. perform a communication check 98 System Maintenance Section 3 9 Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU meee GNRGR Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch Select Comm I F 1 O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED 99 System Maintenance Section 3 9 COMM I F CHECK MENU Select Tool I F Quit Tool I F TOOL I F INPUT CHECK The data received from the connected support tool are displayed in hexadecimal numbers e When the check is finished press the End touch switch The I O CHECK MENU will be redisplayed Checking the LCD EL display Check the NT620S 620C LCD EL display by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below in the case of the NT6208S EL Display is dis played and in the case of the NT620C LCD Display is displayed 100 System Maintenance SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU ad Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory
320. r Display of Characters Color Display of Graphics 122 When two display elements overlap with each other the background color of the overlying element conceals the underlaid display element Besides the above eight colors the color of transparency is available for the background of some display elements When transparency is set nothing appears behind a display element and the display element or screen background color under it becomes visible lt Normal display gt lt Transparent display gt Graphic under Graphic under character character Character Character r 1 Background color Bi St A i B Background color transparent Display elements which can be displayed in the color of transparency Normal display characters Lamp or touch switch guide display characters Lamps or touch switches when they are off Filled graphic patterns Display elements which cannot be displayed in the color of transparency Display character strings in character string memory table Display numeric values in numeral table Numeric values and character strings on numeral and character string set ting screen Characters indicating percentage on graphs The background color of the entire screen can be specified Set the background color as a screen attribute when creating screen data on the support tool The color of characters character color and that of the square frame
321. r azine 4 0 i S e Alarm list function When any contact on the PC assigned to the Bit Memory Table is 1 ON the Character String Memory Table message and Image Library being set are displayed Since smaller Bit Memory Table number is displayed preferentially when multiple Bit Memory Tables have been set to the alarm list function the 136 Memory Tables o Section 44 order of priority can be given to the message to be displayed For details refer to the 4 11 Alarm List amp History Display Functions page 178 Character String Table No 50 g NO 13 Contact PC Image Library FE52 B Ea Character String Table 3 19 No 32 Character String Table No 32 NO 14 0 A z ms Image Library FE68 lt lt 1 ON Image Library 3230 FE68 Character String Table No 54 NO 15 A Image Library FD34 mS ETER e aS Message character string No 32 and Image Library FE68 set to the Bit Memory Table number 14 Bit Memory Table Setting When the Bit Memory Table is used it is necessary to perform the following set ting at each Table before creating the screen data with the Support Tool For the setting used for alarm list and history display function refer to the 4 11 Alarm List amp History Display Functions page 178 e Recording in the alarm history This setting is to determi
322. ram Character string setting strobe flag 224 MOV 21 1 111 Notification word for content upgrade DM0106 memory table Word that stores the character string memory table number Alarm Lists Section 5 5 e Program operation 1 When the character string setting strobe flag bit 11211 comes ON 1 the contents of CH0111 the word where the content upgrade memory table is located are transferred to DM 0106 The number of the character string memory table that contains the upgraded data is stored in DM 0106 in this case it is 0002 or 0003 If the character string memory table is allocated to a PC word the value in put to it can be read easily by referring to the allocated word In this case the contents of character string memory table No 2 are stored in DM 0120 to DM 0129 and the contents of character string memory table No 3 are stored in DM 0130 to DM 0139 5 5 Alarm Lists 5 5 1 Allocated Bits of Bit Memory Tables The alarm list function automatically displays and clears alarm messages con tents of character string memory tables that correspond to the allocated bits of memory tables in accordance with the status of these bits e Available allocation bits The bit memory tables can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter
323. rary data Library data cannot be registered as display elements a Library data Even complicated a data can be Bee displayed Once they are registered as library data complicated images composed of characters and graphics can be displayed many times easily and need not be created again The image data memory can be saved at the same time Library data of up to 896 images can be registered in a screen data file as code of FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF and FD20 to FDFF 124 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Reference Basically library data can be displayed in any position on the screen But ina position where the entire library data cannot be displayed it automatically moves to another position Use care in setting a display position Difference between image data and library data While image data can take any form as shown in the screen example only images consisting of characters and graphics can be library data Because only drawn characters and graphic images are registered as library data library data requires less memory capacity than image data of which the dots to be displayed on the screen are all registered e Enlargement of characters and marks Characters and marks can be enlarged to the following scales Image data and library data are exceptions Double width
324. rear case is 0 4 N m and that for the terminal block and cables is 0 5 N m 7 3 2 Replacing the Battery The NT620S 620C uses a lithium battery to back up the memory contents The battery life is 5 years if the NT620S 620C is used in a location where the am bient temperature is 25 C If the temperature at the location of use is higher than this the battery life will be shorter Change the battery at suitable intervals in ac cordance with the operating environment of the NT620S 620C It is advisable to keep a spare battery so that the battery can be replaced immedi ately if replacement becomes necessary e Battery type C500 BAT08 e Battery replacement clues Replace the battery in the following cases The battery must be replaced within 5 days When 5 years have passed since the installation of a new battery When the RUN LED is lit in orange during operation or in red when stopped When the Battery Lowered message is displayed on switching on the pow er or resetting the NT620S 620C When Battery Lowered is displayed on performing the Battery check in the I O CHECK menu in the maintenance mode Battery replacing method Replace the battery by following the procedure given below To protect the contents of the memory the battery must be replaced in less than 5 minutes 275 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C Section 7 3 Z Caution Never short the battery terminals attempt to charge the batter
325. reate a screen of which display history will be recorded on the support tool set display history recording attributes to it Register a message describing dis play history with not more than 24 characters The display history can be recorded if the display history recording attributes for the screen have been set For further information refer to NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 1 y Initializing memory for display history recording Prior to recording initialize the memory for display history recording refer to page 67 y Recording display history When the screen with display history recording attributes requested from the PC appears during operation the display history will be recorded in the system Display History Recording Format Display history includes the following items related to the screen displayed e Screen number e Date and time of display e Message outlining screen data Maximum Number of Screens to be Recorded When recording in order of occurrence up to 1023 screens can be recorded regardless of the screen number When recording in order of frequency up to 1023 screens can be recorded and each screen can be recorded up to 255 times Since the data recorded is retained by the battery it will not be lost even if the power to the system is turned off Confirming Screen Data Recorded There are two ways to confirm screen data recorded by the maintenance mode and
326. reens 1 3 Continuous screen 1 1 touch switch A O touch switch Screen No 20 2 3 Continuous Screen No 15 screen 2 T touch switch O touch switch 3 3 Screen No 5 Continuous screen 3 Parent screen No 10 Child screens No 20 No 15 and No 5 When screen No 10 continuous screen is designated screen No 20 which is page 1 of the continuous screens will be displayed Screen No 15 or No 5 can be displayed by using the touch switches Since screen No 10 has been set for the continuous screens that screen cannot be displayed as an individual screen Screen Display Section 4 3 Switching the Continuous Screens by Using the Touch Switches Continuous screens can be switched by using touch switches to which control keys H and have been allocated If the numeral setting attribute of the parent screen is system the and control keys will be automatically created as shown in the figures below Production Status Line A Normal Line B Normal If the numeral setting attribute of the parent screen is user create touch switches to which the control keys m and are allocated during screen creation see Control Key Function page 155 Production Status Line A Normal Line B Normal 4 3 2 Screen Attributes Each screen can be set with a specific function by designatin
327. reens and Display Elements Using the pop up window function windows can be created in the screens num bered 1900 to 1979 note that a screen for which a window is registered is called a window screen Screens other than these cannot be opened as windows On returning to the Screen List screen after creating a window in the screen number range 1900 to 1979 specify the window area display area The win dow will then open in a display area of the specified size and at the specified posi tion The following elements can be displayed in NT620S NT620C windows If ele ments other than these are registered on a window screen they will not be dis played when the window opens Background color screen attribute NT620C only Fixed displays Touch switches but the input notification and screen print functions cannot be used Numeral character string input setting fields only one can be used Elements that project beyond the display area will not be displayed when the win dow opens Similarly display elements on the base screen that overlap even partly with the window will be deleted when the window opens Note Since the pop up window function and screen print function share the same memory area it is not possible to open a window during screen printing Con versely a screen cannot be printed while a window is open The display elements in a window cannot be notified to the PC This means that the
328. registered is exceeded is in the middle of an element that spans sever al words for example a character string memory table registration is quit without registering that element If there are bit memory tables that have been set to be read continuously the requirement for this processing is also registered If the number of such bit memory tables is large processing will be delayed Order of priority for registration Elements are registered in the following order of priority according to their type 1 Allocated words of the PT status control area 2 Allocated bits for control lamps lamp bits of touch switches bit memory tables 3 4 Allocated words of character string memory tables Allocated words of numeral memory tables Dn es pmsl in If there is more than one element for each of 2 through 4 the elements are registered in accordance with the following priority of word and bit areas Data memory DM W O relays CH 3 Timers TIM Counters CNT Holding relays HR 6 Auxiliary relays AR Within each area words and bits are allocated from the smallest number up 298 NT620S NT620C Internal Processing Appendix F Incidental Processing When the status of the NT620S 620C changes during operation ex touch switch is pressed the processing for writing the changed data to the relevant area of the PC memory is executed This kind of processing is only executed when statuses change When chang
329. return to 0 after notification is made to the PC The operations being performed at the NT620S NT620C can easily be ascertained by checking for the rising edge of these strobes Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 When connected to CVM1 CV series CPU units however if the PC is set to asynchronous operation it may not be possible to check for the rising edge Reference Make the allocations so that there is no duplication between the PT status con trol area and the PT status notify area When using the NT link 1 N allocate a PT status control area for each of the connected PTs 5 1 4 Switching the Screen Display by Using the PT Status Control Area The following describes the procedure used to switch the NT620S 620C screen display by controlling from the PC by the PT status control area The displayed screen can also be switched by other methods by registering a screen number for a touch switch or bit memory table and then pressing the touch switch or by changing the status of the allocated bit of a bit memory table during operation For details on these methods see Stand Alone Functions page 154 or the next section Switching the Screen Display by Using the Allo cated Bit of a Bit Memory Table To switch the NT620S 620C screen display by controlling from the PC write a screen number at the screen switch setting in the PT status control area NT620S 620C PT status contro
330. riate touch switches to display the System Menu Initialize Memory page 63 Select a System Menu and initialize the NT620S 620C unit memory Memory Switch Setting page 69 Select the System Menu and set the conditions for communications with the PC using the memory switch Transfer the Screen Data page 77 Connect a support tool to the NT620S 620C and transfer the screen data from the support tool to the NT620S 620C For the connection of a support tool refer to Section 2 3 Connecting to the Sup port Tool page 29 Start the Operation page 80 Connect to the PC and start the operation System Maintenance page 92 If an error has occurred during operation check the I Os settings etc referring to this guide 3 2 Starting the NT620S 620C When the NT620S 620C is started it will enter the RUN mode if system settings and screen data registration have been completed If no screen data has been registered or the screen data are destroyed the System Menu will be displayed Before turning ON the power check the following DIP switch settings on the NT620S 620C e SW2 3 Switch to the System Menu enabled disabled is set to OFF enabled e SW2 1 Screen data forced initialize Yes No is set to No ineffective e DIP switch 8 System program delete is set to OFF normal operation mode For the DIP switch settings of the unit refer to the DIP switch settings page 24 58 Operation Modes and
331. ributes The following attributes can be set for the Touch Switches e Display frame A display frame of the Touch Switch can be specified by the following two meth ods Fixed shape display frame This is a frame displaying an area of display frame type that acts as Touch Switch There are four kinds of display frames as shown in the Table below Standard Solid 1 Solid 2 No Display Frame Solid 2 is only available with the NT620C When No Display Frame is selected only the label is displayed or nothing if no label is specified unless an ON or flash instruction is sent from the PC or the touch switch is pressed Display Frame Type Switch OFF Switch ON Standard Solid 1 Solid 2 No display frame Free shape display frame This is a display frame capable of freely setting the display position and shape irrespective of Touch Switch area A shape to be specified can be se 6 D o lected out of Square Circle Polygon and Fan For example free shape display frame can be used in the following manner Shown in reverse video When this position is pressed Touch Switch area Display frame lt Example of setting a display frame inside the Touch Switch area gt Shown in reverse video When this position is pressed Display frame Touch Switch
332. rightness is reduced by 30 after about 30 000 hours in use Visual inspection Be sure to switch the power OFF before replacement Do not disassemble for repairs or modification Otherwise the product may malfunction The disposal of the NT620S NT620C and used backlights may be regulated by national and local authorities Dispose of them in accordance with the laws and regulations of the relevant country and local authority Cautions on replacing the NT620S 620C When replacing the NT620S 620C after discovering a fault during inspections note the following points After replacement check that the new NT620S 620C is not subject to the same error If a faulty unit is returned for repairs write as detailed a description of the fault as possible and send this description together with the unit to the OMRON ad dress indicated on the back cover of this book 279 Appendix A Specifications General Specifications Item Specification Power supply voltage 24 VDC Allowable power supply voltage range 20 4 VDC to 26 4 VDC 24 VDC 15 10 Power consumption 25 W or less NT620S 20 W or less NT620C Ambient operating temperature 0 to 45 C NT620S 0 to 40 C NT620C Storage temperature 20 to 70 C NT620S 20 to 60 C NT620C Ambient operating humidity 35 to 85 RH with no condensation Operating environment No corrosive gases Resistance to electros
333. ring memory table number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0255 e to e4 Final cleared character string memory table number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0255 258 Commands Responses Section 6 3 S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits If mis 0 omit this setting Response Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC C S 0 0 S4 so CR 1B 43 53 30 30 31 31 OD S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as 11 Initializes all the character string memory tables within the range specified by the first cleared character string memory table number and final cleared character string memory table number to the value set with the support tool If settings are omitted for both the first cleared character string memory table number and the final cleared character string memory table number all the character string memory tables are cleared Itis not possible to omit just one of these settings Touch switch input notify command Sent from PT to host Command ESC S T Cy Co C3 C4 dy do 1B 53 54 k k k k k k k k k k k k d3 d4 ay ap a3 a4 S4 S2 CR T k k k k k k x OD C4 tO C4 Changed word number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 This is the number of the word containing the allo cated b
334. ring the Screen Data page 77 The NT620S screen is composed of horizontal 640 dots x vertical 400 dots The NT620C screen is composed of horizontal 640 dots x vertical 480 dots Each dot is set by the combination of the X horizontal and Y vertical coordinates The origin of coordinates 0 0 is set at the top left corner of the screen NT620S NT620C 0 X coordinate horizontal 0 X coordinate horizontal Y coordinate vertical 639 0 639 Coordinates x y Y coordinate Coordinates vertical x y 399 Display Elements Screen Management Special Screen Numbers 120 639 399 479 639 479 The screen can display the following elements Each element is called a display element Mark m Image data t Date and time 95 04 10 14 10 LINE B PRODUC Characters TION STATUS la caD RENE Touch STOP ae eee eal E switch Graphic al amp O KIN a j Lamp OUTPUTTARGET BEE 0 Character strings 3 662 5000 i Hog Ten keys an ProoucT 204 3000 MMM 11 2 3 fo it L Numeric value Numeral Graph setting All screens displayed on the NT620S 620C are managed by their screen num bers A screen number can be assigned at the time of the creation of a screen by the use of the support tool Up to 2000 screens can be created and screen numbers from 1 to 2000 can be given to each of them as desired The screen numb
335. rocedure to change displayed numerals or charac ter strings indirectly by specifying a numeral memory table The contents of the specified numeral memory table 39 in the following example case is regarded as the memory table number used for display If using direct specification refer to Changing Displayed Numerals or Charac ter Strings Changing the Contents of Allocated Words Direct Specification page 204 205 Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 206 Procedure Numerals and character strings can also be changed by copying between memory tables see Copying the Memory Table page 208 Either of the following two methods can be used to change the contents of the display 1 Changing the memory table number to be displayed To change the contents of numeral memory table 41 in the following exam ple case 2 Changing the contents of the memory table used for display To change the contents of character string memory table 39 in the follow ing example case In this section the procedure for changing the display contents by using method 1 is explained Method 2 involves changing the contents of the allocated table For details re fer to the sections on memory table copy page 208 and changing displayed nu merals or character strings direct specification page 204 NT620S 620C Indirect numeral table 41 Allocated word numeral table 41
336. ror A re send request command has been issued although there is no input notify command to re send Check sum error The specified sum value and calculated sum value differ Communication error A parity error overrun error or framing error has oc curred This error code is only issued when DIP switch 4 auto matic reset on occurrence of communication error is set to OFF S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added e f there is an error in a command received by the PT an error code is notified to the host The command in which the error occurred is invalidated 265 SECTION 7 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section describes the action to take when NT620S 620C errors occur and how to carry out maintenance and inspections to prevent the occurrence of errors T L Hardware Faults sses os skh sees he Skee is a aes ae Ss Dae ee 268 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages 0 00 00 cece eee eee 270 7 2 1 Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON 0 0 0000 270 7 2 2 Errors Occurring During Operation 0 0 0 cece eee eee 271 7 2 3 Errors Occurring on Screen Data Initialization and Transfer 271 7 2 4 Communication Errors s scssi esere ae a Sa a se Hale Co ae ee aes 271 7 3 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C 0 eee tenes 273 7 3 1 Replacing the Backlight 0 0 0 eee 273 7 3 2 Replacing the Battery 0 0 cee
337. rt 3 i lay Te Product NT20S NT620S Today s target 560 units 441 units Current Production 305 units 275 units achieved 54 5 63 0 Defective units 2 8 Repaired units 7 15 The NT620S 620C warns of system or equipment failures and prompts the ap propriate remedial action Alarm Assembly line B Positioning pin is defective The line has stopped Check the following 1 Pin L3 defective 2 Position of dog M2 3 Mounting of photosensor P5 Panel Switch Functions Setting touch switches on the NT620S 620C allows workers to use the NT620S 620C as an operating panel Production data input to the NT620S 620C can be transmitted to a PC Electroplating Control Electro Anti Washing A Transport platin corrosion P hea head ead A Clamp UP UP UP lt gt y Unclamp DOWN DOWN DOWN Inter Forward Electro washing At Sto mediate lyte eter corrosive Busser Alarm Reset stop Reverse agent Role and Operation of NT620S 620C Section 1 1 1 1 2 Operations of NT620S 620C Displays Screens The information to be displayed screen data can be created on a computer by using support tools and stored in the NT620S 620C The screen data can be dis played on the NT620S 620C in response to the instructions from a PC or
338. rtexes can be drawn Circle Arc Fan gt 2 2 e Designation of line types Straight lines are available in the following four types Solid line Broken line 1 dot chain line 2 dot chain line Other graphics can be drawn only with a polyline e Filling The areas of graphics within the outline closed areas can be filled in a tiling pattern There are ten tiling patters as shown below d Crosshatch e Color display NT620C only Number of graphic frame colors 8 Number of display colors in filling 8 The tiling pattern colors are display colors Number of background colors in filling 8 or transparent The color visible between the blocks of the tiling pattern is the background color When transparent is selected the display element under the graphic appears to be transparent Number of outline colors in filling 8 126 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Note The color of the boundary line surrounding the area to be filled is the outline color Background color Tiling pattern display color Tiling pattern background color When transparent is selected the screen background color ap pears to be transparent Part of the graphic frame may be invisible because of the combination of the display in filling background and outline colors This phenomenon is peculiar to a col
339. ry table initialization Refer to 7 3 2 Replacing the Battery page 275 and 3 4 2 Initialization of the Memory Tables page 65 If a battery is not used set the resume function to OFF Refer to 3 8 4 Resume Function page 87 The resume function is set to ON and so the initial values for image memory are not reflected in the memory table Execute memory table initialization Refer to 3 4 2 Initialization of the Memory Tables page 65 If the resume function is not required set it to OFF Refer to 3 8 4 Resume Function page 87 Only x symbols are displayed in numeral displays or numeral input fields The numeral in the numeral memory table has more digits than the number of displayable digits Check the values of words for the PC to which the numeral memory table is allocated If the number of digits in the numeral display or the numeral input field is 4 or less set the PC word allocation for the numerical memory table to 1 269 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 7 2 Responding to Displayed Error Messages When the NT620S 620C displays an error message find the corresponding symptoms in the appropriate table below and respond by following the Remedy indicated in the table 7 2 1 Errors Occurring when the Power is Turned ON Message The table below shows the errors that can occur when the power supply to the NT620S 620C is turned
340. ry when the main power supply is turned ON or reset e Number of registration words Set the number of words within 20 words required for registering the character string data One word can store two characters e Setting the words for the character string memory tables The character string memory tables can be allocated to the following PC words Set the word type and the first word C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 If the number of registration words x 2 word setting window set with the support tool is larger than the number of character digits character string display setting window the character string may be broken halfway Displaying and Referencing Numeral Memory Table Contents Since numeral memory tables can be allocated to words in the PC the PC can write data to the numeral memory tables and initial values can be set when creating the screen data In addition if a numeral memory table is correlated with
341. s and includes an area list for the PC WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death damage to the product or product failure Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given ix Related Manuals and Their Contents The related manuals are listed below The O symbol at the end of the manual number is the revision history symbol Operating the programmable terminal and communicating with the host e NT620S NT620C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V033 E1 L gobs EEE ETA gna AcaSacar ataeh anne artuet hy aealateth Gialesdral pease Ae This manual This operation manual is the manual for the NT620S 620C itself The NT620S 620C is a unit which integrates a programmable terminal body and host interface unit This operation manual describes the functions and handling of both the programmable terminal body and the host interface function Creating and transferring screen data e NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L The screens displayed on the NT620S 620C are created with the support tool and transferred to the NT620S 620C This manual describes how to create and transfer screen data PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the
342. s specified data to the specified character string memory tables Commands Responses Section 6 3 PT memory batch write FILL command Sent from host to PT Command ESC F 1B 46 3 e4 dy dm s1 So CR k x kK k OD Response m Check sum present absent 1 BCD digit 0 Absent 1 Present First written word number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 Final written word number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 9999 Data to be written 1 to 4 hexadecimal digits 0 to FFFF It is possible to omit initial zeroes so that there are less than 4 digits S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits If m is 0 omit this setting b4 to b4 e4 to e4 Only if Yes is set for the Response memory switch the response indicated below is returned on normal completion ESC F M 0 0 S4 so CR 1B 46 4D 30 30 30 45 oD S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added fixed as OE e Writes the specified data to all the words within the range specified by the first written word number and final written word number Numeral memory table clear command Sent from host to PT Command ESC N m b4 b2 b3 D4 1B 43 4E k k k k k k k k k k k e1 e2 e3 e4 s1 So CR aa 7 es a a Tk 0D 257 Commands
343. s stored NT620S 620C Numeral memory table 1 12345678 2345678 PT status notify area gt lt Table No memory table setting strobe Allocated word numeral table 1 flag 12345678 Start Start 1 Content upgrade memory table in the PT status notify area and PT status 1514131211109 8 765 43 21 OBit Word n mai 0 Numeral memory table No 3 digit BCD Content upgrade memory table m 2 PT status notify bits ojlolojojojolo PT status TE EE See aS eS a 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 Bit O0 O O PTstatus t Numeral setting strobe flag Numeral memory table No 000 to 999 Data is written to the content upgrade memory table as three digits of BCD binary coded decimal data When the numeral setting strobe flag bit has been notified to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on the method for storing a number in the word allocated for the nu meral table see Allocation Words and Display of the Memory Tables page 201 e Restrictions on allocating words Numeral and Character string Setting Section 5 4 The PT status notify area can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory O Data memory O Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay
344. s the host and a high level language such as BASIC or C is used for program writing commands are speci fied as ASCII character strings Note that in the explanations in this section parameters are denoted in lower case characters When specifying a command write those parts denoted in up per case without modification and write the numeric values for parameters BCD or hexadecimal as ASCII character strings Parts in square brackets such as ESC and CR each indicate one control code the ESC code the CR code etc 247 Outline of Communications Section 6 2 In the format parentheses are used to indicate parts that can under some cir cumstances be omitted and is used to indicate the ASCII code two hexadeci mal digits of the specified character In the explanations of commands expressions such as 4 BCD digits and 2 hexadecimal digits are used to mean respectively the ASCII character string for a numerical value expressed as four BCD digits and the ASCII character string for a numerical value expressed as two hexadecimal digits etc Do not specify BCD and hexadecimal data without alteration always convert it into an ASCII character string before transmission Example The format for the numeral value memory table read command is shown below ESC R N m ty to tg t4 1B 52 4E k k k k k k k k k k k ht 0 s s CR ae IR AE IE The following
345. scale Double height scale x4 scales x9 scales x16 scales x64 scales m pr H PI FPI PI FI u Wide High 4x 9x e Smoothing Characters or marks enlarged to x4 scales or larger are displayed with the outline automatically smoothed This function is called smoothing Image data and library data cannot be smoothed Enlarged Characters Enlarged Characters With smoothing Without smoothing e Color display NT620C only Number of colors 8 Number of background colors 8 or transparent e Reverse and flashing display Normal display Characters and the background are dis played in a designated color Reverse display The display brightness of the character and the background is reversed comparing with the normal display Flashing display Characters are displayed as they flash The normal display alternates with no display Reverse and flashing display The reverse display alternates with the nor mal display Reverse display flashing display and reverse and flashing display are not pos sible for image data Library data will be inverted flashed or inverted and flashed alternately accord ing to the setting at registration 125 Outline of Functions Section 4 2 Graphic Types and Their Attributes On the NT620S 620C the following types of graphic can be entered and dis played Polylines Square Polygon A polyline with up to 255 middle points A polygon with up to 255 can be drawn ve
346. screen number just switched over is also notified to the PC Depending on the screen number allocated to it a touch switch can be made to perform one of two functions When a screen number in the range 1 to 2000 is specified Pressing the touch switches causes the display to switch to the screen with the specified number When screen number 0 is specified The touch switch functions as the screen switchover return key Setting this key allows you to return to the screen that was displayed immediately before the current screen Screen number in the range 1 to 2000 set When the touch To next screen switch 1 is pressed Screen number 5 Screen number 5 is set to the touch switch 1 154 Touch Switches Section 4 7 Screen number in the range 0 set Screen number 0 is set to the touch switch 1 Menu Screen a Previous screen Screen switchover Operation 1 e Instructed by the PC e Screen switchover key Operation 2 Menu Screen Operation 1 When the touch switch 1 is pressed Operation 2 Only a touch switch can have the screen switchover return key function If dis play of screen number 0 is specified from the PC the screen will go blank The number of screens that can be returned using the screen switchover return key is a maximum of 32 scr
347. splay Refer to the Scrolling the message page 179 Displaying the image library and switching over the screen are the same as the alarm list display Refer to the Switching the Image Library to be Displayed and Switching over to the Corresponding Screen page 180 The alarm history can be displayed simultaneously in the order of occurrence and frequency in one screen respectively The alarm history display function does not automatically update the contents of display even when the state of contact is changed during displaying operation The contents of display is updated when pressing the scrolling keys 183 SECTION 5 Using Host Link NT Link This section describes how the NT620S 620C can be used when using the Host link NT link 1 1 1 N 5 1 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 186 5 1 1 Equipment and Settings Used in This Chapter 0 0004 186 5 1 2 Allocatable Bits and Words 0 0 eee eee ee 186 5 1 3 NT620S 620C Status Control and Notification to PC 00 187 5 1 4 Switching the Screen Display by Using the PT Status Control Area 00 0 0 0 2 enneren 191 5 1 5 Switching the Screen Display by Using the Allocated Bit of a Bit Memory Table 193 5 1 6 Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To Know the Number of Currently Displayed Screen 195 5 2 Memory
348. splay varies as follows according to the sign display setting Sign display No Displayed as 0 Sign display Yes Displayed in the minus range 2 When the absolute value of the value is in the range of 100 to 999 The value is displayed as it is Sign display No The display will be as mentioned below according to the graph frame setting When the frame is displayed display 999 oOo A A Graph width 8 dots 0 100 When the frame is not displayed 999 display 1 dot wide space o SOx A A Graph width 8 dots 0 100 Sign display Yes A value below 100 will be displayed in the minus direction as shown above 140 Graphs Section 4 5 3 When the absolute value of the value is above 1000 The bar graph will be displayed the same as 2 above The value is displayed as follows according to the sign display setting Sign display No xxx Sign display Yes xxx e Color display NT620C only Color of a graph to be displayed can be specified For background of a graph screen background color is displayed Graph frame in case of a graph frame 8 colors direction display area 8 colors direction display area 8 colors 4 5 2 Trend Graph Setting A trend graph displays the displacement with the lapse of time as a locus while monitoring sampling the Numeral Memory Table value periodically As time goes by the displacement varies as shown below lt
349. ssible to display a partial screen overlying the currently displayed screen This partial screen is called a window and control of windows can be allocated to touch switches Window opening is specified to disable the opening of windows using touch switches When bit 6 is set to 1 ON windows will not open even if a window opening touch switch is pressed and currently open windows are closed Numeral character string input bit 5 This bit makes it possible to disable the input and thumb wheel type input of numerical values and character strings into numeral character string input fields When bit 5 is set to 1 ON it will not be possible to input anything into input fields by pressing touch switches to which numeric keys and character string keys are allocated It will also not be possible to change numerals using thumb wheel type input 5 7 2 How to Control NT620S 620C Functions This section describes how to control the functions of the NT620S 620C e Restrictions on allocating words The PT status control area PC PT can be allocated to the PC memory areas listed in the following table 237 NT620S 620C Status Control Procedure Application 09002 09003 Section 5 7 C Series PCs Data memory CVM1 CV Series PCs Data memory Allocated Allocated Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay
350. t PC Tan Image Library FE52 apie Character String Table No 50 7 A000000 1 ON Character String Table No 32 Character String Table No 32 _ NO 1 4 So aaa 1 L001003 lt Image Library FE68 NO 15 5 010015 ee Library Character String Table No 54 ASNT oie i n Image Library FD34 m a ae When the upper message displayed is pressed the image li brary FE52 set to the bit memory table number 13 is displayed When the contact corresponding to the message being displayed returns to 0 OFF the message and image library is cleared and the next message is dis played according to the order of priority e Scrolling the message When the message issued extends more than the number of lines set to mes sage display the message being displayed can be scrolled in unit of line or page When the number of lines for message display is set to four or more the control keys for scrolling are automatically created as shown below A Previous line scrolling key A Previous page scrolling key lt lt T Next page scrolling key W i Next line scrolling key F Message display field When the number of lines for message display is set to one to three only line scrolling keys are automatically created The scrolling key can also be set and corrected by the Control out of the Input Key functions of the touch switches e Scrolling keys shown in reverse video 179
351. t is also possible to set correspondences between bit memory tables and screen numbers Here if the second alarm message is pressed again the corresponding screen will be displayed Clock Function Section 5 6 5 6 Clock Function Reference The NT620S 620C has a clock function for setting the date and time This section explains how to set the date and time and how to notify the date and time to the PC When the voltage of the battery in the NT620S 620C becomes low the clock function will not operate correctly when the power is switched off 5 6 1 About the Clock Function Function The clock function uses the numeral memory tables numbered 247 through 255 these memory tables are used exclusively for clock data As shown in the table below numbers 247 through 253 are for display and read ing only and numbers 254 and 255 are for time setting Numbers 247 through 253 store clock data which is updated by the internal clock of the NT620S 620C This data cannot be rewritten by the PC Numeral memory table Information Value Remarks Display reading only 247 Second 00 to 59 248 Minute 00 to 59 249 Hour 00 to 23 24 hour system 250 Date 01 to 31 251 Month 01 to 12 252 Year 00 to 99 Last 2 digits of year 253 Day of week 00 to 06 See below Setting only 0 to 7 Second 00 to 59 8 to 15 Minute 00 to 59 16 to 23 Hour 00 to 23 24 to 31 Date 01 to 31 254 24 hour system
352. t is set to ON 1 Screen switch strobe flag bit 12 When the screen displayed on the NT620S 620C is switched by a designation from the PC by the stand alone function or by the operation of the allocated bit of a bit memory table the screen switch strobe flag comes ON 1 On notifica tion to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on how the screen switch strobe flag is used see Notifying the dis play screen to the PC page 195 Numeral setting strobe flag bit 11 When numerical data is input to a numeral table using the NT620S 620C nu meral setting function the numeral setting strobe flag comes ON 1 On notifi cation to the PC it returns to the OFF 0 status For details on how the numeral setting strobe flag is used see Notification of Numbers to the PC page 220 Character string setting strobe flag bit 10 This bit is set to 1 when a character string is input to a character string memory table by using the character string setting function On notification to the PC the bit is set to 0 OFF For details see Notification of Character string to the PC page 222 Printer operating status bit 7 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 8 This bit is set to 1 ON when screen printing is executed at a printer con nected to the NT620S 620C in accordance with an instruction from a touch switch screen print key or from the PC On completion
353. t the direction that the display position of the latest data moves with the lapse of time The pen recorder type can select the direc tion that entire graph moves Rightward Upward Leftward Downward 100 100 A 1 490 9 lt _ Lt 100 100 position is determined in accordance with the direction of scroll 100 position falls to the right when a graph scrolls longitudinally and at the upper side when a graph scrolls laterally e Sign representation This attribute can specify whether or not a numeric value less than 0 value is displayed To display a value below 0 Sign display Yes 142 Graphs Section 4 5 The trend graph is displayed in the range of 100 to 100 In this case 0 position of a graph falls the center of a graph display area 100 the latest data 50 0 the latest data 80 100 Not to display a value below 0 Sign display No The trend graph is displayed in the range of 0 to 100 0 position is at the end of a graph All values less than 0 are displayed as 0 100 the latest data 80 Page a S R the latest data 120 0 e Drawing width Drawing width direction of increase must be specified from the previous data to the following data in the range of 1 to 640 dots If a value more than the graph displaying frame is specified a graph will not be displayed Drawing widt
354. t the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms This manual provides information for using the Programmable Terminal Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the software and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation It is extremely important that Programmable Terminals and related devices be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying Programmable Terminals to the abovementioned applications Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where dan ger to human life or serious damage is possible or for emergency switch applica tions Safety Precautions Safety Conventions and their Meanings xii DANGER WARNING CAUTION Read these safety precautions carefully and make sure you understand them before using the Programmable Terminal so that you can use it safely and cor rectly This operation manual uses the following conventions and symbols to indicate cautions warnings and dangers in order to ensure safe use of the PT The cau tions warnings and dangers shown here contain important information related to safety The instructions in these cau
355. t unit numbers When using NT link 1 N unit numbers are used to identify each of the multiple PTs connected to a single PC port Set a different unit num ber for each of the PTs connected to the port The unit numbers that can be set differ in accordance with the type of host PC as follows C200HE Unit Nos 0 to 3 C200HG C200HX Unit Nos 0 to 7 Set the unit numbers by following the menu operation from the System Menu de scribed below SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History I O Check PT Settings Unit Memory k Memory Switch MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Comm Method 1 N NT Link Key Press Sound OFF Host Link Speed Buzzer Sound OFF A Screen Saver None Resume Function OFF Printer ESC P TONE Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 To set and quit the menu press Quit The final settings made will be set and the screen will return to the maintenance mode menu 3 5 4 Setting the Communication Conditions for Memory Link When connecting the NT620S NT620C to the host by the memory link method set the communication conditions with the memory switches In order to use the memory link method the dedicated system program must be install
356. tables 264 and 265 2 Copy the contents of numeral memory table 264 day hour minute second into numeral memory table 254 which is used for setting the clock function 3 After waiting about a second for the memory table copy operation in step 2 to be completed copy the contents of numeral memory table 265 day of the week year month into numeral memory table 255 which used for setting the clock function The date and time set at the PC will also be set at the NT620S 620C and dis played Clock Function Section 5 6 5 6 4 Notification of the Date and Time to the PC The date and time set at the NT620S 620C can be notified to the PC The numer al memory tables numbered 247 through 253 are used for display They cannot be allocated to PC areas The method used to notify the date and time is copying between memory tables Numeral memory tables DM o Second DM0000 j lt Second DM0000 1 Minute pmooot e Minute DM0001 2 Hour DM0002 lt Hour DM0002 247 Second Copy 248 Minute 249 Hour Procedure 1 Allocate an area in the PC to the numeral memory tables number corre sponding to the data to be read that are to be made the copy destination 2 Copy the contents of numeral memory tables 247 to 253 to the numeral memory tables allocated as the copy destination in step 1 The copied date and time is notified to th
357. tatic discharge Level 3 IEC801 2 In air 8kV contact 6kV indirect 7kV Electromagnetic field strength 10V m IEC801 3 Fast transient burst noise Power supply line 2kV IEC801 4 I O line 0 25kV Damped oscillatory wave Power supply line 1kV IEC255 4 Vibration resistance 10 to 22 Hz with 1 5 mm double amplitude for a total of 30 min in X Y and Z directions 22 to 500 Hz with 1 5 G 14 7 m s acceleration in X Y and Z directions Shock resistance Durability 30 G 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Malfunction 20 G 3 times each in X Y and Z directions Dimensions mm 275 W x 192 H x 71 D mm NT620S 281 W x 198 H x 74 4 D mm NT620C Weight 2 0 kg max Enclosure ratings Front panel Equivalent to IP65 and NEMA4 front face waterproof construction Rear case IP20 Terminals IPOO Applicable standards EN61131 2 1994 EN50081 2 1992 Performance Specifications Display Specifications NT620S Item Specification EL display Number of dots 400 dots vertically x 640 dots horizontally dot size 0 30 mm 9 inch or equivalent Effective display area 120 mm vertically x 192 mm horizontally Life expectancy Approximately 30 000 hours When the brightness is reduced to 30 Display color Yellow orange Screen saver 10 minutes 1 hour None Indicators POWER Green Lit white the power is being supplied RU
358. tatus is changed during operation Example of Using the PT Status Notify Bit An operation example in which the NT620S 620C status is checked by operating the PT status notify bit is explained below e Support tool settings Perform the following setting with the support tool PT status notify area allocated word CH0110 241 Notification of the Operating Status to the PC Section 5 8 242 e PC program Create the following PC ladder program 11215 11213 Af MOV 21 1 0001 NT620S 620C stopped Battery low DMo001 PT status error storage word 11213 MOV 21 2 0002 NT620S 620C stopped Battery DM0001 normal 11215 11213 PT status error storage word MOV 21 3 0003 NT620S 620C operating Battery DMo001 low 11213 PT status error storage word MOV 21 4 0004 NT620S 620C operating Battery DM0001 normal PT status error storage word e Program operation 1 2 If PT operating status contact 11215 is turned OFF 0 and battery con tact 11213 is turned ON 1 1 NT620S 620C stop low battery voltage is transmitted to DM0001 If PT operating status contact 11215 is turned OFF 0 and battery con tact 11213 is turned OFF 0 2 NT620S 620C stop normal battery volt age is transmitted to DM0001 If PT operating status contact 11215 is turned ON 1 and battery con tact 11213 is turne
359. tch Statuses Changing the Contents of Allocated Bits page 216 For the actual method used to ascertain touch switch statuses at the PC see Notifying the PC that a Switch has been Pressed Determining Touch Switch Status page 217 Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications Press touch switches with a force of no greater than 20 N Applying higher force may cause glass to break cause injuries and prevent operation Do not press touch switches carelessly while the backlight is off or while noth ing is displayed on the screen Only press touch switches after confirming system safety 151 Touch Switches Section 4 7 If touch switches are pressed in rapid succession their inputs may not be suc cessfully received Confirm that the input of a touch switch has been successfully received before moving on to the next operation Reference Caution on pressing touch switches at 3 points When multiple touch switches are created at the relative positions indicated in the example below malfunctions may occur due to characteristics of this switch configuration Be careful about the positioning when setting touch switches Example 1 When switches are created at positions A and B and at the points where the vertical and horizontal lines extending from these two points intersect i e points C and
360. tching strobe does not need to be checked For the screen switching strobe refer to the notifying the displayed screen to the PC page 195 Continuous screens and overlapping screens Continuous or overlapping screens can be displayed by designating the parent screen If a child screen is designated only the child screen is displayed 192 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 For the continuous and overlapping screens refer to the Classification of screens page 129 Example of Display Screen Switching This example operates the PC switch bit to switch the NT620S 620C display screen e Support tool settings Make the following settings with the support tool PT status control area CH 0100 PT status notify area CH 0110 Screen number to be created Screen No 2 and No 3 PC ladder program Create a PC ladder program as follows 00002 MOV 21 1 0002 Screen number 100 Screen switch setting word 00003 MOV 21 2 0003 Screen number 100 Screen switch setting word 11212 MOV 21 3 110 Screen number A 100 Screen switch setting word Screen switch strobe flag e Program operation 1 Screen No 2 is displayed on the NT620S 620C when bit 00002 turns ON 2 Screen No 3 is displayed on the NT620S 620C when bit 00003 turns ON 3 When the screen switch strobe flag turns ON the number of the currently displayed scre
361. tem 1 ON 0 OFF Screen display Performed Not performed Processing priority regis tration See Note Continuous buzzer Registered Canceled Sounded Not sounded Intermittent buzzer short Sounded Not sounded Display history initialization Performed Not performed Intermittent buzzer long Sounded Not sounded Screen printing Performed Not performed ao open Disabled Enabled Numeral char acter string in Disabled Enabled put Note Priority registration is only effective when NT link 1 N is set The PT status control area PC to PT can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use 188 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 Note The range of each memory area differs according to the PC type See Appen dix L PC Memory Map page 327 Make the allocations so that there is no duplication between the PT status con trol area and the PT status notify area Notifying the Display
362. tem Menu will not be displayed by following the procedure given below Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu as mentioned be low The RUN LED goes off when the System Menu is displayed The NT620S 620C display screen has four touch switches to display the System Menu in the four corners measuring 6 0 mm horizontally by 7 5 mm vertically in the case of the NT620S and 6 0 mm square in the case of the NT620C Press any two of these switches at the same time to call the System Menu screen RUN mode SYSTEM MENU Press any two G of these four corners at the same time Maintenance Mod Expansion Mode Note that the touch switches used to call the System Menu are not displayed on the screen If a touch switch displayed in a corner is pressed first the touch switch will function and the System Menu will not be displayed To successfully call the System Menu first press a corner where no touch key is displayed and then press any other corner regardless of the presence of a touch key If a screen has the touch switches registered at all of the four corners it is impos sible to call the System Menu from the screen In this case switch to a screen that does not have touch switches at its four cor ners A system key function can be assigned to a touch switch Pressing the touch switch so assigne
363. tern is displayed for a long period To prevent the formation of an afterimage either use the screen saver function or periodically switch screens 3 8 4 Resume Function Note The NT620S 620C has a function to protect the contents of the memory table value setting key input data from the PC etc from being erased even if the power to the NT620S 620C is shut off during operation This function is called the resume function Setting the resume function protects the memory table from being initialized even when the power is turned on or reset or when the mode is switched to the RUN mode by the System Menu operation The screen displayed before the power is turned off will be displayed again when the NT620S 620C is started next time If the Init Memory Table is selected in Initialize Memory Menu from the Mainte nance Mode Menu the memory table will be initialized regardless of whether or not the resume function is set to ON or OFF For the memory table initialization refer to Initializing Memory page 63 If the voltage of the battery in the NT620S NT620C gets too low the contents of the memory tables cannot be saved even if the resume function is effective Use the memory switches to set whether or not the resume function is used The factory setting is not fixed 87 Various System Settings Section 3 8 88 Set the resume function by using the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below
364. the PC When there are multiple numeral setting input columns a numeral setting input column for input operation is also selected by the ten key To use the ten key type it is necessary to create not only the numeral setting in put column in a screen but also the ten key for input operation Refer to page 160 Displayed in the numeral play EIR A NT620S 620C Writing Notifying 1234 a ee ee PC 1 21 13 Pa ee Memory J56 Enter 7 8 9 a A When the key is pressed an input value is written in the numeral memory table and simul taneously notified to the PC A numeral value is entered using the ten key in the screen By means of touch switches that can be increased decreased every digit of nu meral value a numeral value can be entered from the numeral setting input col umn Every time a numeral value displayed is changed the numeral value dis played is written into the numeral memory table and simultaneously notified to the PC 159 Numeral Setting Section 4 8 Therefore the thumb wheel type can perform an entry of numeral value only by creating the numeral setting input column in a screen Each time the key is touched a numeral value decreases by PEA NT620S 620C X Writing Notifying gt 1234 1 2 3 4 y PC ELENEI Numeral Memory Table
365. the PC status notify area To indicate that the screen has switched use the screen switch strobe flag To display the number of the currently displayed screen use the currently dis played screen word When the screen has switched the NT620S 620C notifies the following to PT status notify area PT to PC allocated to the PC Screen switch notification Screen switch strobe flag of the PT status word New screen number Currently displayed screen word 195 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 By reading the currently displayed screen word when the screen switch strobe flag has turned ON the number of the currently displayed screen on the NT620S 620C is displayed NT620S 620C PT status notify area Currently Currently displayed screen lt Screen number displayed Content upgrade memory table screen PT status lt Screen switch strobe flag Currently displayed screen and PT status words in the PT status notify area 1514131211109 876543 21 OBit Word Aas x m Screen number 4 digit BCD Screen switch setting m 2 PT status notify bit 0 PT status 1 L a 15 14 13 12 1110 9 8 7 Bit 0 lo ol Screen switch strobe Screen number 0001 to 01000 Use a 4 digit BCD binary coded decimal value to set a screen number The screen switch strobe bit reverts to OFF 0 after t
366. the System Menu Section 3 3 3 2 1 Changing the System Settings etc Procedure Follow the procedure below to change the system settings or screen data con tents 1 Turn ON the power to the NT620S 620C The NT620S 620C will enter the RUN mode and the start up screen will be displayed The start up screen varies according to registered screen data 2 Press appropriate touch switches to display the System Menu and change system settings For the method for calling the System Menu refer to the Operations with the System Menu page 61 If no system program is installed or the system program has been destroyed the system program must be installed For the installation method refer to 2 4 Installing the System Program page 30 If the NT620S 620C has failed to start up normally an error message is dis played or no screen is displayed memory needs to be initialized For the memory initializing procedure refer to Section 3 4 Initializing Memory page 63 3 3 Operation Modes and the System Menu The NT620S 620C operates in either RUN or Transmit mode The operation modes can be switched by using the System Menu 3 3 1 System Menu and the Operation Modes The NT620S 620C runs in this state Controls from the PC are enabled and various indications and I O operations are made When system settings and screen data registration have been completed Power ON RUN Mo
367. the character string memory tables 1 Copy between the numeral memory tables Copy source and destination memory table numbers Character string memory table 000 to 999 Numbers 256 to 999 are read only memory tables They cannot be used as copy destina Memory Tables and Graphs Section 5 2 Procedure 1 tions In addition depending on the setting made in the system memory settings of the support tool it may not be possible to use numbers 256 through 999 Numeral memory table 000 to 999 Depending on the setting made in the system memory settings of the support tool it may not be possible to use numbers 512 through 999 Available allocation words The PT status control area can be allocated to the following PC areas C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay 7 Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CVM1 CV series PCs are allocated to the system they cannot be used for purposes other than the system use The range of respective area varies with the type of PC Refer to Appendix L PC Memory Map page 327 Use the support tool to allocate the PT status control area PC to PT to the PC memory Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be dis
368. the gap above the PCB inside the NT620C After inserting the backlight secure it well by replacing the screws with a Phil ips head screwdriver Engage the backlight connector with the NT620C connector ensuring that the projection on the backlight connector is uppermost Insert it fully home and then check that it will not come out if pulled lightly Maintenance of the NT620S 620C Section 7 3 7 Fit the CFL case lid and secure it with the screw First engage the protrusion at the left end of the lid with the opening in the NT620C then close the lid while keeping them engaged Be careful not to trap the backlight cord when closing the lid 8 Switch the power ON and confirm that operation is correct when the tests on the items indicated below are performed under I O CHECK in the mainte nance mode Also carry out a test to check communication with the host e Touch switches e Backlight 9 Provided correct operation is confirmed in all of the tests in 8 above start operation CAUTIONS WHEN REPLACING THE BACKLIGHT When replacing the backlight CFL unit observe the following precautions 1 Carry out the replacement work at a location where there is no possibility that dust or foreign matter will enter the unit or that water droplets will get onto it Discharge static electricity from your body before starting the replacement procedure 2 The optimum tightening torque for securing the CFL unit is 0 1 N m That for the
369. the screen is switched before con firmation 176 Pop up Window Function Section 4 10 Operation Example Temporary input operation example lt Base screen gt 5 input settings lt Window gt gt gt Temporary input field 8 integer digits no 00000001 Integer digits 8 Decimal fraction digits 0 y sign display 8 digits Sign display No Zero suppress No i 2 Integer digits 8 Decimal fraction digits 0 can be displayed Sign display No Zero suppress Yes 718 9 00 03 1 Integer digits 2 Decimal fraction digits 2 Sign display No Zero suppress No 4 6 00 04 lt x Integer digits 2 Decimal fraction digits 2 Sign display Yes Z iN 90000005 lt integer digits 8 Decimal fraction digits 0 1 2 3ft lt Control keys Sign display Yes Zero suppress No O JENTI Xl Numeric key Window open key Numeric key 00000001 00000001 7 00000001 00000178 ENT 00000178 2 2 7897 8 2 7 8 9 1 2 7 8 9 1 00 03 00 03 00 03 4 5 6 4 5 6 L 4 5le6 t 00 04 1 2 3 0A 00 04 Fol aan 00 04 Te Sea 00000005 FST Tlen 00000005 FST Tlen 00000005 Fo TEn
370. the touch switch allocated to bit 00 of word 0102CH and because 1 is set at the relevant position in the contents of the word after the change it is ascertained that the touch switch has been pressed if the change is to OFF since the operation differs according to the type of touch switch it cannot be determined from a change in the bit status alone whether the touch switch has been touched or released Numerical input notify command Sent from PT to host Command 260 ESC S N t to ig ti d do 1B 53 4E k k k k R k k k wF k d3 d4 d5 de d7 dg S4 S2 CR k k k k k k x OD a Commands Responses Section 6 3 ty to t4 Input numeral memory table number 4 BCD digits 0000 to 0999 This is the number of the numeral memory table for which there has been numerical input d to dg Input numeric data 8 hexadecimal digits 00000000 to FFFFFFFF S4 S2 Check sum 2 hexadecimal digits This is always added Response None e In accordance with operations at the PT such as numeral settings and copying of memory tables notifies the host that a numeric value has been input to the numeral memory table Example e Command ESC S N 0 1 5 0 0 0 1B 53 4E 30 31 35 30 30 30 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 5 CR 30 33 30 30 30 30 30 35 oD Input numeral memory table number No 150 Input numer
371. ting S1 S2 None The input notify command last sent from the PT is re sent e Requests re issue of the last input notify command touch switch input notifica tion numeral input notification character string input notification PT status no tification command issued by the PT The PT re sends the last issued input notify command e The PT records the last issued input notify command However when the pow er is switched OFF or operation stopped the information of the input notify command issued last is cleared In this case the command re send request error is returned in an error response Error response Sent from PT to host Response 264 ESC E R Cy Co S4 S2 CR 1B 45 52 bs a TA kij 0D Error code 2 BCD digits 01 Invalid command A non existent command has been used C1 C2 02 Command length error The command length differs from the stipulated length 03 Range error The word table number is outside the setting range Commands Responses Section 6 3 04 05 06 10 11 Check sum present absent specification error A value other than those stipulated has been set for the check sum present absent specification Format error A format other than that stipulated has been used for ex ample the word number has been specified with 5 dig its or a character code outside the permissible range has been used Re send request er
372. ting 1 Reference table numeral memory table No 3 221 Numeral and Character string Setting Section 5 4 Numeral setting 2 Reference table numeral memory table No 4 Numeral memory table entry number 3 4 digit input Line 1 Qty Defect limit Numeral memory table entry number 4 4 digit input e PC program Create the following PC ladder program Numeral setting strobe flag MOV 21 1 111 Notification word for content upgrade DM0105 memory table Word that stores the numeral memory table number e Program operation 1 When the numeral setting strobe flag bit 11211 comes ON 1 the contents of CH 0111 the word where the content upgrade memory table is located are transferred to DM 0105 The number of the numeral memory table that contains the upgraded data is stored in DM 0105 in this case it is 003 or 004 If the numeral memory table is allocated to a PC word the value input to it can be read easily by referring to the allocated word In this case the contents of numeral memory table No 3 are stored in DM 0005 and the contents of numeral memory table No 4 are stored in DM 0006 5 4 2 Notification of Character string to the PC 222 This section describes how the character string data input at an NT620S 620C is ascertained by the PC In order to determine when character string data has been input at the NT620S 6
373. tion 5 2 Example 12345678 Word 15 to12 11 to8 7 to4 3 toO Bit Start 5 6 7 8 Start 1 1 2 3 4 Displaying the numeral memory table Numerals can be displayed in three different ways according to the contents of the numeral memory table as mentioned below The most significant digit digit 4 of a single word or digit 8 of a double word is processed in different ways Hexadecimal display All digits are handled as stored in the allo cated words Decimal display without signs If the most significant digit is F it is handled as 0 and the most significant digit other than F and other digits are handled as stored in the allocated words Decimal display with signs If the most significant digit is F it is handled as minus sign and the most significant digit other than F and other digits are han dled as stored in the allocated words Numeral memory table display examples When the data are numeral data 0 to 9 Start 3 4 5 6 Decima without sign 123456 1 gt Decimal with sign 123456 Stat 1 Fig 4 92 i ro Hexadecimal F0123456 When the data contain characters A to F Start 3 i B 5 6 Decimal without sign 123B56 11 gt Decimal with sign 123B56 Start 1 F o 1 2 je rey Hexadecimal F0123B56 If the hexadecimal data A to F are stored when the decimal display has been set the alphabets are display
374. tions warnings and dangers must be observed The conventions used and their meanings are presented below Indicates information that if not heeded is likely to result in loss of life or serious injury Indicates information that if not heeded could possibly result in loss of life or se rious injury Indicates information that if not heeded could result in relatively serious or minor injury damage to the product or faulty operation Safety Precautions Z WARNING A Caution e Do not disassemble the unit or touch parts inside while the power in ON You could sustain an electric shock e Turn the backlight off before replacing it Otherwise you could sustain an elec tric shock Be sure to switch the power OFF before replacement Do not use the PT touch switch input functions for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch ap plications On unpacking the NT620S NT620C check its external appearance and con firm that there is no damage Also confirm that there is no abnormal noise on shaking the NT620S NT620C lightly The product may malfunction if it is damaged Before inserting or removing the connectors make sure that the NT620S NT620C and the PC are turned OFF The thickness of applicable operation panel is 1 6 mm to 4 8 mm All fittings must be tightened uniformly to a torque of 0 5 to 0 6 N m in order to ensure water and dust resistance Th
375. to the INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU 3 4 3 Initialization of the Display History Data Memory The display history page 92 is stored in the order of occurrence time order or the order of frequency frequent order Since no more display history data can be stored after the number of registered items has reached 1023 items order of occurrence or 255 items order of frequency the memory has to be initialized at regular intervals The display history data memory can be initialized by a command given from the PC Using the System Menu initialize the display history data memory by following the procedure given below Select Maintenance Mode SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode 67 Initializing Memory Section 3 4 MAINTENANCE MENU Quit Display History I O Check J PT Settings Unit Memory _ Memory Switch INITIALIZE MEMORY MENU Quit Screen Memory Memory Table _ History Initialize History Yes No Select Init Memory Select History Select Yes The display history data memory is initialized If No is selected instead of Yes the NT620S 620C returns to the INI TIALIZE MEMORY MENU without initializing the memory Upon completion of display history data initialization the
376. tor set ALQ01 RS 232C RS 232C Communication port cable cable a T NT620S NT620S 121456 NT620C NT620C 51 Connection to a PC by the NT Link 1 N Section 2 7 RS 232C Cable Wiring NT620S NT620C or PC NT ALO01 Abbrev Pin No Pin No Abbrev Connector 2 SD cover 3 RD RS 232C RS 232C SD 2 4 RS interface interface RD 3 5 CS RS 4 6 5V cs 5 9 SG 5V ONT tee een th Te This connection is not possible when using SG 3 NT620S 620C RS 422A Cable Wiring 1 PC or NT ALOO1 NT ALOO1 Abbrev Abbrev Functional Functional ground ground RS 422A RS 422A terminal Lene SDA terminal block SDB SDB block RDA RDA RDB RDB RS 422A Cable Wiring 2 NT AL001 NT ALOO1 Abbrev Abbrev F nctional 2 2 ot ST Ute Bs Functional ground A ground RS 422A RS 422A terminal PDA ESDA terminal block SDB SDB block RDA RDA RDB RDB e RS 485 Cables When using RS 485 cables note the following points The wiring for RS 485 cables is always the same regardless of the location Follow the instructions below in order to complete the wiring correctly Always set a terminal resistor terminator at both ends of the RS 485 cable Do not set terminal resistors at any other position When equipment has functional ground terminals always connect the shielding of the RS 48
377. ts of numeral memory tables 254 and 255 using the numeral setting function The maximum clock error per month is 67 seconds to 57 seconds Periodi cally correct the error April 27 1995 14 53 30 A Numeral memory tables 254 and 255 are exclusively for time setting They can be allocated to an area of the PC for other uses Itis possible to rewrite the con tents of these memory tables by first writing the new setting into tables other than 254 and 255 and then copying it into tables 254 and 255 by using the memory table copy function Date hour minute second DM0000 Day of week year month DMo002 oO Minute second DM0000 Date hour DM0001 Year month DM0002 Day of week DM0003 Date hour Copy 254 minute second lt Day of week 255 year month e Available allocation words The memory tables can be allocated to the following PC areas For time setting two words have to be allocated for each table C Series PCs Allocated CVM1 CV Series PCs Allocated Data memory Data memory O Internal Special Relay Internal Special Relay Timer Timer Counter Counter Holding Relay Auxiliary Relay Auxiliary Relay Link Relay O OK x NG Since the special auxiliary relays of the CV series PCs are allocated to the sys tem they cannot be used for purpos
378. ts the NT link 1 N i e NT30 NT30C NT20S NT600S NT620S NT620C up to eight PTs can be connected to a single PC port When using C200HX HG HE by installing an expansion communication board in the option slot of the CPU unit it is possible to connect up to three NT link 1 N systems comprising a total of 24 NT620S NT620C units For de tails on communication boards refer to the SYSMAC C200HW COM01 to 06 E Communication Board OPERATION MANUAL W304 E1 Except a DM area The NT link function is compatible with the host link function with respect to screen data The NT620S 620C screen data and the PC programs handled by the host link direct connection can be used with for the NT link as they are Communication Using the Direct Connection Function Section 1 4 1 4 3 Functions of the Allocated Bits and Words Elements displayed on the NT620S 620C and the NT620S 620C status can be allocated to the bits and words of the PC By changing the contents of the bits and words the NT620S 620C can be controlled by the PC It is also possible to send data to the PC by pressing the touch switches on the NT620S 620C Controlling the NT620S 620C by a PC The following NT620S 620C functions can be controlled by a PC Screens Display of designated screens confirmation of screen numbers etc Memory tables Writing to a memory table copying from a memory table to another memory table etc Lamps and touch
379. tual I O relay area Therefore even when screen data is created display elements must always be allocated to the I O relay area 17 Before Operating Section 1 6 For details on communication between the host and NT620S NT620C using the memory link see Section 6 Using Memory Link and for details on how to use screens and display elements and other information refer to Section 5 Using Host Link NT Link 1 6 Before Operating Follow the procedure given below to start the system of the NT620S 620C NT620S 620C Support tool Check and change the PC settings Set the DIP switches Install support tools to the computer e For the host link refer page 24 refer to the manuals for to page 32 and the the support tools manuals for the host T to a Opera link unit and peripheral lonpaner tools page 25 For the NT link 1 1 refer to page 43 Connect the power For the NT link 1 N supply refer to page 48 For the memory link _ page 27 refer to page 54 System program oe installation Only when using memory link See page 30 Refer to the manual for the system installer AA Connect to the NT620S 620C Connect to the PC Host link page 32 NT link 1 1 page 43 NT link 1 N page 48 Memory link page 54 Create the PC Check the settings program and communications y le
380. turned ON there is no need to write a program it is sufficient just to set the allocated bit e Screen display timing The NT620S 620C screen switches when the allocated bit of the bit memory table changes from the 0 OFF to 1 ON status However the display does not change when the allocated bit returns from the 1 ON to the 0 OFF status 194 Outline of Host Link NT Link Operation Section 5 1 Example Application of Screen Switching In this example if the temperature in a water tank rises above the upper limit a bit is turned ON and the warning screen that corresponds to the bit is displayed e Support tool settings The following settings are made using the support tool Bit memory table No 0 Allocated bit CH 000100 input bit that comes ON when the temperature of the water tank rises above the upper limit Function Screen switching screen No 1000 Created screen No Screen No 1000 Proc 4 Water Tank Temp OVERHEATING Urgent Check the thermostat e PC program A ladder program to control the NT620S 620C is not required e Program operation When bit 001000 comes ON the NT620S 620C displays screen No 1000 5 1 6 Notifying the Display Screen to the PC To Know the Number of Currently Displayed Screen The following describes the processing to know the number of currently dis played screen of the NT620S 620C This processing reads the data from
381. ty be sure to periodically read the PT operating status bit from the host in order to ensure that the PT is always operating normally Never short the battery terminals attempt to charge the battery or take it apart heat it or discard it into fire In the worst case explosion may occur Never short the and terminals of the battery Do not recharge take apart or heat the battery or discard it into open flame Attempting any of these will lead to hazards such as fire leakage of electrolyte rupture etc When replacing a battery ensure that the battery terminal does not touch the board in the NT620S NT620C XV SECTION 1 Functions of the NT620S 620C NT620S 620C is a new programmable terminal PT which incorporates a host interface unit and a RS 232C interface unit in a programmable terminal body It can be easily installed and used This section gives the operation examples and characteristics of the NT620S 620C so that you will understand the applica tions of the NT620S 620C 1 1 Role and Operation of NT620S 620C 0 eee eee 2 1 1 1 Operation of an NT620S 620C at an FA Production Site A tte a a A a a ae a ea a ara a ra 2 1 1 2 Operations of NT620S 620C sssssssuessrrrerrerrrrrr rreren 3 1 2 Functions of NT620S 620 ae irna eee eee EE EE EEE ERA E ERE 4 E2 PEAS ot taeda meriame i a het iat det heat n a dept bees 4 1 2 2 Comparison between NT620S and NT620C 00 0000 00000 5
382. uch switches on the screen in advance 95 System Maintenance Section 3 9 3 9 2 I O Check 96 The I O operations for the following items of the NT620S 620C are checked by the I O check function Touch Switch Communication I F LCD EL Buzzer LED Battery DIP Switch Screen Memory Printer I F Calender amp Clock Backlight NT620C only System Maintenance Section 3 9 Checking the Touch Switches Execute a touch switch check by the menu operation from the System Menu as shown below SYSTEM MENU V0 0 Select Maintenance Mode Quit Transmit Mode Maintenance Mode Expansion Mode MAINTENANCE MENU Select ANON Quit Display History I O Check LPT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J Select Touch Switch I O CHECK MENU Quit Battery Touch Switch DIP Switch Comm I F Screen Memory EL Display Printer I F Buzzer Calendar amp Clock LED 97 System Maintenance Section 3 9 NT620S A checking screen which shows switches of 16 rows and 32 column will be displayed This touch switch is to exit the touch switch checking screen Its color is differ dl ent from t
383. uch switches 32 switches horizontally x 16 vertically 32 switches horizontally x 24 vertically Touch switch size 20 dots horizontally x 25 vertically 20 dots horizontally x 20 vertically Communication interface RS 232C connector External dimensions W H D 275 x 192 x 71mm 275 x 196 x 76 8mm Recommended panel cutout size 263 5 mm width x 180 5 mm height Replaceable backlight type No backlight NT620C CFLO1 Anti glare sheet type NT600M KBA04 NT620C KBA04 Chemical resistant cover type NT600S KBAO1 NT620C KBA01 Screen data ladder program compatibility NT610G NT612G NT610C Functions of NT620S 620C Section 1 2 1 2 3 Principal Functions of NT620S 620C The following are the principal functions of the NT620S 620C Functions relating to data display Function relating to data Character display output Characters of various sizes can be displayed Characters can be flashed and high Buzzer lighted A built in buzzer can be sounded Figure display Screen printing Solid lines squares polygons circles circular arcs fan shapes can be displayed PDA A hard copy of the screen may be They can also be painted with various patterns flashed or highlighted printed onto the printer connected Memory data display to the NT620S 620C The contents of character string memory table and of the numeral table can
384. utomatically dis played However RUN Mode cannot be entered OFF The System Menu can be displayed Automati c reset in the event of a communication error ON When a communication error occurs an error message is dis played and operation stops OFF When a communication error occurs no error message is displayed and operation continues SW2 5 to System Reserved SW2 7 ON OFF This switch must be set to the OFF position SW2 8 System installation effective ineffective ON System program installation is effective special mode at the time when the power turns ON OFF 24 Starts normal RUN mode indicates factory setting Installation Section 2 2 Caution Reference 2 2 Installation Installation Environment Caution After changing the switch settings always press the reset switch or turn the power off and back on Otherwise the product may malfunction Confirm system safety before turning the power ON OFF or resetting Other wise the system may operate unpredictably In addition to the DIP switches set also the Comm Method Host Link Speed etc at the memory switches For these settings refer to Section 3 5 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches page 69 The DIP switch settings may have to be changed after the NT620S NT620C has been installed in
385. when a touch switch is pressed e OFF The key press sound will not be given when a touch key is pressed 82 Various System Settings Section 3 8 3 8 2 Using the Buzzer Setting the Buzzer To Stop the Buzzer Sound Types of the Buzzer Sounds Setting the Buzzer The NT620S 620C can set a buzzer to indicate the occurrence of an emergency or an NT620S 620C error Except when the buzzer has been set so as not to sound at all the buzzer will sound when an error occurs To set the buzzer to sound in other cases the fol lowing two procedures can be used e Controlled by the host It is possible to control the NT620S 620C from the host to sound the buzzer during the operation Refer to Section 5 7 NT620S 620C Status Control page 234 e Set the buzzer as a screen data attribute by using the support tool When creating the screen data by using the support tool set the buzzer as a screen attribute so that the buzzer will sound When the screen in which this attribute has been set is displayed the NT620S 620C will give the buzzer sound If the control by the PC and the display of the screen in which the buzzer attribute has been set are executed simultaneously the priority is given to the control by the PC Refer to the NT series Support Tool Operation Manual V028 E1 L The buzzer sound can be stopped by the following operation e Control by the host e Switch the screen to a screen which does not
386. y I O Check PT Settings Init Memory Memory Switch J J For host link NT link MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit Comm Method Host Link Each time the Comm lt Method touch switch is pressed the setting option Buzzer Sound ON changes to the next item in Screen Saver None the sequence Host Link gt lt NT Link 1 N NT Link Key Press Sound ON Host Link Speed 9600bps Resume Function ON Printer ESC P TONE 71 Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5 72 4 MEMORY SWITCH MENU Quit J Host Link Spee 2400bps Key Press Sound ON Data Bit Length 8 bits Buzzer Sound ON Stop Bit Length 1 bit Screen Saver None J Parity Bit Odd Resume Function ON Flow Control RS CS Printer PR201H TONE Response Always For memory link This screen is only dis played when the system program dedicated to the memory link has been installed Since it is a dedi cated system program no communication method setting is required On completing setting press the Quit touch switch The settings made last will be set and the display will return to the MAINTENANCE MENU Setting the Conditions of Communications with the PC by Using the Memory Switches Section 3 5
387. y Initial processing Operation start y Initial values written to the memory tables 1 lt Screen switching y Screen element registration E y Reading of registered elements r Reading of of the elements that could not be registered ec ce cc cc Reading of of the elements that could not be registered roo ee HP eee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee Reading of of the elements that could not be registered i Reading of of the elements that could not be registered Me eyes Geek epee Egret a a SM wes ee ie Sage ee A a PT PC PT PC PT lt PC PT lt PC PT lt PC PT lt PC PT PC PT lt PC PT lt PC Details of processing Hardware check communication status check etc executed When the values registered in the NT620S 620C are used as the initial values in the memory tables these values are written into the allocated words of the PC In order to enable fast batch processing the elements used in the displayed screen are registered in the PC in advance Approximately 120 words can be registered per screen The statuses of the registered elements are read from the PC and the display is changed The status of the elements that were in excess of the number that can be registered and could therefore not be registered is read from the PC and
388. y are receive or send errors Screen when an error has occurred during reception lt Error Description gt SCI Parity Error Eontirr SCI Overflow Error Receive Error SCI Overrun Error SCI Framing Error Buffer Overflow Time Out NAK Received Unit Error FCS Error Sumcheck Error 271 Responding to Displayed Error Messages Section 7 2 Message Screen when an error has occurred during sending Sending Error Cause Confirm lt Error Description gt Time Out Remedy SCI Parity Error Framing Error Overrun Error Overflow Error Communication parameters set incorrectly Check whether the parity bit data bit length baud rate stop bit length and flow control settings of the PC match the settings of the NT620S 620C Noise caused data corruption during communication Use a noise resistant cable if communication occurs in an environment with high levels of noise The connectors of the connecting cable are not connected correctly Check the cable connection Time Out The connectors of the connecting cable have become disconnected Check the cable connection The PC is stopped Make sure the PC is able to communicate with the NT620S 620C During transmission of one command a time lapse exceeding 5 seconds is detected Check the cable connection NAK Received end code of host link simultaneously displayed Noise caused
389. y or take it apart heat it or discard it into fire In the worst case explosion may occur Operation 1 Keep the power ON for at least 1 minute and then turn it OFF Note Unless the power is kept ON for at least 1 minute the memory contents cannot be retained for more than 5 minutes without a battery 2 Turn off the power to the NT620S 620C and remove the lid of the CFL case located at the upper right part of the rear of the NT620S 620C remove the screw with a Philips head screwdriver then open the CFL case lid CFL case lid Screw securing CFL case lid 276 Maintenance of the NT620S 620C Section 7 3 4 Install a new battery Insert the battery connector keeping it straight 5 Close the CFL case lid and secure it with the screw The battery may be replaced while the power is ON In this case there are no restrictions on battery replacement time Z Caution Never short the and terminals of the battery Do not recharge take apart or heat the battery or discard it into open flame Attempting any of these will lead to hazards such as fire leakage of electrolyte rupture etc When replacing a battery ensure that the battery terminal does not touch the board in the NT620S 620C 277 Inspection and Cleaning Section 7 4 7 4 Inspection and Cleaning Clean and inspect the NT620S 620C regularly to ensure that it is always used in its opti
390. y to display changing data such as monitored data of words in the PC use the numeral and character string memory tables Procedure 1 Use the support tool to allocate the numeral and character string memory tables to the PC memory 2 Register the memory tables for the numerals and character strings to be dis played when creating the screen data by using the support tool To display a character string use character display and specify the charac ter string memory table by using the support tool To display numerals use numeral display and specify the numeral memory table by using the support tool 3 Create a PC program to write the contents of numerals and character strings to be displayed on the NT620S 620C to the PC words e Important points when writing a character string If a character string to be written is smaller than allocated word x 2 fill up the vacant space with normal size spaces 20H If unnecessary characters are left in the area the character string will not be displayed correctly Application Example of the Numeral Memory Tables Allocated to the PC Words This example gives the procedure to directly display the contents of the words allocated as the numeral memory tables in the PC memory The NT620S 620C screen display will change as the contents of the PC word change e Support tool settings Allocate the memory as shown below by using the support tool Numeral memory table entry No 1 DM000
391. ystem settings can be made directly from the peripheral tool etc or the PC system setting information created with a peripheral tool can be transferred to the CPU The following describes the switch settings so as to enable the PC system set tings For the details of the PC system settings refer to the SYSMAC CVM1 CV Series Support Software Operation Manual Details W196 E1 Unit SW3 and SW4 Set these switches to 0 OO 1 Coe loo Communications port 1 I O port selection selector switch RS 232C Set this to RS 232C Communications pote RS 232C RSA422A CTS selection DIP SW2 and SW3 VO port Set SW2 or SW3 to ON Set this always to OV selector To use communication port 1 set SW2 To use commu switch nication port 2 set SW3 RS 232C ae n e PC system setting DIP SW1 Set SW1 to OFF Communication is performed in accordance with the values set in the PC CPU special I O unit system set tings The initial values in the system settings are as follows Baud rate 9600bps Parity Even Xon Xoff control Not performed Communication mode Full duplex Stop bit 2 bits Data length 7 bits 39 Connection to a PC by the Host Link Section 2 5 Connecting to a CPU e C series COOH CVM1 CV series EV1 Set the operating conditions with the PC System Setting functions when a C H CVM1 CV series host link unit is c

NT620S/620C - Operation Manual - Anglais - Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents